JP2019187927A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing a degree of attention to a game.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine includes a game board 60 in which a game area PE is formed. A lower operation ball entry part 62 provided in the game area PE includes a lower operation hole 62a as a flow inlet of game balls, a ball passage 801 through which game balls flowing into the lower operation hole 62a pass, and a ball detection sensor 850 provided in the middle of the ball passage 801, and is configured such that game balls passing through the ball passage 801 and the ball detection sensor 850 are invisible from a front of the game machine. The ball detection sensor 850 is connected to a main control device and a detection signal is outputted to the main control part when the ball detection sensor 850 detects game balls. An operation button operated by a player is arranged in a front door frame of the game machine, and a performance corresponding to the operation is executed based on operation of the operation button to timing when game balls pass the lower operation hole 62a.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 106

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When the game ball launched from the game ball launching unit enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1). ).

JP 2002-78904 A

  In the type of gaming machine described above, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to gaming.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to a game.

The present invention
A gaming machine comprising a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed, and having a pitching portion into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter,
The entrance portion includes a ball passage through which a game ball that has flowed into an entrance portion of the entrance portion passes, and a ball detection unit that is attached to the ball passage and can detect a game ball that passes through a predetermined position in the ball passage. And the ball passage and the ball detection means are configured to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine,
Operation means operated by a player;
When a game ball that passes through the predetermined position is detected by the ball detecting means, the game ball that is the target of detection in the period before the game ball is detected is an entrance portion of the entrance portion. Operation timing determination means for determining whether or not the operation means was operated during a predetermined period including the timing of passing through
When the operation timing determination unit determines that the operation unit has been operated during the predetermined period, the operation timing determination unit includes an operation response process execution unit that executes a predetermined operation response process corresponding to the operation. It is characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, the degree of attention to a game can be preferably improved.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. (A) The front view which shows the structure of a game board, (b) It is a front view of a main display unit. It is a front view of an upper side variable prize apparatus. It is a front view of a ball entry unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is the schematic which shows the acceptance table for 1st operation ports. It is the schematic which shows the acceptance table for 2nd operation ports. (A) Schematic which shows the distribution table for 1st operation ports, (b) It is the schematic which shows the distribution table for 2nd operation ports. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for 1st working ports. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process for 1st operation ports. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for 2nd working ports. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process for 2nd operation ports. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electronic combination support. It is a flowchart which shows a power combination opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display time table switching process. It is a flowchart which shows the change display time setting process for 1st operation ports. It is a flowchart which shows the change display time setting process for 2nd operation ports. It is the schematic which shows the difference of the variable display time for every gaming state, and a fixed display time. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. (A) Schematic showing a variation display time table for the second working port in the fourth normal gaming state, (b) Schematic diagram showing a variable display time table for the first working port in the fourth normal gaming state. (A) Schematic which shows the relationship between the kind of jackpot result and the combination of the variable display time table referred in a 4th normal game state, (b) It is the schematic which shows the display of remaining time. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game in the 4th normal game state. It is a timing chart which shows increase / decrease in the ball with progress of a game. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the distribution structure of a game ball. It is the schematic which shows the success / failure table for 1st entrance parts. It is the schematic which shows the success / failure table for 2nd entrance parts. (A) Schematic which shows the allocation table for 1st entrance parts, (b) It is the schematic which shows the allocation table for 2nd entrance parts. (A) It is the schematic which contrasted low frequency support mode and high frequency support mode, (b) It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a distribution result and various modes. It is the schematic which shows the display content in a display screen. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for 1st entrance parts. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for 2nd entrance parts. It is a flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode. It is the schematic which shows the difference of the variable display time for every variable display mode, and a fixed display time. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is the schematic which shows the success / failure table in 3rd Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the flow of the display in 4th Embodiment. (A), (b) Schematic which shows the allocation table in 5th Embodiment, (c) It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a distribution result and various modes. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board in 6th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on an alerting | reporting / production control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a setting value and an advantage degree. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is the schematic which shows the flow of the effect in opening / closing execution mode. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the control process for 1st special gaming states performed by MPU of an alerting | reporting / production control apparatus, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the process for opening parts. (A) It is the schematic which shows the lottery table for setting suggestion, (b) It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a setting value and an ending image. It is a flowchart which shows the process for main parts. It is a flowchart which shows the process for rounds. It is a flowchart which shows the process for intervals. (A) It is the schematic which shows the display in round, (b) It is the schematic which shows the display in an interval. (A) Schematic which shows the display in a battle part, (b) It is the schematic which shows the display in an ending part. It is the schematic which shows the display in 7th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows a modification. It is the schematic which shows the various counters etc. in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flowchart which shows game times control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a fluctuation | variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on an alerting | reporting / production control apparatus and a display control apparatus. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is the schematic for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display control process by MPU of an alerting | reporting / production control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the change start process. (A) Schematic which shows the kind of fluctuation | variation display aspect, (b) It is the schematic which shows the outline | summary of each fluctuation | variation display aspect. (A) The flowchart which shows the command corresponding processing for the hold display control by MPU of the display control device, (b) It is the schematic which shows the appearance of the hold display. It is a flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the reservation notice by MPU of a main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the pending | holding command by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the hold notice effect by MPU of a alerting | reporting / production control apparatus. (A) It is the schematic which shows the kind of hold icon, (b) It is the schematic which shows the outline | summary of a notice effect. (A) It is the schematic which shows the outline | summary of 1st type notice effect, (b) It is the schematic which shows the outline | summary of 2nd type notice effect. (C) It is the schematic which shows the outline | summary of a special change. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for operation corresponding reach display performed by MPU of an alerting | reporting / production control apparatus. (A) The elements on larger scale of the game board in 8th Embodiment, (b) It is a sectional view on the AA line. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special operation determination performed by MPU of an alerting | reporting / production control apparatus. (A) Schematic which shows channel | path structure, (b) It is schematic which shows reception time of special operation. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for operation corresponding hold changes performed by MPU of an alerting | reporting / production control apparatus. It is the schematic which shows the mode of the display of the hold icon based on special operation. It is the schematic which shows the mode of the display of the hold icon based on special operation. (A) Schematic diagram showing movement of game ball, (b) Schematic diagram showing a modification of the correspondence between special operations and winnings in the ninth embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the channel | path structure in 10th Embodiment. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the game board in an 11th embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a winning timing and the additional display timing of a hold icon. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special operation determination. (A) Schematic diagram showing passage structure, (b) Schematic diagram showing prize waiting time. It is the schematic which shows a motion of the operation button in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special operation determination. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the interval time between winning a prize and determination of special operation. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding display addition process. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a winning timing and the addition timing of a holding | maintenance icon. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the game board in a 13th embodiment. (A) Flowchart showing winning determination process executed by MPU of main controller, (b) Schematic showing a state of winning detection. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special operation determination. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the frequency | count of HI level detection, and a reference range. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a 1st reference | standard range-a 3rd reference | standard range.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

  The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting plate members to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island facility of the game arcade.

  The gaming machine main part 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. Specifically, the upper support bracket 17 is fixed to a connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further, a lower portion is connected to the connection portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. Side support fittings 18 are provided. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 constitute a support mechanism, and the gaming machine main part 12 is rotated from the outer frame 11 to the left side in the front view of the pachinko machine 10 by the support mechanism. The right side can be turned to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with the turning tip side (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main part 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack arranged behind the inner frame 13. Unit 15. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view ( (See FIG. 3).

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. Yes. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that a substantially entire game area PE described later can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 is formed by the glass unit 22. The front door frame 14 is closed from the back side.

  The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of glass panels 23 having transparency and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion for partitioning the holding region of the glass panel 23 in the front-rear direction, and the two glass panels 23 face each other in the front-rear direction with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the glass panels 23, the gaming area PE is covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

  Note that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to make the glass panels face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a synthetic resin panel member having transparency instead of the glass panel.

  As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination part (hereinafter referred to as a lamp part 26) including a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window part 21. The lamp unit 26 is turned on or blinked according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. In addition, an error display lamp unit 27 that is turned on at the time of a predetermined error is provided in the center of the lamp unit 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and a prize ball lamp that is turned on while the prize ball is being paid out on the left and right sides thereof. A portion 28 is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28 to output sound effects corresponding to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper pan 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower pan 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described later while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 33.

  In the upper bulging portion 31, an operation button 42 for effect that is manually operated by the player is disposed at a position closer to the front side than the upper plate 33. The operation button 35 includes a button member disposed so that an operation surface to be pressed is directed upward, a holder that holds the button member so as to be displaceable up and down (standby position to maximum pressing position), and a button member The button member is displaced from the standby position to the maximum pressing position against the urging force of the urging member when the player performs a pressing operation. The button member returns to the standby position by the urging force of the urging member when the player's hand is released with the end of the operation. The operation button 35 constitutes an operation device for a player to give a predetermined instruction during the progress of the game for the purpose of causing a predetermined effect on a display screen of a symbol display device, which will be described later. .

  A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, a game ball is launched from a game ball launch mechanism described later.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper dish passage that leads to the upper dish 33 and a front door side lower dish path that leads to the lower dish 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving port portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed at the upper corner of the passage forming unit 45, and the entrance portion of the front door side upper plate passage is formed by dividing the receiving port portion into left and right by a partition wall. The portion and the entrance portion of the front door side lower dish passage are partitioned. The game balls that have entered the front door side upper dish passage are guided to the upper dish 33, and the game balls that have entered the front door side lower dish path are guided to the lower dish 34.

  Projecting shafts are provided at the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side of the back surface of the front door frame 14. These projecting shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. Further, as shown in FIG. 2, a plurality of bar brackets 49 extending rearward are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction on the rotating front end side of the back surface of the front door frame 14. These hooks 49 constitute a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

(Inner frame 13)
Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The inner frame 13 is mainly configured by a resin base 50 whose outer shape is substantially rectangular like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the resin base 50 is set slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The resin base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the resin base 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close the gap. The curtain plate is disposed below the resin base 50 (specifically, the lower end portion thereof). When the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the resin base 50 is placed on the curtain plate. .

  Support metal fittings 51 and 52 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the rotation base end side of the front surface of the resin base 50. Shaft holes are formed in the support fittings 51 and 52, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the projection shaft of the front door frame 14 into the shaft holes. ing.

  Insertion holes for inserting the metal fittings 49 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the rotation front end side of the front surface of the resin base 50. As shown in FIG. 3, the pachinko machine 10 has a configuration in which a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened by the hook metal 49 being locked to the locking device 55 (specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole. The locking device 55 has an inner frame collar member 57 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. When these inner frame hook members 57 are hooked on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11, the gaming machine main part 12 is locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

  A cylinder lock 58 for performing an unlocking operation of the locking device 55 is installed at the lower right corner of the resin base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55. When the key inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the lock of the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 is released, and the cylinder lock 58 is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 58. The locking device 55 is configured so that the locking of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released when the key is turned counterclockwise.

  A substantially elliptical window hole 54 is formed at the center of the resin base 50, and the window hole 54 is closed from behind by a game board 60 attached to the resin base 50. The game board 60 includes a wooden plywood and a sheet material that covers a front plate surface of the plywood, and the front surface of the game board 60 is exposed to the front side of the resin base 50 through the window hole 54. In the exposed portion, that is, the front surface of the game board 60, a game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed. Note that the game board 60 is not limited to wooden, and may be made of synthetic resin.

  Hereinafter, the game board 60 (in particular, various configurations arranged in the game area PE) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board 60.

(Game board 60)
The game board 60 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its thickness direction (front-rear direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning opening 61, working ball entering portions 62 and 63, variable winning devices 64 and 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, and the like. When the entrance to the entrance such as the general prize opening 61, the action entrances 62, 63, and the variable prize-winning devices 64, 65 occurs, it is detected by the detection sensor, and a predetermined number of prizes are determined based on the detection result. Benefits such as ball payout are given to the player.

  Specifically, when a ball is entered into the general winning opening 61, 10 game balls are paid out, and when a ball is entered into the first working ball portion 62, four game balls are paid out. When a game ball is paid out and a ball is thrown into the second working ball portion 63, a single game ball is paid out and a ball enters the upper variable winning device 64. 14 game balls are paid out, and 10 game balls are paid out when the lower variable winning device 65 is entered.

  An out port 68 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 60, and game balls that have not entered the various entrances are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening part, and after passing through the opening part, the game ball passes through the opening part as well as being discharged from the game area PE. A mode in which the game area PE is not discharged later is also included. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 68, the general game port 61, the actuated ball units 62 and 63, the variable game devices 64 and 65 and the through gate 66 are entered. Is also expressed as “winning”.

  The game board 60 is provided with a large number of game nails 69 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various members (servants) such as a windmill. . The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations such as the game nails 69 and the windmills, and is adjusted so that a winning to the above-described general winning opening 61 and the like occurs with an appropriate probability.

  The variable display unit 67 is arranged in the center of the game board 60, and the operation entrance parts 62, 63 and the like are arranged around the variable display unit 67. The first operation entry portion 62 includes a first operation entry portion 62L (lower operation opening 62aL) disposed below the variable display unit 67 and a right operation entry portion disposed on the right side of the variable display unit 67. It is roughly divided into a ball portion 62R (right working port 62aR). In the following description, when the lower working port 62aL and the right working port 62aR are not particularly distinguished, the lower working port 62aL and the right working port 62aR are referred to as “first working ports 62a”.

  The second actuating entrance 63 is provided with an electric accessory 71 as an open / close entrance assist device (entrance assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). The electric accessory 71 includes a shutter and a solenoid-type driving unit that drives the shutter, and the position of the shutter is changed by the driving unit. 63a) can be switched between an open state (acceptance state) in which the ball can be entered and a closed state (non-acceptance state) in which the ball cannot be entered. It should be noted that the electric accessory 71 attached to the second operation entrance 63 may be switched between a state in which entry into the second operation port 63a is easier and a state in which entry is more difficult.

  The through gate 66 is disposed at a position on the upstream side of the second operating ball entry portion 63, specifically, on the side (right side) of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE (details will be described later on the right route). ing. The through gate 66 allows a game ball to pass in the vertical direction, and the game ball won in the through gate 66 flows down to the downstream side in the game area PE without being discharged from the game area PE. Yes. When the winning combination is a lottery triggered by the passing of the game ball through the through gate 66, the electric accessory 71 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

  On the right route, a right working ball entering portion 62R, which is one of the first working ball entering portions 62, is disposed, and at a position between the right working ball entering portion 62R and the second working ball entering portion 63. The upper variable winning device 64 is disposed. The upper variable winning device 64 is formed with an upper prize winning opening through which a plurality of game balls can enter simultaneously, and an opening / closing mechanism is provided as an opening / closing means for opening and closing the upper prize winning opening. The opening / closing mechanism includes a shutter as an opening / closing member for a special prize opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (assisting state or receiving state) where a game ball can be entered or facilitated and a closed state (non-assist state or non-accepting state) where the entering ball is impossible or difficult. It has become. In addition, the shutter is connected to a variable prize driving unit (specifically, a solenoid), and the shutter is kept closed in a normal state, and the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or opening / closing execution state) is performed in the internal lottery. When it becomes the transition result, it can be switched to the open state.

  The lower variable prize-winning device 65 is disposed at a position downstream of the second working ball entering portion 63 on the right route. The lower variable prize winning device 65 is formed with a lower major prize opening through which a plurality of game balls can be entered simultaneously, and is provided with an opening / closing mechanism as an opening / closing means for opening and closing the lower major prize prize opening. The opening / closing mechanism includes a shutter as an opening / closing member for a special prize opening. The shutter can be switched between an open state (acceptance state) in which a game ball can enter and a closed state (non-acceptance state) in which the game ball cannot enter. In addition, the shutter is connected to a variable prize driving unit (specifically, a solenoid), and the shutter is kept closed in a normal state, and the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or opening / closing execution state) is performed in the internal lottery. When it becomes the transition result, it can be switched to the open state.

  Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that is shifted to a big hit or special hit, which will be described later, in a lottery based on the entry to the operation entry parts 62 and 63. As an opening mode of the lower variable winning device 65 in the opening / closing execution mode, for example, a predetermined period (30 sec or 0.8 sec in the present embodiment) or a predetermined number (9 in the present embodiment) is won. Is set to be one round, and the shutter is opened with a predetermined number of rounds (1, 2, 6, 8, 16 rounds in the present embodiment) as the upper limit.

  Next, the variable display unit 67 will be described. The variable display unit 67 has a symbol display device 75 that variably displays symbols (variation display) with a winning in the activated ball entering sections 62 and 63 as a trigger.

  The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content on the display screen 75a is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, for example, symbols are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the vertical direction. When a big win or a special win comes, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. The symbol display device 75 is not necessarily a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or a 7-segment type display device.

  The variable display unit 67 is provided with a center frame 76 so as to surround the symbol display device 75. The center frame 76 is fixed to the game board 60 from the front side thereof, and in this fixed state, the center frame 76 and the glass unit 22 are raised from the front surface of the game board 60. The gap dimension between the two is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. This prevents the game ball flowing down the game area PE from colliding with the symbol display device 75, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is on the right side of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the center frame 76). The route is roughly divided into the right route that detours from the left and the left route that detours from the left.

  Note that the above-described right working ball entering part 62R, the second working ball entering part 63, the variable winning devices 64 and 65, and the through gate 66 are arranged on the right route, and the game balls flowing down the left route are on the right side. Winning to the operating ball entering portion 62R, the second operating ball entering portion 63, the variable winning devices 64 and 65, and the through gate 66 is avoided. On the other hand, the lower operating ball entering portion 62L, which is one of the first operating ball entering portions 62, is arranged on the left route, and the game balls flowing down the right route win a prize to the lower operating ball entering portion 62L. Is avoided. The player can advantageously advance the game by selecting the launch destination of the game ball (the flow path of the game ball) from the right route / left route according to the game situation.

  A main display unit 81 is disposed on the protective member for the guide rail 100 disposed outside the game area PE. The front surface of the main display unit 81 is opposed to the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23) that allows the game area PE to be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and the opposed portion includes A main display portion D is provided on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main controller described later, and the display content of the main display unit D is controlled by the main controller.

  The main display unit D includes a first working port display unit D1 for displaying a lottery result based on winning in the first working ball entering unit 62 (first working port 62a), and a second working ball entering unit 63 (first And a second working port display section D2 for displaying a lottery result based on winning in the second working port 63a).

  In the first working port display unit D1, the display of the variation of the pattern is performed with the winning of the first working ball entry unit 62 (first working port 62a) as a trigger, and the first operation input is performed as a result of stopping the variation display. The result of the internal lottery performed based on winning in the ball unit 62 is clearly shown. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the first action entry part 62 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the variable display is stopped in the first action port display part D1. After a predetermined pattern is displayed as a stop result, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the second working port display section D2, the variation display of the picture is performed with the winning of the second operation entrance section 63 as a trigger, and the second operation entrance section 63 (second operation section) is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. The result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning in the mouth 63a) is clearly shown. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the second action entry part 63 is a winning result corresponding to the big hit or special win, the variable display is stopped and stopped at the second action port display part D2. After a predetermined pattern is displayed as a result, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode according to the result.

  Here, on the basis of winning in any of the operating ball entering parts 62, 63, the variable display is started in the corresponding operating port display units D1, D2, the predetermined stop result is displayed, and the above variable display is stopped. This is equivalent to one game time. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned content. For example, a single display area is provided, and even if a winning is made to any of the operating ball entering parts 62 and 63, the single game area is only given. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in one display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped in a state where the predetermined stop result is displayed. Once.

  The main display unit D of the main display unit 81 is provided with a first operation port reservation number display portion S1 and a second operation port reservation number display portion S2. The first operation port reservation number display portion S1 corresponds to the first operation port 62a, and the number of times that the game ball has won the first operation port 62a is reserved up to four times, and the first operation port reservation number display portion. The number of holdings is displayed by turning on / off the light emitters (LEDs) constituting S1. The second operation port hold number display portion S2 corresponds to the second operation port 63a, and the number of times that the game ball has won the second operation port 63a is held up to four times, and the second operation port hold number display. The number of reserves is displayed by turning on / off the light emitters (LEDs) constituting the part S2.

  In addition to the various display units described above, the main display unit 81 has a through gate display unit DS for displaying a lottery result based on winning in the through gate 66. In the through gate display unit DS, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the through gate 66 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 66 is displayed as a result of stopping the variation display. It is clearly shown. If the result of the internal lottery based on winning through the through gate 66 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display section DS, and the display is changed. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the state where the electric combination is released, the electric combination 71 attached to the second operation entrance portion 63 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 66 is retained up to 4 times, but the number of suspension is displayed on the main display portion D of the main display unit 81. A through gate hold number display section SS is provided.

  The configuration of the inner frame 13 will be described again with reference to FIG. 2. A game ball is directed toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41 below the mounting area of the game board 60 in the resin base 50. A game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided. The game ball launching mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying a ball and a base plate 114 on which the various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the resin base 50 so that the resin base 50 is fixed. On the other hand, it is integrated.

  The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60 side. A ball stopper that holds the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the above-described firing standby position is disposed at a position closer to the downstream end portion (that is, the lower end portion) of the firing rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

  The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source / launch control device described later. Based on the output of the electrical signal from the power supply / launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction, so that the game ball placed at the launch standby position is on the game board 60 side, more specifically, the game. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the board 60.

  In the guide rail 100, the game area PE is partitioned so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. In addition, the guide rail 100 includes an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide passage 103 is defined by both the rails 101 and 102. Is formed. The guide passage 103 has an inlet portion that is open to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the firing rail 112 and an outlet portion that is located above the game area PE. The game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion). By adjusting the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 41, the game ball can be divided into an area on the left side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE and an area on the right side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE. It is possible.

  In the game board 60, a reverse prevention member 106 for preventing the game ball reaching the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103 is attached to the front side of the exit portion, specifically near the tip of the inner rail 101. Thus, it is possible to prevent the subsequent launch of the game ball from being hindered by the game ball that has reached the game area PE first.

  The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and the firing rail 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 face each other with the lower end edge of the game board 60 interposed therebetween. That is, both the rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 are shifted left and right in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the game board 60. Thus, a gap of a predetermined interval is formed between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112 while bringing both rails 100 and 112 close to the lower end edge of the game board 60.

  A foul ball passage 46 is disposed below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage 46 is formed integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return to the inside of the guide passage 103 as foul balls, the foul balls enter the foul ball passage 46 through the gap. It becomes. The foul ball passage 46 communicates with the lower door passage on the front door side, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball passage 46 are discharged to the lower plate 34 shown in FIG. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

  A through hole that penetrates the resin base 50 in the front-rear direction is formed on the left side of the firing base 112 in the resin base 50 (specifically, the side that supports the front door frame 14). A passage forming member is formed in the through hole. 121 is disposed. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the resin base 50 and has a main body side upper dish path and a main body side lower dish path. The upstream side of the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish passage communicates with a game ball distributing section described later. In addition, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 enters below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is disposed below the main body side upper plate passage, A front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side lower dish passage.

  An opening / closing member 124 that opens and closes the main body side upper dish path and the main body side lower dish path is attached to the resin base 50 below the passage forming member 121. The opening / closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft provided at the lower end thereof so as to be pivotable in the front-rear direction, and further includes an urging member that urges the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish path to a front position. Is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening / closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure, and closes the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish path. Thereby, when the front door frame 14 is opened in a state where game balls are stored in the main body side upper dish passage or the main body side lower dish passage, it is possible to prevent such a problem that the stored balls spill out. On the other hand, in a state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper dish path and the front door side upper dish path communicate with each other, and the main body side lower dish path and the front door side lower dish path communicate with each other.

  Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (the resin base 50 and the game board 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Bearing fittings 132 are arranged vertically on the rotation base end side of the back surface of the resin base 50. The bearing bracket 132 is formed with bearing portions spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions.

  A plurality of locking fittings 135 are provided on the back surface of the resin base 50, and the game board 60 is attached to the resin base 50 by the locking fittings 135 as described above. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board 60 will be described.

  A display control device is attached to the variable display unit 67 disposed in the center of the game board 60 so as to cover the variable display unit 67 from behind (not shown). A notification / production control device unit 142 is mounted behind the display control device so as to overlap the display control device. The notification / production control device unit 142 includes a notification / production control device 143 and a mounting table 144, and the notification / production control device 143 is mounted on the mounting table 144.

  The notification / production control device 143 includes a notification / production control board that controls voice, lamp display, and control of the display control device in accordance with instructions from a main control device, which will be described later. It is accommodated in a substrate box 145 made of, for example.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a collective plate 150 is provided below the variable display unit 67 on the back surface of the game board 60. The collective board 150 is provided with a game ball collecting mechanism for collecting game balls won in various winning ports, a detection mechanism for detecting the entering of game balls into various winning ports, and the like.

  The game ball collecting mechanism will be described. The collective plate 150 is provided with a collecting passage corresponding to each of the various ball entering portions such as the general winning opening 61. These collection passages go down along the back surface of the game board 60 from these entrances, and define the fall path of the game balls. The collection paths meet near the lower end of the game board 60, and any game balls that have passed through the ball-entry portion such as the general winning opening 61 gather at the lower part of the game board 60 through the collection path. It becomes. The exit portion of each recovery passage is opened downward, and a discharge passage described later is provided on the front side (specifically, below the game board 60). The game balls gathered below the game board 60 by the collection passage are led out to the discharge passage. Similarly, the out port 68 leads to the discharge passage, and a game ball that has not won any prize opening is led out to the discharge passage through the out port 68.

  The detection mechanism will be described. The collective plate 150 is provided with detection sensors that individually correspond to various ball entering portions such as the general winning a prize opening 61. These various detection sensors are arranged in the middle of each collection passage that is connected to the ball entry portion such as the general winning opening 61, and the game ball falls in a state where the collection path of the game ball is defined in the collection passage. Detect passage. More specifically, each detection sensor detects a ball entering a ball entrance such as the general winning award 61 by passing a game ball through a detection area provided in the middle of each collection passage, Specifically, a magnetic sensor that grasps a change in a magnetic field that occurs when a game ball passes through the detection area is employed.

  These various detection sensors are electrically connected to a main control device unit 160 (specifically, a main control device) provided on the back side of the game board 60, and detection signals from these detection sensors are transmitted to the main control device. Output. Hereinafter, the main controller unit 160 and the configuration associated therewith will be described.

  The main controller unit 160 is mounted on the game board 60 so as to cover the collective plate 150 from the rear side, and includes a synthetic resin mounting base 161 and a main controller 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. It is configured. The main controller 162 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 163 made of, for example.

  The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be unsealed by a sealing portion as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used for sealing processing.

  Any structure can be applied to the sealing part as long as the box base and the box cover are connected to each other so that they cannot be opened.However, the box base and the box cover can be connected by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the sealing part. It is designed to be combined so that it cannot be opened. The sealing process by the sealing part prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation quickly and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of sealing portions. When opening the board box 163 such as when a failure occurs in the housed main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connecting part between the sealing part into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing part is provided. Disconnect. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the substrate box 163 are separated, and the internal main control substrate can be taken out. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing portions. If the history of opening the substrate box 163 is left in the substrate box 163, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 163.

  A plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 163 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and a sealing process is performed between the board box 163 and the mounting base 161 by the coupling pieces and the coupled pieces. Is called.

(Back pack unit 15)
Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from behind by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

  The back pack 201 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and as shown in FIG. 3, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. And have. The protective cover 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

  The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate 213 at the upper right portion thereof. The external terminal board 213 is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. The base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower retaining pins at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the retaining pins are inserted into bearing fittings 132 (specifically, bearing portions) provided on the inner frame 13. By doing so, the back pack unit 15 is supported rotatably with respect to the inner frame 13. In addition, a fastening tool for fastening with respect to a fastening hole provided in the inner frame 13 is provided at the rotating front end portion of the base portion 211, and the fastening tool is fitted into the fastening hole. A back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

  In the base portion 211, a payout mechanism portion 202 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is arranged at the top of the back pack 201 and that opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. The A tank rail that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected to the lower side of the tank 221, and a case rail extending in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 222.

  The game ball distribution unit has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to any one of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, and a discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body side described above. The upper dish passage and the front door side upper dish path communicate with the upper dish 33, and the outer opening is formed so as to communicate with the main body side lower dish path and front door side lower dish path. .

  As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage board and the control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion in the front-rear direction. In the discharge passage board 203, a discharge passage opened rearward is formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and an open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island facility or the like of the game hall, and the game ball led to the discharge passage from the recovery passage described above passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Discharged.

  The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base on which a payout control device 181 and a power supply / launch control device 191 are mounted. The payout control device 181 and the power supply / launch control device 191 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 181 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  In the payout control device 181, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is accommodated in the board box, and a state return switch provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box. For example, when the state return switch is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 222, the ball jam is eliminated.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 includes a power supply / launch control board housed in a board box, and a predetermined power source required for various control devices is generated and output by the board, and a game ball is fired by a player. Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the handle 41 is performed. Further, the power supply / launch control device 191 is provided with a RAM erase switch. This pachinko machine 10 has a function to store and store various data so that even if a power failure occurs, it maintains the state at the time of the power failure, and when it recovers from the power failure, it can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure. It has become. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure, as in the case of the game hall being closed, the state before the turn-off is stored and retained. However, if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized. It has become.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 5 to FIG. 6, a supplementary description will be given of the second working ball entering portion 63 and the variable winning devices 64 and 65 arranged on the right route. FIG. 5 is a front view of the upper variable winning device 64, and FIG. 6 is a front view of the winning unit.

(Upper variable winning device 64)
As shown in FIG. 5, the upper variable winning device 64 includes a housing 310 in which a ball passage 312 through which a game ball passes is formed, and this housing 310 is forward of the game board 60 from the front of the game machine. It is attached to the game board 60 so as to bulge out. The housing 310 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and a game ball or the like flowing down the ball passage 312 through the outer portion of the housing 310 is visible.

  A portion of the housing 310 that bulges to the front side of the game board 60 is formed with an upper prize winning port 311 that constitutes the entrance portion of the ball passage 312. The upper prize winning opening 311 is opposed to the middle stream part (the part extending vertically) on the right route from the side of the gaming machine (right side). A shutter 315 is disposed so as to cover from the flow area side (right side).

  The shutter 315 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable in parallel with the front surface of the game board 60, and the shutter 315 is closed so as to prevent the game ball from flowing into the upper prize winning opening 311 by turning around the pivot support portion. The position is displaced to the open position that allows the game ball to flow into the upper prize winning port 311.

  A driving unit (specifically, a solenoid) for the shutter 315 is connected to the main controller 162 and operates based on a driving signal from the main controller 162. The shutter 315 is configured to stand by at a closed position when no drive signal is output from the main controller 162 (non-excited state).

  In a state where the shutter 315 is disposed at the open position (open state), approximately half of the flow area (flow path) in the midstream portion of the right route is cut by the shutter 315, and most of the game balls flowing down the right route are It is configured to flow into the upper variable winning device 64 (ball passage 312) through the upper prize winning port 311.

  The ball passage 312 branches into a first branch passage 313 and a second branch passage 314 at an intermediate position. A flow path switching member 316 capable of switching the flow-down destination of the game ball to the first branch path 313 and the second branch path 314 is disposed at this branch portion. A drive unit (specifically, a solenoid) for the flow path switching member 316 is connected to the main controller 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main controller 162. The flow path switching member 316 is configured to stand by at a projecting position projecting into the ball passage 312 when the drive signal is not output from the main control device 162 (non-excited state).

  In a state where the flow path switching member 316 is disposed at the protruding position, the flow path switching member 316 blocks the inlet portion of the second branch passage 314. In this state, the game balls that have reached the branch portion are prevented from flowing into the second branch passage 314, and the game balls flow into the first branch passage 313.

  When the drive unit drive signal for the flow path switching member 316 is output from the main control device 162, the flow path switching member 316 moves to a retracted position where the protrusion to the spherical path 312 is avoided, and the second branch path 314 The inlet part is opened. Thereby, the inflow destination of the game ball is changed. In this state, the game balls that have reached the branch portion are prevented from flowing into the first branch passage 313, and the game balls flow into the second branch passage 314.

  Here, the movement of the flow path switching member 316 is defined in advance by the type of jackpot result. Specifically, when a normal big hit result to be described later is obtained, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, and the flow path switching member 316 Immediately thereafter, it is defined to return to the protruding position. Specifically, the time required for the flow path switching member 316 to return to the protruding position is shorter than the time required for the game ball that has flowed into the upper prize winning opening 311 to reach the branch portion. For this reason, when a normal jackpot result is obtained, inflow into the second branch passage 314 is substantially avoided.

  On the other hand, when a probability variation big hit result to be described later is obtained, the flow path switching member 316 moves to the retracted position as the shutter 315 moves from the closed position to the open position, but thereafter the shutter 315 is closed. It is stipulated to wait at the protruding position until it returns to the position. For this reason, when the probable jackpot result is reached, most of the game balls that have flowed into the top prize winning port 311 flow into the second branch passage 314.

  An upstream side detection sensor 317 is disposed at a portion upstream of the branch portion in the ball passage 312, and more specifically, a portion downstream of the branch portion, specifically, the first branch passage 313 and the second branch passage 313. Downstream detection sensors 318 and 319 are arranged in the branch passage 314. The upstream side detection sensor 317 and the downstream side detection sensors 318 and 319 are connected to the main control device 162, and the main control device 162 is based on detection information (detection signal) from the upstream side detection sensor 317. The presence or absence of a prize is specified, and when a prize is generated, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Further, the remaining state of the game ball is monitored based on detection information (detection signals) from the upstream side detection sensor 317 and the downstream side detection sensors 318 and 319.

  In main controller 162 shown in the present embodiment, the ball enters second branch passage 314 during the opening / closing execution mode based on detection information (detection signal) from downstream detection sensor 318 attached to first branch passage 313. When it is specified that the occurrence has occurred, the lottery mode is switched from the low probability mode to the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Although details will be described later, in the high probability mode, the probability of a jackpot result is higher than in the low probability mode, and the player can advantageously advance the game. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the second branch passage 314 is referred to as “advantageous ball entry portion 314”.

  Of the game balls that have been launched to the right route, most of the game balls that have passed through the upper variable prize-winning device 64 go to the ball entering unit 70 disposed on the downstream side of the upper variable prize-winning device 64 on the right route. Become. The ball entry unit 70 is formed by integrating the above-described second operation ball entry portion 63 and the lower variable prize winning device 65. Hereinafter, the ball entry unit 70 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Entry unit 70)
The ball entry unit 70 includes a housing 320 in which a ball passage 321 constituting a part of the right route (specifically, a downstream region) is formed, and the housing 320 bulges forward from the front surface of the game board 60. The game board 60 is fixed in a state. The ball passage 321 extends from the outside (right side) of the game area PE to the center side (left side). An inlet portion 321a of the incoming ball unit 70 (ball passage 321) is formed in the upper right portion of the bulging portion of the housing 320 so as to face upward, and an outlet portion of the incoming ball unit 70 (ball passage 321) is formed in the lower left portion. 321b is formed to face left.

  The outlet portion 321b is located immediately below the first working ball entering portion 62, and the game ball that has flowed out of the outlet portion 321b is guided below the lower working ball entering portion 62L. Thereby, the entrance of the game ball that has passed through the ball passage 321 to the lower operation entrance portion 62L is avoided.

  Note that the housing 320 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and is configured so that the inside of the housing 320 (for example, a game ball or the like flowing down the ball passage 321) can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Incidentally, in order to emphasize the sense of unity of the second action ball entering portion 63 and the lower variable winning device 65, the housing 320 may be made opaque and the internal structure may be difficult or impossible to see.

  The ball passage 321 has a passage width, a passage height, and the like so that a plurality of game balls cannot pass through the same portion at the same time, and is formed in a crank shape so that a step is formed in the middle in the passage direction. Specifically, the ball passage 321 constitutes an upstream portion of the ball passage 321 and forms a horizontally long upstream passage portion 322 that is inclined downward toward the center of the gaming machine, and a downstream portion of the ball passage 321 to constitute a gaming machine. A horizontally long downstream passage portion 324 that is inclined downward toward the center is provided so as to be shifted vertically and horizontally so that the former is on the upper side and the latter is on the lower side. 322 and the downstream passage portion 324 are connected by an intermediate passage portion 323 (corresponding to a “communication passage portion”) extending in the vertical direction.

  The second operation entrance portion 63 is provided in the upstream passage portion 322. Specifically, the second working port 63a of the second working entrance 63 is open upward, and an upstream passage portion 322 is formed so as to cross over the second working port 63a. As for the electric accessory 71 attached to the second actuating ball portion 63, a shutter 331 that can be slid forward and backward (in the thickness direction of the game board 60), and an electric accessory driving unit 332 (solenoid) for the shutter 331. It has. The electric accessory driving unit 332 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. In a non-driving state (non-excited state) in which the driving signal is not output from the main control device 162, the shutter 331 is disposed at a closed position that covers the second working port 63a from above, and the driving signal is output and the electric accessory is output. When the drive unit 332 is in a drive state (excitation state), the drive unit 332 moves (retreats) to an open position that does not cover the second operation port 63a.

  Here, in the state where the shutter 331 is disposed at the closed position, the bottom of the upstream-side passage portion 322, that is, the rolling surface of the game ball is formed by the shutter 331. Specifically, the housing 320 is formed with an upstream bottom portion that forms a bottom portion upstream of the second working port 63a in the passage direction of the upstream passage portion 322 and a bottom portion that is downstream of the second working port 63a. A downstream side bottom portion is provided, and a rolling surface of a game ball is formed by the upstream side bottom portion 322a, the downstream side bottom portion 322b, and the shutter 331. In the following description, a region where a flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 331 in the upstream passage portion 322, that is, a region facing the second working port 63a across the shutter 331 in the upstream passage portion 322 is referred to as “ It is referred to as “first specific area SE1”.

  A game ball that has reached the first specific area SE1 in a state in which the shutter 331 is disposed at the open position and the upstream-side passage portion 322 (specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off is the passage direction of the upstream-side passage portion 322. It becomes difficult to move to the second operating port 63a. On the other hand, the game balls that have not flowed into the second working port 63a continue to move along the ball passage 321 as they are, and most of them reach the downstream passage portion 324. Here, the downstream passage portion 324 and the lower variable winning device 65 associated therewith will be described.

  The lower major prize opening 341 of the lower variable prize winning device 65 is opened upward, and a downstream passage portion 324 is formed so as to cross over the lower major prize opening 341. The lower variable winning device 65 includes a shutter 345 that is slidable back and forth (in the thickness direction of the game board 60), and a drive unit (solenoid) for the shutter 345. The drive unit for the shutter 345 is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. In a non-driving state (non-excited state) in which a drive signal is not output from the main controller 162, the shutter 345 is disposed at a closed position that covers the lower large prize winning port 341 from above, and a drive signal is output to the drive unit. Is moved (retracted) to an open position that does not cover the lower large prize winning opening 341 by being in a driving state (excitation state).

  In the state where the shutter 345 is disposed at the closed position, the shutter 345 forms the bottom of the downstream passage portion 324, that is, the rolling surface of the game ball. Specifically, the housing 320 is provided with a downstream bottom portion that forms a bottom portion on the downstream side of the lower large prize winning port 341 in the passage direction of the downstream passage portion 324, and a game ball is formed by the downstream bottom portion and the shutter 345. The rolling surface is formed. In the following description, a region where a flow path is formed (complemented) by the shutter 345 in the downstream passage portion 324, that is, a region facing the lower major prize winning port 341 across the shutter 345 in the downstream passage portion 324 is “ It is referred to as “second specific area SE2”.

  The game ball that has reached the second specific area SE2 under the situation where the shutter 345 is disposed at the open position and the downstream passage portion 324 (specifically, the rolling surface) is cut off is the passage direction of the downstream passage portion 324. It becomes difficult to move to the lower prize winning port 341.

(Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 602 is mounted on a main control board 601 provided in the main controller 162. The MPU 602 includes a ROM 603 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 602 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 603 is executed. It is an element incorporating a RAM 604, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 602, for example, the function of the ROM 603 and the function of the RAM 604 may be included as another element.

  The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. Connected to the input side of the MPU 602 are a power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181, various detection sensors and the like provided in the main control device 162. The power failure monitoring board 605 is connected to a power supply / emission control device 191, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power failure monitoring board 605. In addition, as a part of various detection sensors, a detection sensor 391a for the general winning opening 61, a detection sensor 391b for the first action entry part 62, a detection sensor 391c for the second action entry part 63, an upper variable prize apparatus 64 detection sensors 317 to 318, a detection sensor 391 d for the lower variable winning device 65, and a detection sensor 391 e for the through gate 66 are connected, and detection information from these various detection sensors 317 to 318 and 391 a to 391 e. Based on the (detection signal), the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 executes winning determination (entrance determination) or the like for each winning part. In addition, the MPU 602 executes a lottery generation lottery based on winning in the first working ball entering portion 62 (first working port 62a) and the second working ball entering portion 63 (second working port 63a).

  On the output side of the MPU 602, a power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181 and a notification / production control device 143 (specifically, a notification / production control board 651) are connected. For example, a payout ball command is output to the payout control device 181 based on a winning determination result to the winning-corresponding winning portion. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when a prize ball command is output. When the winning to the general winning opening 61 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output, and when the winning to the upper winning opening 311 is specified, 14 games are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to paying out a ball is output and a winning to the lower large winning opening 341 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out 10 game balls is output and sent to the first operation port 62a. When a winning is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output, and when a winning to the second operation port 63a is specified, a prize corresponding to the payout of one gaming ball is output. A sphere command is output.

  Various commands such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the notification / production control device 143. In this case, the command information storage area 625 of the ROM 603 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 602, an electric accessory driving unit 332 that drives the electric accessory 71 associated with the second actuating ball entering unit 63, a variable winning driving unit 451 that drives the shutter 315 of the upper variable winning device 64, A flow path switching drive unit 452 for driving the flow path switching member 316 of the upper variable winning device 64, a variable winning drive unit 461 for driving the shutter 345 of the lower variable winning device 65, the main display unit 81, and the like are connected. . Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 602 is configured to open and close the upper large prize winning opening 311 and the lower large prize winning opening 341, and the variable winning drive section 451 of the upper variable winning apparatus 64 and the variable winning drive section of the lower variable winning apparatus 65. Drive control 461 is executed. For example, in each game round, the display control of the first working port display unit D1 and the second working port display unit D2 in the main display unit D of the main display unit 81 is executed in the MPU 602.

  Furthermore, an external terminal plate 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602. The external terminal plate 213 is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal or the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal upon state transition. For example, when the game result is a jackpot result, the MPU 602 can output a jackpot signal to the management control device on the game hall side through the jackpot signal output terminal. Specifically, in a normal time, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and when a jackpot result is obtained, an HI level signal is output. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

  The power failure monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power / fire control device 191, and monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts that is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 191. The payout control device 181 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 601, the payout control device 181 and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 (specifically, the solenoid 111) is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. More specifically, an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball launch handle 41 are connected to the power source / launch control device 191. The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects an operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41, and based on information from the operation level detection sensor, the game ball launch mechanism 110 emits a strength of the game ball (launch speed). ) Will be decided. The touch sensor is configured to output information when the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41, and the player touches the game ball launch handle 41 based on this information in the power / fire control device 191. It is the structure which can grasp | ascertain whether it is. When it is determined that the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41 based on information from the touch sensor and the operation level detection sensor determines that the game ball launch handle 41 is operated, the game ball is fired. Will be allowed.

  Information from the touch sensor is transmitted to the main control device 162, and thus to the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 710, via the power supply / launch control device 191.

  The notification / production control device 143 includes a notification / production control board 651 on which an MPU 652 is mounted. The MPU 652 includes a ROM 653 storing various control programs and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 653. A RAM 654, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the above, is incorporated.

  The notification / production control device 143 drives and controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162 and controls the display control device 710. Is. Specifically, in the notification / production control device 143, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the symbol variation display mode in the symbol display device 75 and the symbol stop display mode (for example, the symbol of the symbol to be finally stopped) are displayed. The type of combination) is determined, the presence / absence of reach, the content of reach production, and the like are determined, and the determined content is assigned to the command and transferred to the display control device 710.

  The display control device 710 includes a display control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU has a ROM storing various control programs and fixed value data, and various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM. RAM, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM that stores image data, a video RAM that temporarily stores image data read from the character ROM, and the like are incorporated. Yes. In the MPU, display control of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the symbol display device 75) is executed based on a command input from the notification / production control device 143.

  Here, the display content of the symbol display device 75 will be described. The display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is provided with a variable display area in which three symbol rows of left, middle, and right are displayed. On the display screen 75a, the symbols of each symbol row are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom) with periodicity.

  Although details will be described later, in each variable display area, one symbol is stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and a total of three symbols are stopped and displayed. For example, if the display of variation stops in the order of left symbol sequence → right symbol sequence → middle symbol sequence and the variation display of all symbol sequences is completed with the predetermined symbol combination formed on the active line, the jackpot result or special hit result A moving image or the like indicating the transition to the special gaming state corresponding to is displayed.

  In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the left symbol row is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the right symbol row is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). Column), the middle symbol row can be referred to as the third symbol row (or the third symbol row).

  Incidentally, the mode of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above, but is arbitrary, the number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variable display in the symbol columns, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. For example, a plurality of symbol sequences may be set to be vertically arranged, and the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence may be set to the horizontal direction.

  A hold display area is set at the bottom of the display screen 75a. The hold display area is the number of hold for the upper operation opening that is divided and displayed so that the unit hold display areas of the same number as the maximum hold number when the game ball wins the first operation opening 62a are arranged in the horizontal direction. Reservation number display for the first operation port displayed in a partitioning manner such that the display region and the unit reservation display region of the same number as the maximum retention number when the game ball wins the second operation port 63a are arranged in the left-right direction And is composed of areas.

  Specifically, when the game ball wins the first operation port 62a, the maximum number of reservations is four, and in correspondence with this, the first unit reservation display is displayed in the reservation number display area for the lower operation port. An area, a second unit hold display area, a third unit hold display area, and a fourth unit hold display area are set. In addition, when the game ball wins the second operation port 63a, the maximum number of reservations is four. Correspondingly, the number-of-holds display region for the right operation port includes the first unit reservation display region, A unit hold display area, a third unit hold display area, and a fourth unit hold display area are set.

  For example, when the number of reserved balls when the game ball wins the first operating hole 62a is 1, a predetermined holding image is displayed only in the first unit reserved display area, and the game ball is displayed in the first operating hole. When the number of holds when winning 62a is four, a predetermined hold image is displayed in all of the first unit hold display area to the fourth unit hold display area.

(About various counters)
Next, a configuration related to the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

  The MPU 602 uses various counter information at the time of game to make a lottery transition to the special game state (opening / closing execution mode), setting the display of the main display unit 81 (main display unit D), setting the symbol display of the symbol display device 75, and the like. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 used for the lottery of the big hit or the special winning occurrence, the hit type counter C2 used for determining the type when the big hit result is obtained, and the symbol display Reach random number counter C3 used for the lottery of the reach display when the device 75 fluctuates and changes, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, and the display for the entrance portion of the main display unit 81 And a variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time of the symbol in the pattern and the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 75. It is set to be. Furthermore, the open random number counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 71 attached to the second operating ball entering portion 63 is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 631 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604.

  The RAM 604 includes a first working port holding area Ra, a second working port holding area Rb, a first execution area AE1 for the first working port holding area Ra, and a second working port holding area Rb. The reserved ball storage area 632 including the second execution area AE2 and the total reserved number storage area is provided. In the reserved ball storage area 632, the values of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are set in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the first operating port 62a or the second operating port 63a. Stored in time series.

  Specifically, each counter is configured such that the hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in the range of “0” to “599”, for example, and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = “0” to “599”). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 62a or the second operation port 63a. More specifically, the second operation port of the RAM 604 is stored in the first operation port holding area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball is won in the first operation port 62a and the game ball is received in the second operation port 63a. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the big hit or the value of the random number for winning the special winning is stored in the result table storage area 621 as the result information storage unit 621 in the ROM 603 as a result table (result information group). Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the first working port 62a (see FIG. 9) and a success / failure table for the second working port 63a (see FIG. 10) are provided. In the lottery based, the success / failure table for the first working port 62a is referred to, and in the lottery based on the ball entering the second working port 63a, the success / failure table for the second working port 63a is referred.

(Failure table for the first working port)
In the success / failure table for the first working port 62a that is referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 9A, the random number value corresponding to the jackpot result is “7” and Two of “507”. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of “0” to “599”, “7” and “507” correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of the jackpot is 2/600. In the low probability mode correspondence success / failure table for the first operating port 62a, there is no random number value corresponding to the special hit result, and the lottery result corresponds to the missed result except for the random number value that becomes the big hit result. ing.

  In the success / failure table for the first operation port 62a referred to when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 9B, the random number value corresponding to the jackpot result is “7”, “107”, “207”, “307”, “407”, “507”. That is, “7”, “107”, “207”, “307”, “407”, “507” correspond to the jackpot result among the values of the hit random number counter C1 from “0” to “599”, The probability of winning a jackpot is 6/600. In the high probability mode correspondence success / failure table for the first operation port 62a, no random number value corresponding to the special hit result is provided, and the lottery result corresponds to the miss result except for the random number value that is the big hit result. ing.

(Win / Fail table for the second working port)
In the success / failure table for the second operation port 63a that is referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 10A, the random number value corresponding to the jackpot result is “7” and Two of “507”. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of “0 to 599”, “7” and “507” correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of winning the jackpot is 2/600. This is the same as the success / failure table for 62a. However, in the success / failure table for the second working port 63a, “1”, “2”, “3”... “597”, “598”, “599” correspond to the special hit results, and are special. The probability of winning is 593/600. In addition, except for the random number value that is a jackpot result and the random number value that is a special hit result, in detail, the lottery result is a result of losing “4”, “104”, “204”, “404”, and “504”. It is configured as follows.

  In the success / failure table for the second operation port 63a that is referred to when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 10B, the random number value corresponding to the jackpot result is “7”, “107”, “207”, “307”, “407”, “507”. That is, “7”, “107”, “207”, “307”, “407”, “507” correspond to the jackpot result among the values of the hit random number counter C1 from “0” to “599”, The probability of winning a jackpot is 6/600, which is similar to the success / failure table for the first working port 62a. However, in the success / failure table for the second working port 63a, “1”, “2”, “3”... “597”, “598”, “599” correspond to the special hit results, and are special. The probability of winning is 593/600. It should be noted that “404” is configured so that the lottery result is an outlier result, except for the random number value that is the jackpot result and the random number value that is the special hit result.

  As described above, the probability of winning the jackpot result is the same regardless of which of the first operating port 62a and the second operating port 63a is won. However, when the first working port 62a and the second working port 63a are compared, the second working port 63a is set to be more likely to have a special hit result. In other words, the second operating port 63a is favored over the first operating port 62a when compared with a probability that some balls can be expected.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 8 again, the hit type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of “0” to “99”, and after reaching the maximum value (ie, “99”), returns to 0. Yes. The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 62a or the second operation port 63a. More specifically, the second operation port of the RAM 604 is stored in the first operation port holding area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball is won in the first operation port 62a and the game ball is received in the second operation port 63a. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The game result distribution destination for the win type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 622 as a distribution information group storage unit in the ROM 603. In the present embodiment, the type of the jackpot result is determined with reference to the hit type counter C2 and the distribution table. The jackpot results include 6R normal jackpot result A, 6R normal jackpot result B, 6R normal jackpot result C, 6R normal jackpot result D, 6R normal jackpot result D, 6R normal jackpot result E, 6R normal jackpot result F, 6R probability variable jackpot As a result, a 16R probability variation jackpot result is provided.

(Distribution table for 1st working port)
As shown in FIG. 11 (a), in the first working port allocation table, a total of 6 values “0” to “5” out of the values of the hit type counter C2 from “0” to “99” are 6R normal. Corresponding to jackpot result A, a total of 6 from “6” to “11” corresponds to 6R normal jackpot result B, and a total of 6 from “12” to “17” is to 6R normal jackpot result C 6 of “18” to “23” correspond to 6R normal jackpot result D, and 6 of “24” to “29” correspond to 6R normal jackpot result E , “30” to “49” correspond to 6R normal jackpot result F, and “50” to “97” correspond to 6R probability variation jackpot result, “98” to “98” A total of two “99” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result.

(Seconding port sorting table)
As shown in FIG. 11B, in the second working port distribution table, a total of two values “0” to “1” among the values of the hit type counter C2 from “0” to “99” are 6R normal. Corresponding to jackpot result B, a total of 2 from “2” to “3” corresponds to 6R normal jackpot result C, and a total of 3 from “4” to “6” to 6R normal jackpot result D A total of 3 from “7” to “9” corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result E, and a total of 25 from “10” to “34” corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result F. , “35” to “89” correspond to the 6R probability variation jackpot result, and ten “90” to “99” correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot result.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 8 again, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 62a or the second operation port 63a. More specifically, the second operation port of the RAM 604 is stored in the first operation port holding area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball is won in the first operation port 62a and the game ball is received in the second operation port 63a. Stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603, it is determined whether or not to generate a reach display (reach state).

  Here, the reach display is provided with a symbol display device 75 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and changes in game times in which the game result is a game result corresponding to the open / close execution mode. In the gaming machine in which the stop display result after display can be a special display result, before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) in the symbol display device 75 is started, This means a display state for making the player think that the variable display state is likely to result in the special display result.

  In other words, a combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. This is a display state in which possible reach symbol combinations are displayed, and in that state, symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a stage before the end of the symbol display, the combination of symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying possible combinations of reach symbols, and symbols are displayed in a variable manner by the final stop symbol sequence in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents on the display screen 75a will be described in more detail. First, when the symbol variation display is terminated in the right symbol column, and the symbol variation display is terminated in the left symbol column, the symbol hits one of the effective lines. Reach lines are formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols with the numbers that make up the combination, and reach is achieved by displaying the symbols in the middle symbol row in the situation where the reach lines are formed. Display. When a big hit occurs, the main symbols with numbers that make up the combination of winning symbols together with the main symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed on the reach line. Is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 75a after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is a variation display time of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1 and the second working port display unit D2 of the main display unit 81 (main display unit D), and a variation in the symbol in the symbol display device 75. This is used for determining the display time in the MPU 602. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. The buffer value of the variation type counter CS is determined when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first actuation port display unit D1 and the second actuation port display unit D2 (when the symbol variation is started by the symbol display device 75). To be acquired.

  For example, the open random number counter C4 for the electric accessory 71 is incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 249, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric storage area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 66. Then, at a predetermined timing, with reference to the stored value of the open random number counter C4 and the lottery table for support (a group of success / failure information) stored in the success / failure table storage area 621 of the ROM 603, the electric accessory 71 An open lottery (support lottery) is performed as to whether or not to control the open state.

(Various processes executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162)
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 602 in the main controller 162 advances the game at each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 602 executes a main process that is started when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is started when a power failure signal is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically by the MPU 602 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec). In step S101, reading processing of various detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 317 to 319 and 391a to 391e) is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. For example, when it is determined that a winning has occurred for the first working port 62a, a winning detection flag for the first working port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, and a winning for the second working port 63a occurs. When it is determined that a winning detection flag for the second operating port is stored in the various flag storage areas 635, and when it is determined that a winning to the upper variable winning device 64 has occurred, the various flag storage areas 635 are moved up. When a winning detection flag for the big winning opening is stored and it is determined that a winning to the advantageous ball portion 314 has occurred, the winning detection flag for the advantageous ball portion is stored in various flag storage areas 635 When it is determined that a winning for the variable winning device 65 has occurred, a winning detection flag for the lower major winning opening is stored in the various flag storage areas 635.

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  In the subsequent step S103, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  Thereafter, in step S104, a through winning process for winning through the through gate 66 is executed, and in a subsequent step S105, the operating port winning process in accordance with winning in the operating ports 62a and 63a is executed. Timer interrupt processing ends.

(Through winning process)
In the through winning process in step S104, it is first determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 66. When the game ball wins the through gate 66 and the number of reserved items is less than the upper limit (specifically, 4), the number of stored items is incremented by 1 and the open random number updated in step S103 above. The value of the counter C4 is stored in the first area among the free storage areas in the power storage area 633 of the RAM 604. Thereafter, the main winning process is terminated.

  When it is determined that the game ball has not won the through gate 66, or when it has been determined that the through gate 66 has been won, but the number of reserved items has reached the upper limit, the value of the open random number counter C4 is stored. Without finishing, this winning process is terminated.

  In the through winning process, the display control process of the through-gate hold number display section SS of the main display unit 81 is executed. Specifically, the light emission control processing is executed so that the same number of light emitters as the number of reserved accessory storages is turned on for the through gate reservation number display unit SS including four light emitters (LEDs).

(Prize processing for working port)
In the winning process for the operating port, first, whether or not the game ball has won (started winning) in the first operating ball unit 62 (first operating port 62a) is stored in the first operating port in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The determination is made based on whether or not a winning detection flag is stored. When it is determined that the winning detection flag is stored, that is, when a detection signal is received that the game ball has won a prize in the first action entry part 62 (first action port 62a), payout A prize ball command for causing the control device 181 to pay out four game balls is set. Then, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output information indicating that the game ball has won a prize to the first operation entrance 62 (first operation port 62a) to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a winning has occurred in the first working ball entry portion 62 (first working port 62a).

  After that, the value (starting hold storage number) stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Ra for the first working port is updated (added by 1). Subsequently, an information acquisition process for storing each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the winning process is completed.

  On the other hand, when the winning detection flag for the first operating port is not stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 and the winning detection flag for the second operating port is stored, the payout control device A prize ball command for paying out one game ball at 181 is set. The set prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in the external output process of the normal process described later.

  Subsequently, an external signal setting process is performed so that information indicating that a game ball has won a prize in the second action entry portion 63 (second action port 63a) is output to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a winning has occurred in the second operating ball entering portion 63 (second operating port 63a).

  Thereafter, the value (starting hold storage number) stored in the hold number storage area of the hold area Rb for the second working port is updated (added by 1). Subsequently, an information acquisition process for storing each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the winning process is completed.

  Note that if the game ball has not won any of the first operating ball entering section 62 and the second operating ball entering section 63, the main winning process is finished as it is.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181. In addition, if a command for an effect such as a command corresponding to an effect for game times such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, or a command corresponding to an effect for an opening / closing execution mode is set, it is notified. Transmit to the production control device 143. Further, output setting for the external terminal board 213 is performed according to information set in the external output buffer of the RAM 604.

  Next, in step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  In subsequent step S203, a game number control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In this game times control process, determination of success / failure of jackpot or the like and distribution determination of jackpot type, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 75, display for the operation port in the main display unit 81 (main display portion D) Display control of the parts D1, D2, etc. is performed.

  Thereafter, in step S204, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing.

  In a subsequent step S205, a power combination support process for controlling the driving of the electric combination 71 attached to the second operation ball entering portion 63 is executed. In this electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 71 is to be opened using information stored in the electric power storage area of the RAM 604. Display control of the gate display unit DS is performed.

  In a succeeding step S206, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined operation is performed on the condition that a launch permission signal output from the power supply / launch controller 191 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the game ball launch handle 41. The solenoid 111 of the game ball launching mechanism 110 is excited once in the firing period (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). Thereby, a game ball is launched toward the game area PE. That is, when an irregular hit such as a so-called stop hit is not performed, the launch of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined cycle on condition that the launch operation is performed.

  In a succeeding step S207, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board 605 and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 605 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 602 and is erased in the next main processing.

  If the power failure flag is not set, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed, so whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached in step S208, that is, the previous normal process It is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing. That is, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in step S209, and the variation type counter CS is updated in step S210.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power failure flag has been set, the power interruption has occurred, so the power interruption processing from step S211 is executed. Specifically, the timer interrupt processing is prohibited in step S211, and then the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S212. After the access to the RAM 604 is prohibited in step S213, the power supply is completely shut off. The infinite loop is continued until the process cannot be executed.

(Game control process)
Here, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 to 18, the game times control process in step S <b> 203 will be supplementarily described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the game turn control process shown in the present embodiment, it is first determined in step S301 whether or not the special game state (opening / closing execution mode) is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode flag (opening / closing execution state information) is stored (stored) in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area (opening / closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. To do. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S301, the game turn control process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S301, a game time control process (game action corresponding to the lower operation port) for game times related to winning in the first action ball entry portion 62 (first operation port 62a) in step S302. Game process control process (right operation port) for executing a game related to winning in the second operation ball entry portion 63 (second operation port 63a) in step S303. After executing the corresponding game times control process and the second operation port control process), the game times control process is terminated. The basic flow is common to these two control processes. Hereinafter, first, the first working port control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, and then, with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, the second working point will be mainly described with respect to the differences from the first working port control process. The working port control process will be described.

(Control processing for first working port)
As shown in FIG. 15, in the first operation port control process, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the game operation related to the first operation port 62a is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first working port display portion D1 of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to a fixed display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. This determination is made in the game playing flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in the first game opening flag (hereinafter referred to as the first game playing flag). Is performed by determining whether or not is stored (stored). The first game rotation flag is stored when the display of the variation of the pattern is started on the first working port display section D1, and is erased when the display of the pattern is stopped and the final display is finished.

  When the game is not being played, a negative determination is made in step S401, and the process proceeds to step S402. In step S402, it is determined whether or not the game relating to the second operating port 63a is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second working port display portion D2 of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to a fixed display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. Note that this determination is made in the game running flag storage area (variable display during information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 (hereinafter referred to as the second game running flag) for the second operating port. Is performed by determining whether or not is stored (stored). The game in-game flag for the second operating port is stored when the variable display is started on the second operating port display unit D2, and the display corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is stopped and displayed. Will be erased when it ends.

  If a positive determination is made in step S402, the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the big hit result or the special hit result at the second operation port 63a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S403, the first working port control process is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S403 or step S402, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, referring to the total reserved number storage area of the reserved ball storage area 632, the first operating port reserved storage number CRN (specifically, the reserved number related to the first operating port 62a is the number of reserved information stored on hold). It is determined whether the number of information) is “0”. If the first working port reserved memory number CRN is “0”, the game number control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the first working port reserved memory number CRN is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S405. In step S405, data setting processing is performed.

  In the data setting process for the first working port 62a, first, the first working port reserved storage number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, the data stored in the first area of the first working port holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area AE1 (see FIG. 8), and the data stored in the storage area of the first working port holding area Ra is stored. The shift process is executed.

  This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and the data in the first area is cleared and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as the third area → second area and the fourth area → third area. Then, one LED that is lit is turned off in the reserved number display section S1 for the first working port. In this turn-off process, contrary to the turn-on process executed when the hold information is added, the LEDs of the hold number display part S1 for the first working port are turned off sequentially from the lower side.

  After performing the data setting process described in detail above, in order to start the display of the variation of the pattern in the display unit D1 for the first working port and the display of the variation of the pattern in the symbol display device 75 in step S406. After executing the variation start process (the first operation port variation start process), the game times control process is terminated. Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the fluctuation | variation start process for 1st working ports of step S406 is demonstrated.

(Fluctuation start processing for the first working port)
In the first working port variation start process, first, at step S501, the success / failure determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, the success / failure determination information among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, that is, the numerical information acquired from the winning random number counter C1 is referred to by referring to the first operation port success / failure table. It is determined whether or not it matches the numerical information. If the determination result in step S501 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S502, and the process proceeds to step S503.

  In step S503, a type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, the information for type determination among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit type counter C2 is grasped. In addition, referring to the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, the information for type determination described above corresponds to the information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result A and the 6R normal jackpot result B. Information group corresponding to 6R normal jackpot result C, information group corresponding to 6R normal jackpot result D, information group corresponding to 6R normal jackpot result E, information group corresponding to 6R normal jackpot result F, 6R probability variation The information group corresponding to the jackpot result or the information group corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result is specified.

  In step S504, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the stop result for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 603 is a picture that is finally stopped and displayed on the first working port display unit D1 of the main display unit 81 (main display unit D) in the game time. The information is specified from the table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. In the jackpot result stop result table, a plurality of pictures to be stopped and displayed on the first working port display unit D1 are set. In step S504, information indicating the picture corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. In step S504, the current game result is 6R normal jackpot result A, 6R normal jackpot result B, 6R normal jackpot result C, 6R normal jackpot result D, 6R normal jackpot result E, 6R normal jackpot result F, 6R probability change. Information for specifying by the MPU 602 whether the jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, the 6R normal jackpot result A is stored when the 6R normal jackpot result A is stored, the 6R normal jackpot result B is stored when the 6R normal B flag is stored, and the 6R normal jackpot result C is stored. Stores the 6R normal C flag, stores the 6R normal D flag if the 6R normal jackpot result D, stores the 6R normal E flag if the 6R normal jackpot result E, and stores the 6R normal jackpot result F If it is, the 6R normal F flag is stored, if it is the 6R probability variation jackpot result, the 6R probability variation flag is stored, and if it is the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the 16R probability variation flag is stored.

  After executing the setting process in step S504, the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, it is determined whether or not the game turn related to the second operation port 63a is being executed. If a positive determination is made in step S505, the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, the forced end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. When the game times (pattern change display) related to the second operation port 63a are being executed, the game times (pattern change display) related to the second operation port 63a are forced on the way based on this forced end flag. Will be terminated automatically. More specifically, when the game times related to the first operation port 62a corresponds to the jackpot result, and the game times related to the second operation port 63a are executed beyond the timing at which the confirmation display in the game times is performed. If it can be done, the game times related to the second operation port 63a are shortened, and the game times related to the second operation port 63a will be ended together with the end of the game times related to the first operation port 62a. In such a case, the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the game times related to the second operation port 63a corresponds to the result of the removal.

  Returning to the description of step S502, if the determination result in step S501 is an outlier result, a negative determination is made in step S502, and the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, a stop result setting process for a detachment result is executed.

  Specifically, the ROM 603 stores in advance a picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the first working port display unit D1 of the main display unit 81 (main display unit D) in the game round relating to the start of the current variation. The stop result table for the detachment result is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

  After performing the processes of steps S506 and S507, or when a negative determination is made in step S505, the process proceeds to step S508. In step S508, a variable display time (display duration) setting process is executed. Specifically, a value corresponding to the variation display time is set in a variation display time counter for the first working port (hereinafter referred to as a first variation display time counter) provided in the various counter areas 634 of the AM 604. The first variation display time counter is updated (subtracted) every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Details of this setting process will be described later.

  After executing the variable display time setting process in step S508, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S509. The change start command includes information on the change display time. Here, as described above, the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the non-reach occurrence fluctuation display time table is different from the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the reach occurrence fluctuation display time table. Even if the start command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach, the notification / production control device 143, which is the control device on the sub-side, can identify the presence or absence of reach from the information on the variable display time. . In this regard, it can be said that the change start command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change start command may include information directly indicating whether or not reach has occurred.

  After performing the setting process of step S509, the process proceeds to step S510, and the variable display of the first working port display section D1 in the main display unit 81 is started. In the next step S511, the above-described first game turn flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is possible to specify that the game times (for example, fluctuation display) related to the first operation port 62a are being executed. In the present embodiment, the display of the design on the first working port display unit D1 and the design change display on the design display device 75 are started in accordance with the lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the variable display of symbols is started before the lottery.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 15 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S401, that is, if it is determined that the game is being performed on the first operating port 62a, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display a picture corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the second operation port 63a. If a negative determination is made in step S407, the process proceeds to step S408. In step S408, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the special winning result in the game times related to the second operation port 63a. If a negative determination is made in step S408, the process proceeds to step S409.

  In step S409, it is determined whether it is the timing when the variable display time set in step S508 has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first variation display time counter provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S409, the fluctuation display process is executed in step S410, and then the first working port control process is terminated. In the variable display process of step S410, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner by performing a process of turning on / off each LED constituting the first working port display section D1.

  Returning to the description of step S409, when the value of the first variation display time counter is “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S409, and the process proceeds to step S411. In step S411, it is determined whether a fixed display is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a fixed display flag for the first working port (hereinafter referred to as a first fixed display flag) is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If a negative determination is made in step S411, the process proceeds to step S412. In step S412, a first working port variation end process is executed.

  In the first working port variation end process, first, a first working port variation end command (hereinafter referred to as a first variation end command) is set. The first change end command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). In the notification / production control device 143, based on the reception of the first variation end command, a process for ending the production in the game times is executed. Further, the first change end command is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification / production control device 143, and the display control device 710 receives the first change end command, thereby playing the game of the game time. A combination of symbols corresponding to the result or the like is fixedly displayed (final stop display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. In addition, it is good also as a structure which terminates the effect for game rotations independently by the alerting / production control device 143 or the display control device 710 without transmitting the first variation end command.

  After the first variation end command is set, the display control of the main display unit 81 is performed so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the first working port display unit D1 in a predetermined manner. For example, when the lottery result (game result) is a losing result, the display of the pattern corresponding to the losing result is performed. Then, a value corresponding to a fixed display time (1 sec in the present embodiment) is set in a fixed display time counter for the first working port (hereinafter referred to as a first fixed display time counter) provided in various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. set. The first fixed display time counter is updated (subtracted) each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  After setting the fixed display time, the first fixed display flag is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The first fixed display flag is deleted when the value of the first fixed display time counter becomes “0”.

  After the change end process is executed in step S412, the process proceeds to step S413. In step S413, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a second normal gaming state or a fourth normal gaming state described later. If a negative determination is made in step S413, the first working port control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S413, the process proceeds to step S414.

  In the present embodiment, the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 are provided with a first game number counter for grasping the number of times of execution of the game times related to the first operation port 62a in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state. It has been. In the game number counter update process in step S414, the value of the first game number counter is updated. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the value of the first game number counter.

  In the subsequent step S415, it is determined whether or not the first game number counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S415, the first working port control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S415, the process proceeds to step S416, the variable display time table switching flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, and then the first working port control process is terminated. Although the details will be described later, the variable display time table is switched at the timing when the game round in which the variable display time table switching flag is set ends. The first game number counter is linked to a second game number counter described later. When the value of the first game number counter is “0”, the value of the second game number counter is also “0”. Is changed.

  Returning to the description of step S411, if an affirmative determination is made in step S411, that is, if the first fixed display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S417. In step S417, it is determined whether or not the value of the first fixed display time counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S417, the first working port control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S417, the flag erasing process is executed in step S418, and then the first working port control process is terminated. In this flag erasing process, the first game in-game flag and the first confirmed display flag stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 are erased. Thereby, in the subsequent control process for the first operating port, a negative determination is made in step S401 until the game times related to the first operating port 62a are started again.

  Returning to the description of step S407, if an affirmative determination is made in step S407, that is, if it is time to stop and display the picture corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the second operation port 63a, the process proceeds to step S419. move on. In step S419, a stop pattern rewriting process is executed. In the stop result rewriting process, the stop pattern determined in the first working port variation start process is rewritten to a pattern corresponding to the outlier result. Specifically, when the game times related to the first operating port 62a is a result of losing, the stop pattern is stopped, whereas when the game times related to the first operating port 62a is a winning result, The stop pattern is rewritten to a pattern corresponding to the result of the deviation. In accordance with this, the first variation display time counter and the game number counter are reset (cleared to 0). After executing the process of step S419, after executing various processes related to the end of the game round after step S411, the first working port control process is ended.

  Next, when an affirmative determination is made in step S408, that is, when it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the special winning result in the game times related to the second operation port 63a, the process proceeds to step S420. In step S420, the variable continuation flag is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. In the MPU 602 of the main control device 162, by setting this variation continuation flag, display control is performed so that the variation display of the pattern is continued on the first working port display section D1 even during the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the subsequent step S421, after executing the update regulation process of the first variation display time counter, the first working port control process is terminated. The update of the first variation display time counter is interrupted until the opening / closing execution mode is ended by the update regulation process. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the opening / closing execution mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode due to a special winning result in the game times related to the second operation opening 63a, the first operation opening display unit also during the opening / closing execution mode. Although the variation display of the pattern in D1 is continued, the remaining variation display time is held until the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  Next, the second working port control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18.

(Control processing for second working port)
As shown in FIG. 17, in the control process for the second working port, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the game is related to the second working port 63a. Specifically, whether or not the second working port display portion D2 of the main display unit 81 (main display portion D) is in a variable display to a fixed display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. Determine whether. This determination is made as to whether or not the above-described second game-in-progress flag is stored (stored) in the game-in-progress flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. By doing. The second game in-game flag is stored when the display of the variation of the pattern is started on the second operation port display unit D2, and is erased when the display of the pattern is stopped and the final display is finished.

  If the game is not being played, a negative determination is made in step S601 and the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the game relating to the first working port 62a is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first working port display portion D1 of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to a fixed display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. This determination is made as to whether or not the above-mentioned first game-in-progress flag is stored (stored) in the game-in-progress flag storage area (variable display-in-progress information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. By doing.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S602, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result at the first working port 62a. If an affirmative determination is made in step S603, the second working port control process is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S603 or step S602, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, the total number-of-holds storage area of the holding ball storage area 632 is referred to, and the second working port reserved storage number CRN (specifically, the holding number related to the second operating port 63a) is the number of the holding information stored. It is determined whether the number of information) is “0”. If the second working port reserved memory number CRN is “0”, the game number control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the second working port reserved storage number CRN is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, data setting processing is performed.

  In the data setting process of the second working port 63a, first, the second working port reserved storage number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, the data stored in the first area of the second working port reservation area Rb is moved to the second execution area AE2 (see FIG. 8), and the data stored in the storage area of the second working port reservation area Rb is stored. The shift process is executed.

  This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and the data in the first area is cleared and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as the third area → second area and the fourth area → third area. Then, one LED that is lit is extinguished in the reserved number display section S2 for the second working port. In this turn-off process, contrary to the turn-on process executed when the hold information is added, the LEDs of the hold number display section S2 for the second working port are turned off sequentially from the lower side.

  After performing the data setting process described in detail above, in order to start the change display of the pattern in the display part D2 for the second operation port and the display of the change of the pattern in the pattern display device 75 in step S606. After executing the variation start process (the second operation port variation start process), the game times control process is terminated. Here, with reference to FIG. 18, the second working port variation start process in step S606 will be described.

(Fluctuation start process for second working port)
In the second working port variation start process, first, in step S701, a success / failure determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, the success / failure determination information, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1 among the various pieces of information stored in the second execution area AE2 is referred to by referring to the second operation port success / failure table. It is determined whether or not it matches the numerical information. If the determination result in step S701 is a jackpot result, an affirmative determination is made in step S702 and the process proceeds to step S703.

  In step S703, a type determination process is executed. In the type determination process, information for type determination among various pieces of information stored in the second execution area AE2, that is, numerical information acquired from the hit type counter C2, and the distribution stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603 With reference to the table, the information for type determination ascertained is an information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result B, an information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result C, an information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result D, 6R The information group corresponding to the normal jackpot result E, the information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result F, the information group corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result, and the information group corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result are specified. .

  In step S704, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the stop result for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 603 is a picture that is finally stopped and displayed on the second working port display unit D2 of the main display unit 81 (main display unit D) in the game round. The information is specified from the table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. The stop result table for the jackpot result is provided with a plurality of pictures to be stopped and displayed on the second working port display unit D2. In step S704, information indicating the picture corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. In step S704, the current game result is 6R normal jackpot result B, 6R normal jackpot result C, 6R normal jackpot result D, 6R normal jackpot result E, 6R normal jackpot result F, 6R probability variable jackpot result, 16R probability jackpot result. Information for specifying which of the results is the MPU 602 is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, the 6R normal big hit result B is stored when the 6R normal big hit result B, the 6R normal big hit result C is stored, the 6R normal C flag is stored, and the 6R normal big hit result D is obtained. Stores the 6R normal D flag, stores the 6R normal E flag if the 6R normal jackpot result E, stores the 6R normal F flag if the 6R normal jackpot result F, and displays the 6R probability variable jackpot result. In some cases, a 6R probability variation flag is stored, and in the case of a 16R probability variation big hit result, a 16R probability variation flag is stored.

  After executing the setting process of step S704, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the game times related to the first operation port 62a are being executed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, the forced end flag is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. When the game times (pattern change display) related to the first operation port 62a are being executed, the game times (pattern change display) related to the first operation port 62a are forced on the way based on this forced end flag. Will be terminated automatically. More specifically, when the game times related to the second operation port 63a corresponds to the jackpot result, and the game times related to the first operation port 62a (departure) exceed the timing at which the confirmation display in the game times is performed. In the case where (result correspondence) can be executed, the game times related to the first operation port 62a are shortened, and the game times related to the first operation port 62a are ended together with the game times related to the second operation port 63a. Become. In such a case, the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the game times related to the first operating port 62a corresponds to the result of the removal.

  Returning to the description of step S702, if the determination result in step S701 is a special winning result, a negative determination is made in step S702 and an affirmative determination is made in step S707, and the flow proceeds to step S708.

  In step S708, a special hit result stop result setting process is executed. Specifically, a special hit result stop stored in advance in the ROM 603 for a picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display portion D (second operation port display portion D2) of the main display unit 81 in the game round. The information is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. The stop result table for the special hit result is provided with a plurality of pictures to be stopped and displayed on the second working port display unit D2. In step S708, information indicating the picture corresponding to the special hit result is stored in the RAM 604. To do. If the current game result is a special hit result, the special hit flag is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604.

  If the determination result in step S701 is an outlier result, a negative determination is made in step S702 and step S707, and the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, a stop result setting process for a detachment result is executed. Specifically, the ROM 603 stores in advance a picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (second operation port display unit D2) of the main display unit 81 in the game round relating to the start of the current variation. The stop result table for the detachment result is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

  After executing the processing of step S706, step S708, and step S709, or when making a negative determination in step S705, the process proceeds to step S710. In step S710, a variable display time (display duration) setting process is executed. Details of the processing for setting the variable display time will be described later.

  After executing the variable display time setting process in step S710, a variable start command and a type command are set in step S711. The change start command includes information on the change display time. Here, as described above, the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the non-reach occurrence fluctuation display time table is different from the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the reach occurrence fluctuation display time table. Even if the start command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach, the notification / production control device 143, which is the control device on the sub-side, can identify the presence or absence of reach from the information on the variable display time. . In this regard, it can be said that the change start command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change start command may include information directly indicating whether or not reach has occurred. By the way, in the present embodiment, the display on the second working port display unit D2 and the display on the symbol display device 75 are displayed in accordance with the lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the variable display of symbols is started before the lottery.

  After performing the setting process of step S711, the process proceeds to step S712, and after the variable display of the second working port display section D2 in the main display unit 81 is started, the second working port variation start process is ended. In the process of step S712, the above-described second game rotation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is possible to specify that the game times (for example, change display) related to the second operation port 63a are being executed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 17 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game is being performed for the second operating port 63a, the process proceeds to step S607. In step S607, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the first operation port 62a. If a negative determination is made in step S607, the process proceeds to step S608.

  In step S608, it is determined whether it is the timing when the variable display time has elapsed. In step S608, it is determined whether it is the timing when the variable display time set in step S710 has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the second variation display time counter provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S608, the variation display process is executed in step S609, and then the second working port control process is terminated. In the variation display process of step S610, the pattern is variably displayed by performing a process of turning on / off each LED constituting the second working port display unit D2.

  Returning to the description of step S608, when the value of the second variation display time counter is “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S608 and the process proceeds to step S610. In step S610, it is determined whether the confirmation display is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a final display flag for the second working port (hereinafter referred to as a second final display flag) is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If a negative determination is made in step S610, the process proceeds to step S611. In step S611, a second working port variation end process is executed.

  In the second working port variation end process, first, a second working port variation end command (hereinafter referred to as a second variation end command) is set. This second variation end command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). In the notification / production control device 143, based on the reception of the second variation end command, a process for ending the production in the game times is executed. The second change end command is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification / production control device 143, and the display control device 710 receives the second change end command, thereby playing the game of the game time. A combination of symbols corresponding to the result or the like is fixedly displayed (final stop display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. In addition, it is good also as a structure which terminates the effect for game times independently by the alerting / production control device 143 or the display control device 710 without transmitting the second variation end command.

  After setting the second variation end command, the display control of the main display unit 81 is performed so that the picture is stopped and displayed on the second working port display unit D2 in a predetermined manner. For example, when the lottery result (game result) is a losing result, the display of the pattern corresponding to the losing result is performed. Then, a value corresponding to the fixed display time (1 sec in the present embodiment) is set in the fixed display time counter for the second working port (hereinafter referred to as the second fixed display time counter) provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. set. The second fixed display time counter is updated (subtracted) each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  After setting the fixed display time, the second fixed display flag is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The second confirmed display flag is erased when the value of the second confirmed display time counter becomes “0”.

  After the change end process is executed in step S611, the process proceeds to step S612. In step S612, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a second normal gaming state or a fourth normal gaming state to be described later. If a negative determination is made in step S612, the second working port control process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S612, the process proceeds to step S613.

  In the present embodiment, the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 are provided with a second game number counter for grasping the number of times of execution of the game times related to the second operation port 63a in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state. It has been. In the game number counter update process in step S613, the value of the second game number counter is updated. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the value of the second game number counter.

  In a succeeding step S614, it is determined whether or not the second game number counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S614, the second working port control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S614, the process proceeds to step S615, the variable display time table switching flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, and then the second operation port control process is terminated. Although the details will be described later, the variable display time table is switched at the timing when the game round in which the variable display time table switching flag is set ends. The second game number counter is linked to the first game number counter described above, and when the value of the second game number counter is “0”, the value of the first game number counter is also “0”. Is changed.

  Returning to the description of step S610, if an affirmative determination is made in step S610, that is, if the second fixed display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S616. In step S616, it is determined whether or not the value of the second fixed display time counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S616, the second working port control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S616, the flag erasing process is executed in step S617, and then the second working port control process is terminated. In this flag erasing process, the second game in-game flag and the second confirmed display flag stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 are erased. As a result, in the subsequent second working port control process, a negative determination is made in step S401 until the game turn related to the second working port 63a is started again.

  Returning to the description of step S607, if an affirmative determination is made in step S607, that is, if it is time to stop and display the picture corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the first operation port 62a, the process proceeds to step S618. move on. In step S618, a stop pattern rewriting process is executed. In the stop result rewriting process, the stop pattern determined in the second working port variation start process is rewritten to a pattern corresponding to the outlier result. Specifically, when the game times related to the second operating port 63a is a result of losing, the stop pattern is stopped, whereas when the game times related to the second operating port 63a is a winning result. The stop pattern is rewritten to a pattern corresponding to the result of the deviation. In accordance with this, the second variation display time counter and the game number counter are reset (cleared to 0). After executing the process of step S618, after executing various processes related to the end of the game round after step S610, the second working port control process is ended.

(Game state transition processing)
Next, the gaming state transition process of step S204 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. As already described, in the present embodiment, a normal game state in which a game progresses based on a ball entering the operation ports 62a and 63a, and a special game state in which the variable winning devices 64 and 65 are opened (open / close execution mode). ) And are provided. Although details will be described later, for the normal gaming state, the first normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state in which the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, the second normal gaming state in which the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode, and the third The normal game state is configured, and the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state are switched through a special game state corresponding to the jackpot result.

  In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which the game round (specifically, a confirmation display) is completed. If it is not the timing at which the game round is completed, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If the game round has ended, more specifically, if the preset stop display time (determined display time) has elapsed since the end of the variable display, the process proceeds to step S803, and this time It is determined whether or not the game result of the game times (the result of the above-mentioned lottery determination result) corresponds to the transition to the special game state (open / close execution mode). Specifically, the above-mentioned 6R normal A flag, 6R normal B flag, 6R normal C flag, 6R normal D flag, 6R normal E flag, 6R normal F flag, 6R probability change flag are stored in the RAM 604, and the 16R probability change flag is stored. It is determined whether any of the above is stored. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, start processing of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S804. In the start processing, first, an opening standby time for waiting the variable winning devices 64 and 65 without starting the opening of the large winning ports 311 and 341 of the variable winning devices 64 and 65 for opening in the opening / closing execution mode ( Set the waiting time for start. Specifically, opening waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

  The opening standby time (opening time) in the present embodiment differs depending on the type of winning. Specifically, the waiting time for opening in the case of a jackpot result is 5 sec, whereas the waiting time for opening in the case of a special hit result is a shorter time, specifically 8 msec. It has become.

  In a succeeding step S805, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the jackpot result. When an affirmative determination is made in step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, and a value corresponding to the current jackpot result is set in the round number counter RC provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. Specifically, when the current jackpot result is a 6R jackpot result, “6” is set to the round number counter RC, and when the current jackpot result is a 16R jackpot result, “16” is set to the round number counter RC. "Is set. The round number counter RC is decremented every time a round progresses, and when the value of the round number counter RC becomes “0”, the current special gaming state ends.

  Returning to the description of step S805, if a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if the special gaming state is triggered by the special winning result, the process proceeds to step S807. In step S807, the second winning mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Thereafter, in step S808, “1” is set in the round number counter. In the subsequent processing, based on the fact that the second winning mode flag is set, it is determined that the current special gaming state corresponds to the special winning result.

  After executing the process of step S806 or step S808, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, an opening command setting process is performed. The set opening command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 710 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The notification / production control device 143 determines the content of the production corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed. The contents of the effect include a display mode in the symbol display device 75, and the determined display mode is output from the notification / effect control device 143 to the display control device 710 as a display content command. In the display control device 710, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification / production control device 143, the display corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the symbol display device 75 is executed so that the moving image display of the character or the like, the background image, etc. are switched.

  After executing the opening command setting process in step S809, the external signal setting process is executed in step S810, and the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the external signal setting process of step S810, it is determined whether or not any of the various jackpot flags and special hit flags is stored in the RAM 604. If any of the flags is stored, the game hall side A signal indicating that a big hit or special hit has occurred is output to the management control device (Hall Computer HC). By receiving this external signal, the management control device recognizes that it has shifted to the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode).

  Returning to the description of step S801, if the opening / closing execution mode is in effect, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and the flow advances to step S811. In step S811, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for opening has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the opening standby time has elapsed, a special winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S812.

  Here, the special winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

(Big prize opening / closing process)
As shown in FIG. 20, in the special winning opening / closing process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the second winning mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If a negative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S902, and the first opening / closing process is executed. The first opening / closing process is a process executed when the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) corresponding to the jackpot result is obtained.

(First opening / closing process)
As shown in FIG. 21, in the first opening / closing process, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is being opened. Specifically, the determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 451 of the upper variable winning device 64. If the upper prize winning opening 311 is not open, it is determined in step S1002 whether the value of the round number counter RC is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1002, the first opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the process proceeds to step S1003. In step S1003, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC1 provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is “0”. The timer counter TC1 is a counter that is referred to when grasping the opening time, interval time (interval time between rounds), etc. of the top prize winning port 311, and whenever timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 12) is executed, The value is subtracted by “1”. If a negative determination is made in step S1003, the first opening / closing process is terminated.

  When the value of the round number counter RC is not “0” and the value of the timer counter TC1 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1004 and the opening process of the upper variable winning device 64 (upper prize winning port 311) is executed. To do. Specifically, the variable prize driving unit 451 is set in a driving state so as to open the upper grand prize opening 311.

  Then, the process of step S1005-step S1006 is performed as a closing condition setting process (opening time setting process) corresponding to the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311). Specifically, “15000” (corresponding to 30 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1 in step S1005, and “9” is set in the winning counter PC in the subsequent step S1006.

  In a succeeding step S1007, it is determined whether or not it is the first round (first round) in the current special gaming state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1007, the operation proceeds to step S1008. In step S1008, it is determined whether or not the current special gaming state corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1008, a probability changing flow path switching process is executed in step S1009. In the probability changing flow path switching process, a drive signal is output to the flow path switching drive section 452, the flow path switching member 316 is moved from the protruding position to the retracted position, and a duration for continuing to output the drive signal is set. . About this continuation time, it is the same length as the maximum opening time of the upper prize winning opening 311. For this reason, when game balls are continuously being fired to the right route, most of the winning balls are awarded to the advantageous pitching portion 314, and the transition to the high probability mode is substantially confirmed. Become.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1008, a normal flow path switching process is executed in step S1010. In the normal flow path switching process, similarly to the probability changing flow path switching process, a drive signal is output to the flow path switching drive section 452 to move the flow path switching member 316 from the protruding position to the retracted position. Set the duration to continue the output of. About this continuation time, it is shorter than the maximum opening time of the upper prize winning opening 311. More specifically, a time shorter than the time required for the game ball that has flowed into the upper prize winning opening 311 to reach the advantageous ball entry 314 (specifically, the detection area of the detection sensor 319) is set. For this reason, even when game balls are continuously fired to the right route, winning to the advantageous pitching portion 314 is substantially avoided.

  After the flow path switching process is executed in steps S1009 and S1010, or when a negative determination is made in step S1007, the process proceeds to step S1011. In step S1011, an opening command indicating that the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) has been opened is set, and the first opening / closing process ends. The set release command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (see FIG. 14). The notification / production control device 143 determines the content of the production corresponding to the release based on the received release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed.

  Returning to the description of step S1001, if it is determined in step S1001 that the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311) is open, the process proceeds to step S1012. In step S1012, it is determined whether it is time to return the flow path switching member 316 to the protruding position. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the duration set in steps S1009 and S1010 has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1012, output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is stopped in step S1013, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the protruding position.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1012, or after the return processing in step S1013 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1014. In step S1014, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter TC1 is “0”. If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not “0”, the process advances to step S1015 to determine whether or not a game ball has won a prize at the upper prize winning port 311 from the upstream detection sensor 317 disposed in the upper variable winning device 64. This is determined based on the detection information (detection signal).

  If a winning has occurred, a winning command output process is executed in step S1016. The winning command is output to the notification / production control device 143, and the notification / production control device 143 changes the display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the winning command.

  After executing the command output process in step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1017. In step S1017, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the succeeding step S1018, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is “0”. finish.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1018, that is, when the value of the winning counter PC is “0”, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1014 (that is, the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be “0”). Case) means that the condition for closing the special prize opening is established. In this case, in step S1019, the variable winning drive unit 451 is set in a non-driven state so as to close the upper variable winning device 64 (upper large winning opening 311).

  In a succeeding step S1020, it is determined whether or not the flow path switching member 316 is disposed at the retracted position. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1020, output of the drive signal to the flow path switching drive unit 452 is stopped in step S1021, and the flow path switching member 316 is returned to the protruding position.

  After executing the return process of step S1021 or when a negative determination is made in step S1020, the process proceeds to step S1022, and the update process of the round number counter RC is executed. Specifically, when the value of the round number counter RC is not “0”, the round number counter RC is decremented by 1 and when the value of the round number counter RC is “0”, the round number counter RC The value of “0” is maintained as “0”.

  Thereafter, in step S1023, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated round number counter RC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1023, the process proceeds to step S1024, and “1000” (corresponding to 2.0 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1.

  After executing the process of step S1024, a close command is set in step S1025, and the first opening / closing process is terminated. The set closing command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 14). The notification / production control device 143 determines the content of the production corresponding to the closure command based on the received closure command, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed.

  Returning to the description of step S1023, when it is determined in step S1023 that the value of the round number counter RC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1026. In step S1026, an ending start process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time (5 sec in the present embodiment) is set for waiting without starting the next game round for ending in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, ending waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

  Thereafter, after setting an ending command in step S1027, the first opening / closing process is terminated. The set ending command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 14).

  Returning to the description of FIG. 20, when an affirmative determination is made in step S901, a second opening / closing process in step S903 is executed. Hereinafter, the second opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Second opening and closing process)
In the second opening / closing process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning port 341) is being opened. Specifically, the determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable winning driving unit 461 of the lower variable winning device 65. If the lower major prize opening 341 is not open, the lower variable prize winning device 65 (lower major prize opening 341) is opened in step S1102. Specifically, the variable prize driving unit 461 is set in a driving state so as to open the lower large prize opening 341.

  Thereafter, the processing of steps S1103 to S1104 is executed as the closing condition setting processing (opening setting processing) corresponding to the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341). Specifically, in step S1103, “400” (corresponding to 0.8 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1, and in step S1104, “9” is set in the winning counter PC.

  Returning to step S1101, if it is determined in step S1101 that the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large prize opening 341) is open, the process proceeds to step S1105, and the value of the timer counter TC1 is “0”. It is determined whether or not. If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S1106, and whether or not a game ball has won a prize at the lower major prize opening 341 is detected from the ball detection sensor disposed in the lower variable prize winning device 65. The determination is based on the detection signal.

  If a winning has occurred, a winning command output process is executed in step S1107. The winning command is output to the notification / production control device 143, and the notification / production control device 143 changes the display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the winning command.

  After executing the command output process in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1. In subsequent step S1109, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is “0”. If not, the second opening / closing process is terminated. To do.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S1109, that is, when the value of the winning counter PC is “0”, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1105 (that is, the value of the timer counter TC1 is determined to be “0”). Case) means that the condition for closing the special prize opening is established. In this case, in step S1110, the variable winning drive unit 461 is brought into a non-driven state so as to close the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning opening 341).

  In subsequent step S1111, an ending start process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time (0.2 sec in the present embodiment) for waiting without starting the next game round is set for the ending in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, ending waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM 603 is set in a waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604.

  Then, after setting an ending command in step S1112, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set ending command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 14).

  Returning to the description of FIG. 19 again, after the special winning opening opening / closing process of step S812 is executed, the process proceeds to step S813. In step S813, it is determined whether or not the round number counter RC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S813, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S813, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S814, it is determined whether the waiting time for ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter RC is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, in step S815, after executing the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, End the state transition process. Here, with reference to FIG. 23, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described.

(Transition processing at the end of opening / closing execution mode)
In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, first, it is determined whether or not the current special gaming state corresponds to the first winning mode. If the first winning mode is supported, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the advantageous ball portion 314 during the current special game state.

  In the present embodiment, a probability variation continuous number counter that stores the number of consecutive times per probability variation large is provided in various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. The probability variation consecutive number counter is updated (added) every time the above-described advantageous ball hitting part 314 is entered as a probability variation jackpot result, and when the normal jackpot result is obtained or the number of consecutive times of the probability variation jackpot result is It is reset when the upper limit (7 times in this embodiment) is reached. In this transition process, it is determined by referring to this probability variation consecutive number counter whether or not the number of consecutive probability variation jackpot results has reached the upper limit (seven times in the present embodiment).

  Specifically, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203, and update processing of the probability variation continuous number counter is performed. Specifically, “1” is added to the value of the probability variation continuous number counter. After executing the updating process of the continuous number counter, the process proceeds to step S1204, and it is determined whether or not the value of the probability variation continuous number counter has reached the upper limit (“7” in the present embodiment). If the number of continuous times has not reached the upper limit, a negative determination is made in step S1204, and the flow proceeds to step S1205. In step S1205, a high probability mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. When a special ball enters the advantageous ball portion 314 during the special game state and the number of consecutive successes per probability variation has not reached the upper limit, after the special game state ends, the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode is entered. Transition.

  In a succeeding step S1206, a second normal gaming state variation display time table reference flag is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Although details will be described later, by setting the second normal gaming state variation display time table reference flag, the pattern variation display time in the first working port display section D1 is extended, and the second working port The change display time of the pattern on the display unit D2 is shortened. Note that when the second normal gaming state variation display time table reference flag is set, the other variation display time table reference flags are deleted.

  Returning to the description of step S1202, in the case of no entry into the advantageous entry unit 314 in the current special game state, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, the probability variation continuous number counter is reset (set to “0”). In the subsequent step S1210, a fourth normal gaming state variation display time table reference flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Although details will be described later, by setting the fourth normal gaming state variation display time table reference flag, the pattern variation display time in the first operation port display section D1 is extended, and the second operation port The change display time of the pattern on the display unit D2 is shortened. In addition, when setting the variation display time table reference flag for the fourth normal gaming state, the other variation display time table reference flags are deleted.

  Incidentally, the processing of steps S1209 to S1210 is also executed when an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, that is, when the number of consecutive successes per probability variation has reached the upper limit.

  After executing the processing of step S1206 and step S1210, the process proceeds to step S1207. In step S1207, the above-described game number counter setting process is performed. As already described, in the present embodiment, a first game number counter for the first operation port 62a and a second game number counter for the second operation port 63a are provided as game number counters. In this setting process, the first predetermined number of times (specifically “1”) is set in the first game number counter, and the second predetermined number of times (specifically, more than the first predetermined number) is set in the second game number counter. “100”) is set.

  After executing the setting process of step S1207 or when a negative determination is made in step S1201 (in the case of the second winning mode), the process proceeds to step S1208. In step S1208, various special game state flags (for example, a winning mode flag, a big hit flag, etc.) stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 are erased, and the transition process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 25, the electronic combination support process executed in step S <b> 205 of the normal process (see FIG. 13) will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the power combination support process, and FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the power combination opening / closing process.

(Telephone support processing)
In the electronic combination support process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not support is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a supporting flag is stored in a supporting flag storage area provided in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The in-support flag is a flag that is stored when the electric accessory 71 attached to the second working port 63a is switched to the open state, and is deleted when the electric accessory 71 is returned to the closed state.

  If no supporting flag is stored, the process advances to step S1302 to determine whether or not a support winning flag is stored in a support winning flag storage area provided in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The support winning flag is a flag that is stored when an open lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 71 is in an open state is won, and is deleted when a supporting flag is stored.

  If the support winning flag is not stored, the process advances to step S1303 to determine whether the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is “0”. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not “0”, the main role support process is terminated.

  If the value of the timer counter TC2 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1304, and it is determined whether it is the end timing of the pattern change display on the through gate display unit DS. If it is the end timing of the variable display, in step S1305, the out-of-line display is set and “250” (corresponding to 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter TC2, and then the main role support processing is ended. . By setting the out-of-display, the out-of-display display is stopped in the state where the out-of-display is stopped and displayed, and the out-of-pattern display is continued for 0.5 sec.

  When the value of the timer counter TC2 is “0” and it is not the end timing of the variable display, the process proceeds to step S1306, and it is determined whether or not the value of the accessory reserved storage number is greater than “0”. If the value of the number of stored items is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1307, and it is determined by lottery (open lottery) whether or not to support the electric accessory 71. More specifically, the value stored in the accessory holding ball storage area of the power combination storage area 633 is shifted, and the value of the open random number counter C4 shifted to the execution area and the result table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 are stored. The open lottery is performed with reference to the support lottery table. The probability of winning the support is 248/250, and the winning result (support winning) is obtained in almost all the lotteries.

  Simultaneously with the open lottery, “100” (corresponding to 0.7 sec) is set to the timer counter TC2 with reference to the support-compatible variable display time table stored in the ROM 603. The timer counter TC2 is decremented by “1” every time the timer interrupt process is started. Thereafter, until the value of the timer counter TC2 becomes “0”, that is, 0.7 sec.

  In subsequent step S1308, it is determined whether or not the result of the open lottery in step S1307 is a winning result (support winning). If the support is not won, the processing for the main role support is terminated. In the case of support winning, a support winning flag is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1309, and the main role support processing is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S1302, when the support winning flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, and the process proceeds to step S1310, where the value of the timer counter TC2 is “0”. It is determined whether or not. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not “0”, since the variation display of the picture on the through gate display unit DS is being performed, the main role support process is terminated as it is. If the value of the timer counter TC2 is “0”, a win display is set in step S1311. As a result, the pattern variation display on the through gate display unit DS is terminated so that the pattern corresponding to the winning result is stopped and displayed. In the subsequent step S1312, the supporting flag is set in the various flag storage area 635, the support winning flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 is erased, and then the main role support processing is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S1301, when an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, that is, when a support flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S1313, and the electric accessory 71 is opened and closed. After executing the electronic combination opening / closing process for controlling, the electronic combination support process is terminated. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 25, the power combination opening / closing process will be described.

(Electronic opening and closing process)
In the electric combination opening / closing process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 71 is being opened. Whether or not the electric accessory 71 is open is determined based on whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 332 is in a driving state. If the electric accessory 71 is opened, the process proceeds to step S1402, and the number of winnings after the electric accessory 71 is opened for the attached second operating port 63a reaches the upper limit (“10” in this embodiment). It is determined whether or not. If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403 to determine whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 is “0”.

  If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the timer counter TC2 is “0”, or if it is determined in step S1402 that the number of winnings has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, a closing process for switching (returning) the electric accessory 71 to the closed state is performed. Thereafter, in step S1405, the supporting flag stored in the various flag storage areas 635 is deleted, and the main role opening / closing process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S1401, if the electric accessory 71 is not open, a negative determination is made in step S1401, and the flow proceeds to step S1406. In step S1406, it is determined whether or not the timer counter TC2 is “0”. If the timer counter TC2 is not “0”, the main utility opening / closing process is terminated. If the timer counter TC2 is “0”, an opening process for switching the electric accessory 71 to the open state is executed in step S1407.

  Thereafter, “250” (corresponding to 0.5 sec) is set in the timer counter TC2 in step S1408, and then the electric utility opening / closing process is terminated.

(Relationship between gaming state and variable display time)
As already described, in the present embodiment, the hold information is acquired based on the balls entering the first operating port 62a and the second operating port 63a, and the pattern or the like in the game times is acquired based on the acquired hold information. It is configured to perform symbol variation display to finalization display. The variable display time for each game time is determined based on the variable display time table stored in the ROM 603, and this variable display time table is switched according to the progress of the game, so that the operation which becomes dominant in the game progress The display for the mouth and the working port is switched. As described above, the variable display time table is switched when a jackpot result is obtained or when the number of games executed in the normal game state becomes a preset number.

  Here, as the variable display mode for setting the variable display time in the present embodiment, the first variable display mode in which the game related to the first operation port 62a is the main, the game related to the first operation port 62a and the second operation port The second variation display mode in which the game related to 63a is comparable, the third variation display mode in which the game related to the second operation port 63a is main, and substantially the same as the third variation display mode. A fourth variation display mode is provided in which a game related to the two operation ports 63a is main.

  In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first variation display mode is referred to as “first normal gaming state”, and the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second variation display mode is referred to as “second normal gaming state”. The normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third variation display mode is referred to as “third normal gaming state”, and the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the fourth variation display mode is referred to as “fourth normal gaming state”.

  Next, referring to FIG. 26 to FIG. 29, the configuration relating to the setting of the variable display time and the like, specifically, the variable display time table switching process in the game times control process (see FIG. 14), the first working port fluctuation A supplementary description will be given of the variable display time setting process in the start process (see FIG. 16) and the variable display time setting process in the second working port change start process (see FIG. 18). FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the change display time table switching process, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the change display time setting process (the change display time setting process for the first working port) in the first start opening change process, and FIG. FIG. 29 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the gaming state and the fluctuation display time, and FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation display time setting process (fluctuation display time setting process for the second working opening) in the second working port fluctuation start process.

(Variable display time table switching process)
As shown in FIG. 26, in the variable display time table switching process, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the variable display time table switch flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The variable display time table switching flag is a flag stored when the number of games executed in a predetermined gaming state reaches a preset number (see step S416 in FIG. 15 and step S615 in FIG. 17). . If this flag is not stored, this switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the fixed display is completed in the game times (corresponding game times) in which the variable display time table switching flag is stored. If a negative determination is made in step S1502, the switching process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S1502, the process proceeds to step S1503.

  In step S1503, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is the second normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1504, the third normal gaming state variable display time table reference flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, and then this switching process is performed. finish. That is, when the number of games executed in the second normal game state reaches the upper limit defined by the game number counter, the state shifts to the third normal game state. Note that when the third normal gaming state variable display time table reference flag is set, the other variable display time table reference flags are deleted.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1503, the process proceeds to step S1505 to determine whether or not the current gaming state is the fourth normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is the fourth normal gaming state, the process proceeds to step S1506, the first normal gaming state variable display time table reference flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, and then this switching process is performed. finish. That is, when the number of games executed in the fourth normal game state reaches the upper limit defined by the game number counter, the first normal game state is entered. When the first normal gaming state variation display time table reference flag is set, the other variation display time table reference flags are deleted.

(Fluctuation display time setting process for the first operating port)
As shown in FIG. 27, in the variable display time setting process for the first working port, first, the first normal gaming state variable display time table reference flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 in step S1601. It is determined whether or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, that is, if the variable display mode is the first variable display mode, the first normal gaming state setting process is executed in step S1602, and then the variable display time setting is performed. End the process.

  In the first normal game state setting process, the current game is selected from various variable display time tables for the first normal game state (first variable display mode) stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. The table corresponding to the number of times is selected and displayed in a variable manner depending on the number of holding information stored in the first working port holding area Ra in the holding ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604, the result of the lottery determination, the presence of reach, etc. Set the time.

  As for the variable display time, when the jackpot result and the outlier result are compared, the former is likely to be longer than the latter, and in the case of the outlier result and reach display does not occur (completely off) In the case of (1), the larger the number of stored hold information, the shorter the information. FIG. 29 illustrates the variable display time when the game is completely out of the first normal gaming state. For example, when the number of stored hold information is “0” or “1”, any one of “12 sec”, “13 sec”, and “14 sec” is set and stored as the variable display time. If the number of held information is “2”, any one of “7 sec”, “8 sec”, and “9 sec” is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored hold information is “3”. Alternatively, in the case of “4”, any one of “3 sec”, “4 sec”, and “5 sec” is set as the variable display time. In the first normal gaming state, the symbol fixed display time on the first working port display unit D1 and the symbol fixed display time on the symbol display device 75 are configured to be “1 sec”.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 27, if a negative determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, it is determined whether or not the second normal gaming state variation display time table reference flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, that is, if the variable display mode is the second variable display mode, the second normal gaming state setting process is executed in step S1604, and then the variable display time setting is performed. End the process.

  In the second normal gaming state setting process, the variable display time table for the second normal gaming state (second variable display mode) stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is selected to display the variable display time. Set.

  In the second normal gaming state, unlike the first normal gaming state, the number of selection candidates for the variable display time is limited to one regardless of the various conditions such as the number of stored hold information and the result of the lottery determination. ing. Specifically, in any second game state, the game display is configured such that the variable display time is “0.5 sec” and the final display time is “1 sec” (see FIG. 29). The variation display time is shorter than in the first normal gaming state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1603 of FIG. 27, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, it is determined whether or not the third normal gaming state variation display time table reference flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1605, that is, if the variable display mode is the third variable display mode, the third normal gaming state setting process is executed in step S1606, and then the variable display time setting is performed. End the process.

  In the third normal gaming state setting process, the variable display time table for the third normal gaming state (third variable display mode) stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is selected to display the variable display time. Set.

  In the third normal gaming state, unlike the first normal gaming state, the variable display time selection candidates are the same regardless of the various conditions such as the number of stored hold information and the result of the lottery determination. . Specifically, in the third normal gaming state, the variable display time is “180 sec” and the fixed display time is “1 sec” for any game times (see FIG. 29).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1605 of FIG. 27, the process proceeds to step S1607. In step S1607, it is determined whether or not the fourth normal gaming state variation display time table reference flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1607, that is, if the variable display mode is the fourth variable display mode, the fourth normal gaming state setting process is executed in step S1605, and then the variable display time setting is performed. End the process.

  In the fourth normal game state setting process, the current game is selected from the various variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state (fourth variable display mode) stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. Select the table corresponding to the time and set the variable display time.

  In the fourth normal gaming state, unlike the first normal gaming state, the number of selection candidates for the variable display time is limited to one regardless of various conditions such as the number of stored hold information and the result of the lottery determination. ing. Specifically, in the fourth normal gaming state, the variable display time is any one of “60 sec”, “120 sec”, and “180 sec”, and the final display time is “1 sec” for any game times. It is configured (see FIG. 29).

  In the present embodiment, the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 stores any one of the first normal gaming state variable display time table reference flag to the fourth normal gaming state variable display time table reference flag. Become. If no flag is stored for some reason, there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Therefore, in such a case, after executing the abnormality process in step S1609, the present setting process is terminated. By this abnormal process, various processes related to the game progress are interrupted, and the hole manager and the player are notified that an abnormality has occurred. Thereafter, the notification is ended based on the operation for canceling the abnormality, and the various processes that have been interrupted are resumed.

  Next, the variable display time setting process for the second working port will be described with reference to FIG. The basic flow of the variable display time setting process for the second working port is the same as the variable display time setting process for the first working port.

(Fluctuation display time setting process for the second working port)
In the variable display time setting process for the second working port, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the first normal gaming state variable display time table reference flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, that is, if the variable display mode is the first variable display mode, the first normal gaming state setting process is executed in step S1702, and then the variable display time setting is performed. End the process.

  In the first normal gaming state setting process, the variable display time table for the first normal gaming state (first variable display mode) stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603 is selected to display the variable display time. Set.

  Regarding the variable display time, the number of selection candidates for the variable display time is limited to one, regardless of various conditions such as the number of stored hold information and the result of the lottery. Specifically, in the first normal gaming state, any game times are configured such that the variable display time is “600 sec” and the final display time is “1 sec” (see FIG. 29).

  Returning to the description of FIG. 28, if a negative determination is made in step S1701, the process proceeds to step S1703. In step S1703, it is determined whether or not the second normal gaming state variation display time table reference flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1603, that is, if the variable display mode is the second variable display mode, the second normal gaming state setting process is executed in step S1604, and then the variable display time setting is performed. End the process.

  In the second normal game state setting process, the current game is selected from various variable display time tables for the second normal game state (second variable display mode) stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. Select the table corresponding to the time and set the variable display time.

  As for the variable display time, the variable display time is set according to the number of the hold information stored in the second working port hold area Rb. Specifically, when the number of stored hold information is “0”, “7 sec” is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored hold information is “1”. "5 sec" is set as the variable display time when the number of stored information is "2", and "3 sec" is set as the variable display time when the number of stored hold information is "2" When the number of information is “3” or “4”, “1 sec” is set as the variable display time. In the second normal gaming state, the symbol fixed display time on the second working port display unit D2 and the symbol fixed display time on the symbol display device 75 are set to “1 sec” (see FIG. 29). ).

  If a negative determination is made in step S1703 of FIG. 28, the process proceeds to step S1705. In step S1705, it is determined whether or not the third normal gaming state variation display time table reference flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1705, that is, if the variable display mode is the third variable display mode, the third normal gaming state setting process is executed in step S1706, and then the variable display time setting is performed. End the process.

  In the third normal game state setting process, the current game is selected from the various variable display time tables for the third normal game state (third variable display mode) stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. Select the table corresponding to the time and set the variable display time.

  In the third normal gaming state, the variable display time is set according to the number of the hold information stored in the second working port hold area Rb regardless of the result of the lottery determination. Specifically, when the number of stored hold information is “0” or “1”, “4 sec” is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored hold information is “2”. "2 sec" is set as the variable display time, and "0.5 sec" is set as the variable display time when the number of stored hold information is "3" or "4" Is done. In the third normal gaming state, the symbol fixed display time on the second working port display unit D2 and the symbol fixed display time on the symbol display device 75 are set to “1 sec”.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1705 of FIG. 28, the process proceeds to step S1707. In step S1707, it is determined whether or not the fourth normal gaming state variation display time table reference flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1707, that is, if the variable display mode is the fourth variable display mode, the fourth normal gaming state setting process is executed in step S1605, and then the variable display time setting is performed. End the process.

  In the fourth normal game state setting process, the current game is selected from the various variable display time tables for the fourth normal game state (fourth variable display mode) stored in the variable display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. Select the table corresponding to the time and set the variable display time.

  In the fourth normal gaming state, the variable display time is set according to the number of the hold information stored in the second working port hold area Rb regardless of the result of the lottery. Specifically, when the number of stored hold information is “0”, either “7 sec” or “8 sec” is set as the variable display time, and the stored hold information When the number is “1”, either “5 sec” or “6 sec” is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored hold information is “2” When either “3 sec” or “4 sec” is set as the display time and the number of stored hold information is “3” or “4”, the variable display time is “1 sec” and “4 sec”. Is set.

  In the present embodiment, the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 stores any one of the first normal gaming state variable display time table reference flag to the fourth normal gaming state variable display time table reference flag. Become. If no flag is stored for some reason, there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine. Therefore, in such a case, after executing the abnormality process in step S1609, the present setting process is terminated. By this abnormal process, various processes related to the game progress are interrupted, and the hole manager and the player are notified that an abnormality has occurred. Thereafter, the notification is ended based on the operation for canceling the abnormality, and the various processes that have been interrupted are resumed.

  Next, a basic game flow will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing the flow of the game.

(Game flow)
The first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first variation display mode is the gaming state that is most disadvantageous to the player among the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state described above. In the first normal gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player to launch a game ball aiming at the left route of the left route and the right route than to launch a game ball aiming at the right route. A difference is provided.

  Specifically, the probability of entering the lower working port 62aL disposed in the left route is about 1/15, whereas the probability of entering the right working port 62aR disposed in the right route is It is about 1/60, and in view of entering the first working port 62a → acquisition of hold information, it is expected that the target is aimed at the lower working port 62aL disposed on the left route. It has a configuration. Here, the second operating port 63a arranged in the right route is attached with the electric accessory 71, and by the support of the electric accessory 71, many of the game balls that have been launched (for example, 1/3). The ball enters the second operating port 63a, and most of them are special hit results. However, in the first normal gaming state, the game time variation display time related to the second operation port 63a is extremely long (see FIG. 29), so that most of the game times related to the second operation port 63a are special hits. Even if it becomes a result, it is difficult to constantly acquire award balls by entering the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning port 341). In other words, although it is possible to advance the game by firing the game ball to the right route in the first normal gaming state, the investment increases and the profit that can be expected for the investment is to launch the game ball to the left route. Smaller than the case.

  When various jackpot results are obtained in the first normal gaming state, the state shifts to the first special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode). In the first special game state, the advantageous pitching portion 314 is released according to the type of the jackpot result. When the entrance into the advantageous entrance portion 314 occurs during the first special game state, the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state becomes the high probability mode. In the case where no entry into the advantageous entry portion 314 occurs during the first special game state, the lottery mode after the end of the first special game state becomes the low probability mode.

  Specifically, when the current first special gaming state is triggered by the 6R normal jackpot result A to the 6R normal jackpot result F, the entry into the advantageous entrance portion 314 is substantially avoided. Therefore, the gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state becomes the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the fourth variation display mode.

  In the fourth variation display mode, the variation display time of the pattern on the first operation port display unit D1 is significantly extended from the first normal gaming state, and the variation display time of the pattern on the second operation port display unit D2 is significantly increased. Shortened to Specifically, the variation display time of the pattern in the second working port display unit D2 is changed to be shorter than the variation display time of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1, and the variation display time is longer or shorter. The relationship is reversed. As a result, in the fourth normal gaming state, the game progresses mainly in the game times related to the second operation port 63a.

  When the number of game times executed in the fourth normal gaming state reaches a specified number, the game proceeds to the first normal gaming state set so that the player's advantage is lower than that in the fourth normal gaming state. Here, in the fourth normal gaming state, although the upper limit is set in the number of games, the game can be smoothly advanced by the support of the electric accessory 71. Since the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the second operation port 63a that is favored so that the distribution of the jackpot result is advantageous to the player, the second normal gaming state is advantageous over the fourth normal gaming state. An opportunity to move to.

  In addition, as described above, when a winning to the second working port 63a occurs, a special winning result is obtained in most of the lotteries based on the winnings. That is, in the fourth normal gaming state, a special winning result is obtained in almost all game times, and the game state shifts to the second special game state at each game time. When the state shifts to the second special gaming state, the lower variable winning device 65 is opened, and a part of the game ball passing through the second operation port 63a is transferred to the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning port 341). You will enter the ball.

  With such a support based on the electric accessory 71 and a winning ball based on the entering into the lower variable winning device 65, in the fourth normal gaming state, the game ball is fired to the right route while suppressing the decrease of the holding ball. Can proceed.

  If the first special gaming state this time is triggered by a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 16R probability variation jackpot result, it is only necessary to continue launching the game ball toward the right route to enter the advantageous entrance portion 314 Occurs. For this reason, in most cases, the gaming state after the end of the first special gaming state is the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second variation display mode.

  In the second variation display mode, compared to the first normal gaming state, the variation display time of the pattern in the first operation port display unit D1 and the variation display time of the pattern in the second operation port display unit D2 are significantly shortened. The However, unlike the fourth normal gaming state, the long and short relationship between the change display time of the pattern on the first operation port display portion D1 and the change display time of the pattern on the second operation port display portion D2 is maintained. Will remain. More specifically, as described above, in the game times related to the first working port display unit D1, the variable display time is 0.5 sec regardless of the number of holdings, etc., and in the game times related to the second working port display unit D2, The shortest display time is 1 sec.

  Here, in the second normal gaming state, when the game times related to the first working port display unit D1 are executed once or when the game times related to the second working port display unit D2 are executed 100 times Will shift to the third normal gaming state, which is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state. The transition to the second normal gaming state is configured to pass through the first special gaming state. When a game ball is launched to the right route during the first special gaming state, the first operation port 62a (in detail, About 1 to 3 balls enter the right working port 62aR). For this reason, in many cases, the transition condition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state is quickly established.

  In addition, when the entrance to the second operation port 63a is repeatedly generated without entering the first operation port 62a, the game operation related to the second operation port display unit D2 is executed 100 times. On the condition that the game has been made, the third normal gaming state is entered, but the number of possessed balls will slightly decrease until then. Therefore, in the second normal gaming state, it is assumed that the game is performed with the expectation that the first entry into the first operation port 62a (specifically, the right operation port 62aR) will occur promptly.

  When the transition condition is satisfied during the second normal gaming state, the state shifts to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third variation display mode.

  In the third variation display mode, the variation display time of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1 is significantly extended as compared with the second normal gaming state, and the variation display time of the pattern in the second working port display unit D2 Is further shortened, and the relationship between the length of the variable display time is reversed. Thereby, in the third normal gaming state, the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the second operation port 63a as the main. The game progresses mainly with the game times related to the second operation port 63a which is favored so that the distribution of the jackpot result is advantageous to the player, thereby providing a chance to continue the high probability mode.

  In addition, as described above, when a winning to the second working port 63a occurs, a special winning result is obtained in most of the lotteries based on the winnings. That is, in the fourth normal gaming state, a special winning result is obtained in almost all game times, and the game state shifts to the second special game state at each game time. When the state shifts to the second special gaming state, the lower variable winning device 65 is opened, and a part of the game ball passing through the second operation port 63a is transferred to the lower variable winning device 65 (lower large winning port 341). You will enter the ball.

  In the third variation display mode, the lower limit of the variation display time is further reduced compared to the fourth variation display mode. The number of game balls to be fired exceeds the number of game balls to be fired due to the difference in the variation display time, and in the third normal game state, the game is advanced while increasing the number of possession balls by firing the game balls to the right route. It is possible.

  By repeating the probable big hits in the second normal game state and the third normal game state, the holding ball is greatly increased. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, an upper limit is set for the number of consecutive successes per probability variation, and when this upper limit is reached, the first special gaming state is entered and the fourth normal gaming state is entered. . If the probable big hit can be made during the fourth normal gaming state, it becomes an opportunity to further increase the holding ball.

  Here, the present embodiment is characterized in that the substantial number of games in the fourth normal gaming state is diversified while suppressing the complexity of the configuration. Hereinafter, the configuration according to this device will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 32A. FIG. 31A is a schematic diagram showing a variation display time table for the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the second working port display portion D2, and FIG. 31B is a first diagram corresponding to the first working port display portion D1. FIG. 32A is a schematic diagram showing a variation display time table for a four normal gaming state, and FIG. 32A is a schematic diagram showing a relationship between a transition trigger to the fourth normal gaming state and a combination of the variation display tables set.

(Fluctuation display time table for the fourth normal gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 31A, a fourth normal gaming state variation display time table corresponding to the second working port display section D2 (second working port 63a) is used as the fourth normal gaming state variation display time table. A1 (hereinafter referred to as table A1) and a fourth normal gaming state variation display time table A2 (hereinafter referred to as table A2) are provided.

  The table A1 shows that the variable display time when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 63a is “0” is “8 sec”, and the variable display time when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 63a is “1” is “6 sec”. ”, The variable display time when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 63a is“ 2 ”,“ 4 sec ”, and the variable display time when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 63a is“ 3 ”or“ 4 ” It is configured to be “2 sec”. As described above, when a game ball is being fired continuously (in a cycle of 0.6 sec) to the right route in the fourth normal game state, about 1/3 of the shot game ball is second actuated. A ball enters the mouth 63a. And since most of them are special hit results, the time from the start of the display of the variation of the pattern on the second working port display D2 to the start of the display of the variation of the pattern relating to the next game time is The shortest is about "4 sec". From such circumstances, when the table A1 is set and the deviation of the pitching frequency is small, the number of holdings related to the second working port 63a changes from “3” to “4”, In many cases, the variable display time in the second working port display section D2 is “2 sec”.

  The table A2 is differentiated so that the variable display time is shorter than the table A1 as a whole. Specifically, the variable display time when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 63a is “0” is “7 sec”, and the variable display time when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 63a is “1” “ 5 sec ", the variable display time when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 63a is" 2 "," 3 sec ", the variable display time when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 63a is" 3 "or" 4 " Is configured to be “1 sec”. As described above, when a game ball is being fired continuously (in a cycle of 0.6 sec) to the right route in the fourth normal game state, about 1/3 of the shot game ball is second actuated. A ball enters the mouth 63a. And since most of them are special hit results, the time from the start of the display of the variation of the pattern on the second working port display D2 to the start of the display of the variation of the pattern relating to the next game time is The shortest is about "3 sec". From such circumstances, when the table A1 is set and the deviation of the pitching frequency is small, the number of holdings related to the second working port 63a changes from “3” to “4”, In many cases, the variable display time in the second working port display section D2 is “1 sec”.

  In addition, when the table A2 is set, the game related to the second operation port 63a progresses more quickly than when the table A1 is set, so that the grace period for hold acquisition is shortened. However, the second operating port 63a is premised on a pitch exceeding the upper limit of the number of holds (over winning) regardless of which table A1, A2 is set. Thereby, when the table A2 is set, the frequency of setting the variable display time other than “3” to “4” is suppressed from increasing.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), as a fourth normal gaming state variation display time table, a fourth normal gaming state variation display time table corresponding to the first working port display section D1 (first working port 62a). B1 (hereinafter referred to as table B1) and a fourth normal gaming state variation display time table B2 (hereinafter referred to as table B2) are provided.

  The table B1 is configured such that the variable display time is “60 sec” regardless of whether the number of holdings associated with the first operation port 62a is “0” to “4”, and the table B2 is the first operation. The variable display time is configured to be “120 sec” in any case where the number of holdings related to the mouth 62a is “0” to “4”, and the table B3 is the number of holdings related to the first working port 62a. In any case of “0” to “4”, the variable display time is configured to be “180 sec”. That is, a difference is provided so that the time (grace time) until the transition to the first normal gaming state is made in the order of table B1 <table B2 <table B3.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 32, a description will be given of the relationship between the transition to the fourth normal gaming state and the variable display time table referred to, and the outline of display on the display screen 75a in the fourth normal gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the transition trigger to the fourth normal gaming state is the 6R normal jackpot result A, specifically, the 6R normal jackpot result A is obtained, and the advantageous entering ball portion 314 is entered during the first special gaming state. When the entry of the ball does not occur, the table A1 is set as the variable display time table for the second working port display unit D2 (second working port 63a), and the first working port display unit D1 (first The table B1 is set as the variable display time table for the one operation port 62a). That is, the table combination referred to in the fourth normal gaming state is the table A1 and the table B1.

  In this table combination, the variation display time of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1 is 60 sec, and the pattern in the second working port display unit D2 when the number of reservations changes from “3” to “4”. The variable display time is 2 sec. In view of the fact that the fixed display time of the pattern in the second working port display portion D2 is 1 sec and the execution time of the second special gaming state is about 1 sec, the second during the game play of the first working port 62a. The game times related to the operation port 63a are executed about 15 times. Incidentally, when the game times related to the second operation port 63a are out of play every time and the game does not shift to the second special game state, the second operation port 63a is related to the second operation port 63a during one game operation related to the first operation port 62a. A maximum of 20 game times will be executed.

  When the combination of the table A1 and the table B1 is referred to in this way, as shown in FIG. 32B, information corresponding to the table B1, that is, the fourth normal gaming state is maintained on the display screen 75a. A timer is displayed as information indicating the remaining time, and this timer is updated (subtracted) as time elapses. Specifically, at the start of the fourth normal gaming state, “remaining 60.00 sec START” is displayed as the timer, and when the fourth normal gaming state ends and shifts to the first normal gaming state, “Remaining 00.00 sec TIME OVER” is displayed. In the case of shifting to the second special game state with a special winning result during the fourth normal game state, the second special game state is displayed after the picture is fixedly displayed on the second operation port display portion D2. The timer update (subtraction) is stopped until the end. On the display screen 75a, an effect is added to the timer, and a character “LOCK” is additionally displayed to teach that updating of the timer is temporarily stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the transition trigger to the fourth normal gaming state is the 6R normal big hit result B, specifically, the 6R normal big hit result B is obtained, and the advantageous entering ball portion 314 is entered during the first special gaming state. If no entry occurs, the table A2 is set as the variable display time table for the second working port display unit D2 (second working port 63a), and the first working port display unit D1 (first The table B1 is set as the variable display time table for the one operation port 62a). That is, the table combination referred to in the fourth normal gaming state is the table A2 and the table B1.

  In this table combination, the variation display time of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1 is 60 seconds, and the pattern in the second working port display unit D2 when the number of reservations changes from “3” to “4”. The variable display time is 1 sec. In view of the fact that the fixed display time of the pattern on the second working port display unit D2 is 1 sec and the execution time of the second special gaming state is about 1 sec, during one game turn related to the first working port display unit D1 The game times related to the second operation port 63a are executed about 20 times. Incidentally, when the game times related to the second operation port 63a are out of play every time and the state does not shift to the second special game state, the second operation port 63a is related to the second operation port 63a during one game operation related to the first operation port 62a. A maximum of 30 game times will be executed.

  When the combination of the table A2 and the table B1 is referred to in this way, as shown in FIG. 32B, information corresponding to the table B1, that is, the fourth normal gaming state is maintained on the display screen 75a. A timer is displayed as information indicating the remaining time, and this timer is updated (subtracted) as time elapses. Specifically, at the start of the fourth normal gaming state, “remaining 60.00 sec START” is displayed as the timer, and when the fourth normal gaming state ends and shifts to the first normal gaming state, “Remaining 00.00 sec TIME OVER” is displayed. In the case of shifting to the second special game state with a special winning result during the fourth normal game state, the second special game state is displayed after the picture is fixedly displayed on the second operation port display portion D2. The timer update (subtraction) is stopped until the end. On the display screen 75a, an effect is added to the timer, and a character “LOCK” is additionally displayed to teach that updating of the timer is temporarily stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the transition trigger to the fourth normal gaming state is the 6R normal big hit result C, specifically, the 6R normal big hit result C is obtained, and the advantageous entering ball portion 314 is entered during the first special gaming state. When the entry of the ball does not occur, the table A1 is set as the variable display time table for the second working port display unit D2 (second working port 63a), and the first working port display unit D1 (first The table B2 is set as the variable display time table for the one operation port 62a). That is, the table combination referred to in the fourth normal gaming state is the table A1 and the table B2.

  In this table combination, the variation display time of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1 is 120 sec, and the pattern in the second working port display unit D2 when the number of reservations changes from “3” to “4”. The variable display time is 2 sec. In view of the fact that the fixed display time of the pattern on the second working port display unit D2 is 1 sec and the execution time of the second special gaming state is about 1 sec, during one game turn related to the first working port display unit D1 The game times related to the second operating port 63a are executed about 30 times. Incidentally, when the game times related to the second operation port 63a are out of play every time and the state does not shift to the second special game state, the second operation port 63a is related to the second operation port 63a during one game operation related to the first operation port 62a. A maximum of 40 game times will be executed.

  When the combination of the table A1 and the table B2 is referred to in this way, as shown in FIG. 32B, information corresponding to the table B1, that is, the fourth normal gaming state is maintained on the display screen 75a. A timer is displayed as information indicating the remaining time, and this timer is updated (subtracted) as time elapses. Specifically, at the start of the fourth normal gaming state, “remaining 120.00 sec START” is displayed as the timer, and when the fourth normal gaming state ends and shifts to the first normal gaming state, “Remaining 00.00 sec TIME OVER” is displayed. In the case of shifting to the second special game state with a special winning result during the fourth normal game state, the second special game state is displayed after the picture is fixedly displayed on the second operation port display portion D2. The timer update (subtraction) is stopped until the end. On the display screen 75a, an effect is added to the timer, and a character “LOCK” is additionally displayed to teach that updating of the timer is temporarily stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the transition trigger to the fourth normal gaming state is the 6R normal big hit result D, specifically, the 6R normal big hit result D is obtained, and the advantageous entering ball portion 314 is entered during the first special gaming state. If no entry occurs, the table A2 is set as the variable display time table for the second working port display unit D2 (second working port 63a), and the first working port display unit D1 (first The table B2 is set as the variable display time table for the one operation port 62a). That is, the table combination referred to in the fourth normal gaming state is the table A2 and the table B2.

  In this table combination, the variation display time of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1 is 120 sec, and the pattern in the second working port display unit D2 when the number of reservations changes from “3” to “4”. The variable display time is 1 sec. In view of the fact that the fixed display time of the pattern on the second working port display unit D2 is 1 sec and the execution time of the second special gaming state is about 1 sec, during one game turn related to the first working port display unit D1 The game times related to the second operation port 63a are executed about 40 times. Incidentally, when the game times related to the second operation port 63a are out of play every time and the state does not shift to the second special game state, the second operation port 63a is related to the second operation port 63a during one game operation related to the first operation port 62a. A maximum of 60 game times will be executed.

  When the combination of the table A2 and the table B2 is referred to in this way, as shown in FIG. 32B, information corresponding to the table B1, that is, the fourth normal gaming state is maintained on the display screen 75a. A timer is displayed as information indicating the remaining time, and this timer is updated (subtracted) as time elapses. Specifically, at the start of the fourth normal gaming state, “remaining 120.00 sec START” is displayed as the timer, and when the fourth normal gaming state ends and shifts to the first normal gaming state, “Remaining 00.00 sec TIME OVER” is displayed. In the case of shifting to the second special game state with a special winning result during the fourth normal game state, the second special game state is displayed after the picture is fixedly displayed on the second operation port display portion D2. The timer update (subtraction) is stopped until the end. On the display screen 75a, an effect is added to the timer, and a character “LOCK” is additionally displayed to teach that updating of the timer is temporarily stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the transition trigger to the fourth normal gaming state is the 6R normal big hit result E, specifically, the 6R normal big hit result E is obtained, and the advantageous entering ball portion 314 is entered during the first special gaming state. When the entry of the ball does not occur, the table A1 is set as the variable display time table for the second working port display unit D2 (second working port 63a), and the first working port display unit D1 (first The table B3 is set as the variable display time table for the one operation port 62a). That is, the table combination referred to in the fourth normal gaming state is the table A1 and the table B3.

  In this table combination, the variation display time of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1 is 180 seconds, and the pattern of the second working port display unit D2 when the number of reservations changes from “3” to “4”. The variable display time is 2 sec. In view of the fact that the fixed display time of the pattern on the second working port display unit D2 is 1 sec and the execution time of the second special gaming state is about 1 sec, during one game turn related to the first working port display unit D1 The game times related to the second operation port 63a are executed about 45 times. Incidentally, when the game times related to the second operation port 63a are out of play every time and the state does not shift to the second special game state, the second operation port 63a is related to the second operation port 63a during one game operation related to the first operation port 62a. A maximum of 60 game times will be executed.

  When the combination of the table A1 and the table B3 is referred to in this way, as shown in FIG. 32B, information corresponding to the table B3, that is, the fourth normal gaming state is maintained on the display screen 75a. A timer is displayed as information indicating the remaining time, and this timer is updated (subtracted) as time elapses. Specifically, at the start of the fourth normal gaming state, “remaining 180.00 sec START” is displayed as the timer, and when the fourth normal gaming state ends and the transition to the first normal gaming state occurs, “Remaining 00.00 sec TIME OVER” is displayed. In the case of shifting to the second special game state with a special winning result during the fourth normal game state, the second special game state is displayed after the picture is fixedly displayed on the second operation port display portion D2. The timer update (subtraction) is stopped until the end. On the display screen 75a, an effect is added to the timer, and a character “LOCK” is additionally displayed to teach that updating of the timer is temporarily stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the transition trigger to the fourth normal gaming state is the 6R normal big hit result F, specifically, the 6R normal big hit result F is obtained, and the advantageous entering ball portion 314 is entered during the first special gaming state. If no entry occurs, the table A2 is set as the variable display time table for the second working port display unit D2 (second working port 63a), and the first working port display unit D1 (first The table B3 is set as the variable display time table for the one operation port 62a). That is, the table combination referred to in the fourth normal gaming state is the table A2 and the table B3.

  In this table combination, the variation display time of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1 is 180 seconds, and the pattern of the second working port display unit D2 when the number of reservations changes from “3” to “4”. The variable display time is 1 sec. In view of the fact that the fixed display time of the pattern on the second working port display unit D2 is 1 sec and the execution time of the second special gaming state is about 1 sec, during one game turn related to the first working port display unit D1 The game times related to the second operating port 63a are executed about 60 times. Incidentally, when the game times related to the second operation port 63a are out of play every time and the state does not shift to the second special game state, the second operation port 63a is related to the second operation port 63a during one game operation related to the first operation port 62a. A maximum of 90 game times will be executed.

  When the combination of the table A1 and the table B2 is referred to in this way, as shown in FIG. 32B, information corresponding to the table B1, that is, the fourth normal gaming state is maintained on the display screen 75a. A timer is displayed as information indicating the remaining time, and this timer is updated (subtracted) as time elapses. Specifically, at the start of the fourth normal gaming state, “remaining 180.00 sec START” is displayed as the timer, and when the fourth normal gaming state ends and the transition to the first normal gaming state occurs, “Remaining 00.00 sec TIME OVER” is displayed. In the case of shifting to the second special game state with a special winning result during the fourth normal game state, the second special game state is displayed after the picture is fixedly displayed on the second operation port display portion D2. The timer update (subtraction) is stopped until the end. On the display screen 75a, an effect is added to the timer, and a character “LOCK” is additionally displayed to teach that updating of the timer is temporarily stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), when the transition to the fourth normal gaming state is a limiter operation, specifically, when the number of consecutive successes per probability variation has reached the upper limit, the second operation port display unit D2 The table A2 is set as the variable display time table for the (second operating port 63a), and the table B3 is set as the variable display time table for the first operating port display unit D1 (first operating port 62a). That is, the table combination referred to in the fourth normal gaming state is the table A2 and the table B3.

  In this table combination, the variation display time of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1 is 180 seconds, and the pattern of the second working port display unit D2 when the number of reservations changes from “3” to “4”. The variable display time is 1 sec. In view of the fact that the fixed display time of the pattern on the second working port display unit D2 is 1 sec and the execution time of the second special gaming state is about 1 sec, during one game turn related to the first working port display unit D1 The game times related to the second operating port 63a are executed about 60 times. Incidentally, when the game times related to the second operation port 63a are out of play every time and the state does not shift to the second special game state, the second operation port 63a is related to the second operation port 63a during one game operation related to the first operation port 62a. A maximum of 90 game times will be executed.

  When the combination of the table A2 and the table B3 is referred to in this way, as shown in FIG. 32B, information corresponding to the table B1, that is, the fourth normal gaming state is maintained on the display screen 75a. A timer is displayed as information indicating the remaining time, and this timer is updated (subtracted) as time elapses. Specifically, at the start of the fourth normal gaming state, “remaining 180.00 sec START” is displayed as the timer, and when the fourth normal gaming state ends and the transition to the first normal gaming state occurs, “Remaining 00.00 sec TIME OVER” is displayed. In the case of shifting to the second special game state with a special winning result during the fourth normal game state, the second special game state is displayed after the picture is fixedly displayed on the second operation port display portion D2. The timer update (subtraction) is stopped until the end. On the display screen 75a, an effect is added to the timer, and a character “LOCK” is additionally displayed to teach that updating of the timer is temporarily stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the transition trigger to the fourth normal gaming state is the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result, and the player does not enter the advantageous pitching portion 314 during the first special gaming state. If this is the case, the table A2 is set as the variable display time table for the second working port display unit D2 (second working port 63a), and the first working port display unit D1 (first working port 62a). The table B3 is set as the variable display time table for). That is, the table combination referred to in the fourth normal gaming state is the table A2 and the table B3.

  In this table combination, the variation display time of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1 is 180 seconds, and the pattern of the second working port display unit D2 when the number of reservations changes from “3” to “4”. The variable display time is 1 sec. In view of the fact that the fixed display time of the pattern on the second working port display unit D2 is 1 sec and the execution time of the second special gaming state is about 1 sec, during one game turn related to the first working port display unit D1 The game times related to the second operating port 63a are executed about 60 times. Incidentally, when the game times related to the second operation port 63a are out of play every time and the state does not shift to the second special game state, the second operation port 63a is related to the second operation port 63a during one game operation related to the first operation port 62a. A maximum of 90 game times will be executed.

  When the combination of the table A2 and the table B3 is referred to in this way, as shown in FIG. 32B, information corresponding to the table B1, that is, the fourth normal gaming state is maintained on the display screen 75a. A timer is displayed as information indicating the remaining time, and this timer is updated (subtracted) as time elapses. Specifically, at the start of the fourth normal gaming state, “remaining 180.00 sec START” is displayed as the timer, and when the fourth normal gaming state ends and the transition to the first normal gaming state occurs, “Remaining 00.00 sec TIME OVER” is displayed. In the case of shifting to the second special game state with a special winning result during the fourth normal game state, the second special game state is displayed after the picture is fixedly displayed on the second operation port display portion D2. The timer update (subtraction) is stopped until the end. On the display screen 75a, an effect is added to the timer, and a character “LOCK” is additionally displayed to teach that updating of the timer is temporarily stopped.

  In addition, when the number of holdings related to the first operating port 62a is “0” at the time of transition to the fourth normal gaming state, the timer is kept until the holding information related to the first operating port 62a is newly acquired. This is an opportunity to digest the game times related to the second operating port 63a. In such a case, the characters “STANDBY” are additionally displayed on the timer (initial value) on the display screen 75a, and it is instructed that the timer is in a state before starting the update.

  Here, in the fourth normal gaming state, the number of executions of the game times related to the second operation port 63a varies depending on the state of entering the second operation port 63a. Hereinafter, a specific example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33A illustrates a case where the number of holds related to the first operating port 62a is "1" and the number of holds related to the second operating port 63a is "4" at the start of the fourth normal gaming state. FIG. 33 (b) illustrates the case where the number of reserves related to the first operation port 62a is “1” and the number of reservations related to the second operation port 63a is “3” at the start of the fourth normal gaming state. Yes. In addition, about each example shown to Fig.33 (a), (b), both have shown the 4th normal gaming state corresponding to the combination of table A2 and table B3.

(Difference in the number of executions)
In FIG. 33 (a), at the timing of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state, the number of holdings related to the second operating port 63a is “4” → “3” and the number of holdings related to the first operating port 62a is “1” → “ It decreases to “0”, and the variation display of each pattern on the first working port display unit D1 and the second working port display unit D2 is started. The variation display time of the pattern of the first working port display unit D1 set in this case is 180 sec, and the variation display time of the pattern of the second working port display unit D2 is 1 sec. In this example, since the first game time related to the second operation port 63a corresponds to the special winning result, the second special gaming state is displayed after the pattern corresponding to the special winning result is confirmed and displayed for 1 sec. It has moved to.

  Here, the time required for the second special gaming state is about 1 sec, and there is a grace period of about 3 sec until the next game round is started after the number of holdings related to the second operating port 63a decreases to “3”. . As already described, about 1/3 of the game balls launched to the right route are configured to enter the second operation port 63a, and the firing period is 0.6 sec. For this reason, if the game ball is continuously fired to the right route, in many cases, the ball enters the second operation port 63a before the next game round starts. In the example of FIG. 33 (a), the game ball continues to be fired, and the number of holdings related to the second operation port 63a is restored from “3” to “4” before the next game round is started. Such a decrease → increase in the number of holdings is repeated until the display of the variation of the pattern relating to the first operation port 62a is completed, whereby the second operation port 63a executed during the display of the variation of the pattern in the first operation port 62a. The number of games related to has reached 60 times.

  Next, in FIG. 33 (b), at the timing when the state shifts to the fourth normal gaming state, the number of holdings related to the second operating port 63a is “3” → “2” and the number of holdings related to the first operating port 62a is “1”. "→" 0 "and the display of the variation of each picture on the first working port display unit D1 and the second working port display unit D2 is started. The variation display time of the pattern of the first working port display unit D1 set in this case is 180 sec, and the variation display time of the pattern of the second working port display unit D2 is 1 sec. In this example, since the first game time related to the second operation port 63a corresponds to the special winning result, the second special gaming state is displayed after the pattern corresponding to the special winning result is confirmed and displayed for 1 sec. It has moved to.

  Here, in the example of FIG. 33 (b), although the launch of the game ball is continued, the second operation port 63a does not enter the second operation port 63a before the start of the next game cycle. The number of suspensions related to is still “2”. For this reason, in the second game time related to the second working port 63a, the pattern change display time on the second working port display unit D2 is 3 sec. As described above, the acquisition of the number of holdings is not performed in a timely manner, and the function for shortening the display time of the pattern variation in the second working port display unit D2 (the function for shortening the number depending on the number of holdings) has not been successfully performed. When the shortest variable display time is not set as the display time, the number of games that can be executed until the design is displayed on the first working port display unit D1 (the number of games related to the second working port 63a). Will decrease. In the example shown in FIG. 33 (b), such an event occurs a plurality of times before the display of the variation of the pattern related to the first operation port 62a is completed, so that during the display of the variation of the pattern in the first operation port 62a. The executed number of games related to the second operation port 63a is 56 times.

  Note that the variable display time table for the second working port 63a is maintained in the table A2 until the final display of the pattern in the first working port 62a is completed. For this reason, when the game turn related to the second operation port 63a is started before the final display of the pattern on the first operation port display unit D1 is finished, the second operation port is obtained as a benefit of the fourth normal game state. The game times related to 63a will be increased by one.

  Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 34, a supplementary explanation will be given on the relationship between the flow of the game and the ball in the pachinko machine 10.

  When the game ball is being fired to the left route in the first normal game state, the number of possessed balls decreases as the game progresses. In such a situation where investment continues, when it becomes a jackpot result and shifts to the first special gaming state, the number of held balls greatly increases due to frequent winning to the upper variable winning device 64. Specifically, the first special gaming state is configured such that substantially nine balls can be generated during the round game. Since 14 game balls are paid out by one winning, 126 game balls can be obtained in one round. Since this round game is repeated a plurality of times after an interval time of 2 sec, it becomes an opportunity to acquire a large amount of game balls at once.

  In the first round in the first special game state, the advantageous ball portion 314 is released. When a ball enters the advantageous ball portion 314 in this round, the game shifts to the second normal game state after the first special game state. In the second normal gaming state, the pattern change display time on the first working port display D1 and the pattern change display time on the second working port display D2 are both shortened. As a result, a ball entering the second operating port 63a is generated and a special winning result is obtained, so that the lower variable winning device 65 is quickly opened. Due to the support by the lower variable prize winning device 65, the rate of decrease of the holding ball in the second normal game state becomes slower than that in the first normal game state.

  In the second normal gaming state, similarly to the fourth normal gaming state, upper limits are set for the number of games related to the first operating port 62a and the number of games related to the second operating port 63a, respectively. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of games related to the first operating port 62a is “1”, and the upper limit of the number of games related to the second operating port 63a is “100”. Here, about 1/60 of the game balls fired to the right route enter the right operation port 62aR disposed on the right route together with the upper variable winning device 64. For this reason, in many cases of transitioning to the second normal gaming state through the first special gaming state, it is assumed that the hold related to the first operation port 62a is secured before the start of the second normal gaming state. Therefore, in the second normal gaming state, the transition condition is quickly established, and the transition to the third normal gaming state is made.

  The third normal gaming state is continued until it becomes a jackpot result and shifts to the first special gaming state. Here, in the third normal gaming state, the pattern display time on the first working port display unit D1 is significantly extended compared to the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state, and the second working port display. The change display time of the pattern in the part D2 is further shortened than in the second normal gaming state. As a result, when the game ball is being fired to the right route, the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the second operation port 63a. As described above, the variation display time of the pattern in the second working port display section D2 is shortened, so that the support span by the lower variable prize winning device 65 when the special winning result is obtained is shortened, and the opportunity for the support is provided. Will substantially increase. As a result, the number of opportunities for entering the lower variable winning device 65 of the game ball being fired to the right route increases, and the number of possessed balls changes from decreasing to increasing. In other words, in the third normal gaming state, the special winning result is repeated until the next jackpot result, and the transition to the second special gaming state is repeated, thereby providing a chance to greatly increase the number of balls. When a normal jackpot result is obtained in the third normal gaming state, or when the number of consecutive probable big hits reaches an upper limit, a transition is made to the fourth normal gaming state through the first special gaming state.

  In the fourth normal gaming state, similarly to the second normal gaming state, upper limits are set for the number of games related to the first operation port 62a and the number of games related to the second operation port 63a, respectively. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of games related to the first operating port 62a is “1”, and the upper limit of the number of games related to the second operating port 63a is “100”. In the fourth normal gaming state, the pattern variation display time on the first working port display unit D1 is the same as that in the third normal gaming state, and the pattern variation display time on the second working port display unit D2 is 3 Slightly longer than the normal gaming state. That is, even in the fourth normal game state, the game proceeds with the game times related to the second operation port 63a as the main, similarly to the second normal game state and the third normal game state. However, since the variation display time of the pattern in the second working port display section D2 becomes longer, the span of support by the lower variable winning device 65 when the special winning result is obtained is extended, and the support opportunity is substantially increased. Will decrease. As a result, the chance of entering the lower variable winning device 65 of the game ball being fired to the right route is reduced, and the holding ball is changed from an increase to a decrease. However, due to the support by the lower variable winning device 65, the decrease rate of the holding ball becomes slower in the fourth normal gaming state than in the first normal gaming state.

  According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

  In the present embodiment, in the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, the gaming number related to the first operation port 62a in the fourth normal gaming state is the upper limit (corresponding to “reference number”: one time) The fourth normal gaming state continues until reaching the upper limit without reaching a jackpot result, and shifts to the first normal gaming state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the fourth normal gaming state. The game times related to the second operating port 63a proceed in parallel with the game times related to the first operating port 62a, but the number of times that the game times related to the second operating port 63a can be executed varies depending on the frequency of entry, etc. It becomes. In other words, the number of times the game times are executed in the fourth normal game state is uncertain until the fourth normal game state actually ends. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the player to execute as many game rounds as possible in the fourth normal gaming state, which can contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game.

  Here, in the fourth normal gaming state, a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) variable display times of the pattern are prepared in the second working port display unit D2, and any of these variable display times is set. Depending on what, the upper limit of the number of games that can be executed is determined. With such a configuration bet, diversification of the fourth normal gaming state can be realized, and monotonization of the game can be suppressed.

  Specifically, the variable display time of the second working port display portion D2 set in the fourth normal gaming state is three of 60 sec, 120 sec, and 180 sec. In the normal gaming state, it is longer than the maximum value of the variable display time (8 sec in the present embodiment) related to the first working port display section D1. For this reason, there is a difference in the upper limit of the number of games executed substantially (see FIG. 32 (a)) depending on which time the variable display time of the second working port display portion D2 is, and the fourth normal gaming state Diversification is preferably realized.

  In the fourth normal gaming state, a plurality (two) of variable display time tables for determining the variable display period of the picture in the second working port display unit D2 are prepared. Depending on whether or not is referred to, the substantial number of executions of the game times related to the second operation port 63a in the fourth normal gaming state will change. With such a configuration, it is possible to achieve monotonization of the game and contribute to improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  In particular, the total number of the variable display time tables is obtained by combining the variable display time tables (tables B1 to B3) related to the first operation port 62a and the variable display time tables (tables A1 to A2) related to the second operation port 63a. Diversification of the fourth normal gaming state is realized while suppressing an excessive increase (see FIG. 32A).

  The combinations of these variable display time tables are associated with the types of jackpot results. The case where the normal jackpot result is obtained in the lottery based on the ball entering portion to the second working port 63a is more than the case where the normal jackpot result is obtained in the lottery based on the ball entering the first working port 62a as described above. Table combinations that have a substantial number of executions are easily set. In other words, the number of substantial executions when the player shifts to the fourth normal gaming state after that becomes the normal jackpot result in the fourth normal gaming state is larger than the normal jackpot result in the first normal gaming state. Prone. This is preferable in order to strengthen the player's rescue function when the jackpot results are continuous.

  In the present embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot result is continuous, the limiter function may act and the high probability mode may be forcibly terminated. In such a case, the state shifts to the fourth normal gaming state. However, when the limiter function is activated and the state shifts to the fourth normal gaming state, the combination of the above variable display time table is determined by the player. The most advantageous combination. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

  A general gaming machine has a function of reducing the variable display time as the number of held information increases. However, when such a function is activated, at least the held information related to the first operation port 62a is displayed. When it is likely to shift to the fourth normal gaming state, there is a high possibility that the operation of launching the game ball is avoided so as not to be stored as much as possible. There is a concern that this will hinder the smooth progress of the game and the improvement of the operation rate. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, in the case of determining the variable display time of the pattern in the first working port display section D1 in the fourth normal gaming state, the number of the hold information related to the first working port 62a Any of the above-described problems can be suitably suppressed by configuring the variable display times determined to be common.

  In the present embodiment, as the first operation entrance portion 62, a lower operation entrance portion 62L and a right operation entrance portion 62R are provided. Any of these first action entry parts 62 may have some variation in the presence or absence of entry, so in some cases the number of reserves related to the first action opening 62a is “0” in the fourth normal gaming state. The possibility that the fourth normal gaming state proceeds cannot be denied. In other words, it is denied that the game times related to the first operation port 62a, which should originally define the length of the fourth normal game state, will not proceed, and only the game times related to the second operation port 63a will be repeated. Can not. If such an event occurs, there is a concern that the game will be excessively advantageous for the player and the soundness of the game will be reduced. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, an upper limit is set for the game times related to the second operation port 63a executed in the fourth normal game state, and the number of games related to the first operation port 62a is set. If the number of games related to the second operation port 63a reaches the upper limit before the upper limit is reached, the state shifts to the first normal gaming state. By having such a backup function, the occurrence of the above-described event is suppressed. Note that the upper limit of the number of games related to the second operating port 63a is higher than the upper limit of the number of games related to the first operating port 62a, and the latter intervention is avoided.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the variable display time table for the first working port referred to in the fourth normal gaming state is set to be one of the variable display time tables B1 to B3 depending on the type of the jackpot result. When the variable display time table B1 is set, the variable display time is “60 seconds”, and when the variable display time table B2 is set, the variable display time is “120 seconds”, and the variable display time table B3 is set. In this case, the variable display time is “180 sec”, but the variable display time tends to increase in the order of the variable display time table B1 <the variable display time table B2 <the variable display time table B3. If it is enough.

  For example, when the variable display time table B1 is set, the rate at which the variable display time is “60 sec” is 60%, the rate at which “120 sec” is 20%, and the rate at which “180 sec” is 20%, When the variable display time table B2 is set, the rate at which the variable display time is “60 sec” is 20%, the rate at which “120 sec” is 60%, and the rate at which “180 sec” is 20%. When the time table B3 is set, the ratio that the change display time is “60 sec” is 20%, the ratio that “120 sec” is 20%, and the ratio that “180 sec” is 60%. May be.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth normal gaming state, the variation display time of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1 is determined regardless of the number of holdings related to the first working port 62a, but is not limited thereto. . The variation display time of the first working port display unit D1 in the fourth normal gaming state may be varied depending on the number of holdings. For example, as the number of reservations related to the first operation port 62a increases, the pattern change display time in the display portion D1 for the first operation port may be lengthened, and as the number of reservations related to the first operation port 62a decreases, the first You may lengthen the fluctuation display time of the pattern in the display part D1 for working ports.

<Modification 3>
In the variable display time table A1 and the variable display time table A2 shown in the first embodiment, the difference in the variable display time for each hold number is unified to “1 sec”. However, the difference in the variable display time after the hold number May be different from each other. For example, the difference in the variable display time can be increased as the number of holdings increases.

  It is also possible to limit the number of holdings that cause a difference in variable display time to a part. In the case of such a configuration, a configuration may be adopted in which a difference in the variable display time occurs only when the number of holds is a predetermined number or more (for example, the upper limit is reached).

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment, when the number of games related to the second operation port 63a executed in the fourth normal game state reaches the upper limit (corresponding to the “second reference number”), the first normal game Although it is set as the structure which transfers to a state, it is not limited so much. For example, it may be configured to shift to the first normal gaming state when the sum of the number of games related to the first operation port and the number of games related to the second operation port reaches the upper limit.

<Modification 5>
In the first embodiment, in the fourth normal gaming state, the remaining time is displayed based on the variable display time of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1, but the variable display time table is switched. Considering that the timing is the timing at which the final display is finished in the first working port display unit D1, the total remaining time obtained by adding the final display time to the remaining time may be displayed.

<Modification 6>
In the first embodiment, when the game is in the fourth normal gaming state, the remaining time until the display of the variation of the pattern on the first working port display unit D1 is clearly indicated. It is not limited to. A part of time during which the fourth normal gaming state is maintained, that is, a time shorter than the original remaining time is displayed, and after the time has elapsed, the remaining time is not shown (the display of the remaining time is terminated) ) Configuration is also possible. In this case, for example, the remaining time of the timer counter may be “???”.

<Modification 7>
When the variation display time in the second working port display unit D2 is shortened in the fourth normal gaming state, the timer counter is used at the timing when the variation display of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1 is completed. Instead of ending the display of the remaining time, it is also possible to continue the display of the remaining time until the display of the variation of the pattern in the second working port display unit D2 is ended. In this case, for example, the remaining time may be specified, or the remaining time of the timer counter may be “???” or the like, and the remaining time may be unspecified.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment, the configuration in which only one type of support mode by the electric accessory 71 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in other embodiments described later, as the support mode, a low-frequency support mode in which the support frequency by the electric accessory 71 is relatively low and a relatively high frequency support mode may be provided. In such a configuration, the first normal gaming state corresponding to the first variation display mode is set to the low-frequency support mode, the second normal gaming state corresponding to the second variation display mode, and the third variation display mode correspondence. The fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the third normal gaming state and the fourth variable display mode may be set to the high frequency support mode.

<Modification 9>
In the first embodiment, when the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result is obtained, the variation display time table corresponding to the second working port display unit becomes the table A2, and the first working port display unit corresponding unit is displayed. The variable display time table is unified to be the table B3, but is not limited to this. Similarly to the normal jackpot result, the probability variation jackpot result may be configured such that the table combination differs depending on the type. With such a configuration, it is possible to make a difference in the execution frequency of the game times related to the relatively disadvantageous first operation port, and it is possible to change the ratio that substantially results in a probable big hit result. In particular, by providing the table A3 as the table A group, the table A3 having a shorter variation display time than the table A2, it is possible to further diversify the progress of the game times related to the second operation port. When the table A2 and the table A3 are compared, the frequency of shifting to the second special game state as a special hit result also changes, so that the increase / decrease ratio of the player's ball can be diversified. . For example, in the second normal gaming state, when the player's ball is slightly decreased, when it is substantially constant, it may be configured to cause a slight increase.

<Modification 10>
In the first embodiment, the upper limit (corresponding to the “reference number”) of the game times related to the first operation port 63a in the fourth normal game state is set to one time, but the present invention is not limited to this. . The upper limit may be 2 or more. In addition, the upper limit of the game times related to the first operation port 63a when shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, and the first operation when shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state. After the upper limit of the game times related to the mouth 63a is made coincident, the variable display time table related to the first action port 63a is made separate in the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state, and the first action port display By providing a difference in the variation display time of the pattern in the part D1, a clear difference is provided between the period during which the second normal gaming state is maintained and the period during which the fourth normal gaming state is maintained. Is not to be done. For example, after making the variable display time table of the display part D1 for the first operating port referred to in the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state common, the upper limit in the second normal gaming state, By making the upper limit in the normal gaming state different, the period during which the second normal gaming state is maintained may be different from the period during which the fourth normal gaming state is maintained.

<Modification 11>
In the first embodiment, the variable display time table corresponding to the first working port display section D1 referenced in the fourth normal gaming state is set regardless of the number of holdings related to the first working port 62a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a difference may be provided in the variable display time that is set according to the number of reserves related to the first working port 62a. For example, the variable display time that is set may be shortened as the number of holdings related to the first operating port 62a increases, or the variable display time that is set is increased as the number of holdings related to the first operating port 62a increases. It may be made to become. In the case of the former of these two deformation patterns, the difference in the variable display time for each number of holdings is made smaller than the minimum value of the variable display time of the pattern in the second working port display unit D2, and the number of holdings Even if there is a difference, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which a substantial difference does not easily occur in the number of game times.

<Modification 12>
In the first embodiment, the fourth normal gaming state is classified into six patterns using three variable display time tables for the first working port and two variable display time tables for the second working port. However, the number of variable display time tables for the first working port and the number of variable display time tables for the second working port are arbitrary.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the game times related to the two operation ports are executed in parallel, but diversification of the games is realized by using the function. The specific configuration for this is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, a characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment. First, with reference to FIG. 35, the structure of the game board 60 in this Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 35 is a front view of the game board 60.

(Game board 60)
In each opening formed in the game board 60, a general winning opening 61, operating ball entering portions 62 and 63, variable winning devices 64 and 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, and the like are arranged. When the entrance to the entrance such as the general prize opening 61, the action entrances 62, 63, and the variable prize-winning devices 64, 65 occurs, it is detected by the detection sensor, and a predetermined number of prizes are determined based on the detection result. Benefits such as ball payout are given to the player.

  An out port 68 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 60, and game balls that have not entered the various entrances are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening part, and after passing through the opening part, the game ball passes through the opening part as well as being discharged from the game area PE. A mode in which the game area PE is not discharged later is also included.

  The game board 60 is provided with a large number of game nails 69 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game balls, and various members (servants) such as a windmill. . The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations such as the game nails 69 and the windmills, and is adjusted so that a winning to the above-described general winning opening 61 and the like occurs with an appropriate probability.

  The variable display unit 67 is arranged in the center of the game board 60, and the operation entrance parts 62, 63 and the like are arranged around the variable display unit 67. The operation entrance parts 62 and 63 are largely divided into a lower operation entry part 62 disposed below the variable display unit 67 and a right operation entry part 63 disposed on the right side of the variable display unit 67. In particular, the right-hand actuated entrance portion 63 is provided with an openable entrance assist device (entrance assist means) or an electric accessory 71 as an open / close member (open / close means). The electric accessory 71 includes a shutter and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the shutter, and the right operation entrance portion 63 (the right operation port 63a) is changed by changing the position of the shutter by the drive unit. It is possible to switch between an open state (acceptance state) in which the ball can be entered and a closed state (non-acceptance state) in which the ball cannot be entered. The electric accessory 71 attached to the right operation entrance portion 63 may be switchable between a state in which entry into the right operation port 63a is easier and a state in which entry is more difficult.

  The through gate 66 is disposed at a position upstream of the right-hand actuated ball entering portion 63, specifically, at the side (right side) of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE (details will be described later on the right route). Yes. The through gate 66 allows a game ball to pass in the vertical direction, and the game ball won in the through gate 66 flows down to the downstream side in the game area PE without being discharged from the game area PE. Yes. When the winning combination is a lottery triggered by the passing of the game ball through the through gate 66, the electric accessory 71 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

  The upper variable winning device 64 is disposed at a position between the through gate 66 and the right working ball entering portion 63 on the right route, and on the downstream side of the right working ball entering portion 63 on the right route. The lower variable winning device 65 is disposed at the position. Since the upper variable winning device 64 and the lower variable winning device 65 have the same configuration as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The above-described right-hand acted ball entering portion 63, variable prize-winning devices 64, 65, and through gate 66 are arranged on the right route, and for the game balls flowing down the left route, these right-hand acted ball-entering portion 63, variable prize-winning device 64. , 65, and winning through the through gate 66 are avoided. On the other hand, the lower operating ball entering portion 62 is arranged on the left route, and the game balls flowing down the right route are prevented from winning the lower operating ball entering portion 62. The player can advantageously advance the game by selecting the launch destination of the game ball (the flow path of the game ball) from the right route / left route according to the game situation.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 36, a supplementary explanation will be given on the right-hand actuated ball entrance 63. FIG. 36 is a schematic view showing the internal structure of the right working ball entry portion 63.

  A guide passage 63c that guides the game ball that has flowed into the right operation port 63a to a collection passage provided on the back side of the game board 60 is formed in the right operation entrance portion 63. The guide passage 63c branches into a first branch passage 63d and a second branch passage 63e at a midway position thereof. The guide passage 63c can be seen through from the front of the gaming machine, and the branching point of the game ball passing through the guide passage 63c can be visually confirmed.

  The branching position in the guide passage 63c is provided with a distribution means 63g for distributing the game balls that have reached the branching position to the first branch passage 63d and the second branch passage 63e. The distribution means 63g can be switched between a first guidance state for guiding the game ball that has reached the branch position to the first branch passage 63d and a second guide state for guiding the game ball to the second branch passage 63e. The distribution means 63g is configured to switch from one guidance state to the other guidance state based on the guidance of the game ball. Therefore, the game balls flowing into the right operation port 63a are sequentially (alternately) distributed to the first branch path 63d / second branch path 63e.

  The lower working port 62a is connected to the first branch passage 63d through the communication passage 63f, and the game ball that has flowed into the lower working port 62a flows directly into the first branch passage 63d. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the right operation port 63a flows into both the branch passages 63d and 63e, while the game ball that has flowed into the lower operation port 62a flows into only the first branch passage 63d.

  A detection sensor 391b for detecting a game ball is disposed in the first branch passage 63d, and a detection sensor 391c for detecting a game ball is located at a position downstream of the communicating portion of the communication passage 63f in the second branch passage 63e. It is arranged. These detection sensors 391b and 391c are connected to the main control device, and the main control device grasps whether or not there is a ball entering the ball entering portions 63d and 63e based on detection information (detection signals) from the detection sensors 391b and 391c. To do. Hereinafter, in the present embodiment, the first branch passage 63d is referred to as a “first ball entry portion 63d”, and the second branch passage 63e is referred to as a “second ball entry portion 63e”.

  The basic configuration of the variable display unit 67 disposed in the center of the game board 60 and the main display unit 81 disposed outside the game area PE is the same as that of the first embodiment. In the following description, the display unit for the first incoming ball portion 63d in the main display unit 81 is referred to as “first incoming ball portion display portion D1,” and the reserved number display portion for the first incoming ball portion 63d is referred to as “first. The number-of-holds display section S1 ”, the display section for the second section 63e is“ second display section D2 ”, and the number-of-hold display section for the second section 63e is“ second ”. This will be referred to as “the number-of-holds display section S2”. Since the basic configuration of each of the display units D1, D2, S1, and S2 is the same as that of each of the display units D1, D2, S1, and S2 in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38, the success / failure table for the first incoming ball portion 63d and the success / failure table for the second incoming ball portion 63e will be described.

(Winning / failing table for the first entrance club)
In the success / failure table for the first incoming ball portion 63d that is referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 37A, the random number value corresponding to the jackpot result is “7”. And “507”. That is, “7” and “507” among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of “0 to 599” correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of the jackpot is 2/600.

  In the success / failure table for the first entrance portion 63d, “5”, “105”, “205”, and “405” correspond to the first special hit result, and the probability that the first special hit result is obtained. Is 4/600. “305” and “505” correspond to the second special hit result, and the probability of the second special hit result is 2/600. The lottery results correspond to the outliers other than the random number values that are the big hit results and the random number values that are the special hit results.

  Although the details will be described later, the first special hit result and the second special hit result are the same in that the transition to the second special gaming state is an opportunity, but the first special hit result is the first entry. The second special hit result is the variable display time table, whereas the change display time table for defining the variable display time of the pattern in the display unit D1 for the club and the display unit D2 for the second ball entry is not triggered. It is different in that it is a switching opportunity.

  In the success / failure table for the first incoming ball portion 63d that is referred to when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), the random number value corresponding to the jackpot result is “7”. , “107”, “207”, “307”, “407”, “507”. That is, “7”, “107”, “207”, “307”, “407”, “507” correspond to the jackpot result among the values of the hit random number counter C1 from “0” to “599”, The probability of winning a jackpot is 6/600.

  Similarly to the success / failure table for the low probability mode, “5”, “105”, “205”, and “405” correspond to the first special hit result, and the probability that the first special hit result is 4 / 600. “305” and “505” correspond to the second special hit result, and the probability of the second special hit result is 2/600. The lottery results correspond to the outliers other than the random number values that are the big hit results and the random number values that are the special hit results.

(Win / Fail Table for the Second Entrance 63e)
In the success / failure table for the second entrance 63e referred to when the lottery mode is the low probability mode, as shown in FIG. 38A, the random number value corresponding to the jackpot result is “7”. And “507”. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of “0” to “599”, “7” and “507” correspond to the jackpot result, and the probability of the jackpot is 2/600. The random number corresponding to the special hit result is not provided in the low probability mode correspondence success / failure table for the second entrance portion 63e, and the lottery result corresponds to the missed result other than the random number value that is the big hit result. is doing.

  In the success / failure table for the second entrance 63e referred to when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, as shown in FIG. 38B, the random number value corresponding to the jackpot result is “7”. , “107”, “207”, “307”, “407”, “507”. That is, “7”, “107”, “207”, “307”, “407”, “507” correspond to the jackpot result among the values of the hit random number counter C1 from “0” to “599”, The probability of winning a jackpot is 6/600. The random number corresponding to the special hit result is not provided in the high probability mode correspondence success / failure table for the second entrance portion 63e, and the lottery result corresponds to the result of losing except for the random value that is the big hit result. is doing.

  In the present embodiment, the 6R normal jackpot result, the 16R normal jackpot result, the 6R probability variable jackpot result, and the 16R probability variable jackpot result are provided as the jackpot results. Next, the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 39A, in the first pitching part allocation table, a total of 50 values “0” to “49” among the values of the hit type counter C2 from “0” to “99” are 6R. Usually, it corresponds to the jackpot result, and a total of 50 from “50” to “99” corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result. In other words, the probability of a probable jackpot result is 50%.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (b), in the second pitching part allocation table, a total of 35 values “0” to “34” out of the values of the hit type counter C2 from “0” to “99” are 16R. Normally, it corresponds to the jackpot result, and a total of 65 from “35” to “99” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result. In other words, the probability of a probability variation jackpot result is 65%, and the probability of a probability variation jackpot result is higher than the distribution based on the ball entering the first ball entry portion 63d.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of support modes having different support modes are provided as the support by the electrically-powered accessory 71 attached to the right operation ball entry portion 63. Specifically, in the support mode, the frequency with which the electric accessory 71 is released per unit time when compared with a situation in which the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area PE. A low frequency support mode (or a low frequency guide state) and a high frequency support mode (or a high frequency guide state) are provided so as to be relatively high and low.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (a), in the low frequency support mode, the change display time of the pattern on the through gate display unit DS (ordinary map) is 10 to 30 sec, and the fixed display time of the pattern is 0. .5 sec. The probability of winning (support winning) in the support lottery using the open random number counter C4 is 50/100. When the support is won, the electric accessory 71 is in an open state for 0.1 sec.

  On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode, the change display time of the pattern in the through gate display section DS (common figure) is 0.2 to 1 sec, and the final display time of the pattern is 0.5 sec. . The probability of winning (support winning) in the support lottery using the open random number counter C4 is 90/100. When the support is won, the electric accessory 71 is opened for 2 seconds.

  In the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a winning to the right operation ball entry portion 63 (right operation port 63a) will occur than in the low frequency support mode. When a winning is made to the right operation port 63a, a predetermined number (1 in the present embodiment) of game balls is paid out. Thereby, in the high frequency support mode, the player can play a game while suppressing consumption (investment) of the ball.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (b), the 6R normal jackpot result and the 16R normal jackpot result indicate that the number of games after the end of the first special gaming state becomes the low probability mode and the game mode after the support mode shifts is the reference number of times. It is a jackpot result that becomes the high frequency support mode until it becomes (specifically 100 times), and the 6R probability variation jackpot result and the 16R probability variation jackpot result become the high probability mode after the end of the first special gaming state. Together with the jackpot result that the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode until the next jackpot result.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the variation that determines the variation display time of the pattern in the first entrance display D1 of the main display unit 81 and the variation display time of the pattern in the second entrance display D2. As display modes, a first variation display mode to a third variation display mode are provided.

  Although the details will be described later, in the first variation display mode, the variation display time of the pattern on the first entrance portion display unit D1 is shorter than the variation display time of the pattern on the second entrance portion display portion D2. Is set. In the second variation display mode, similarly to the first variation display mode, the variation display time of the pattern in the first ball display unit D1 is shorter than the variation display time of the pattern in the second ball display unit D2. Although set so as to be different from the first variation display mode, the difference is smaller than that of the first variation display mode. The third variation display mode is set so that the variation display time of the pattern on the first entrance portion display unit D1 is longer than the variation display time of the pattern on the second entry portion display portion D2.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (b), the 6R normal jackpot result, 16R normal jackpot result, 6R probability variation jackpot result, and 16R probability variation jackpot result are all in the second variation display mode as the variation display mode after the end of the first special gaming state. Is the jackpot result set. In other words, in any case of the jackpot result, after returning to the normal game state through the first special game state, the game proceeds with the game times related to the first ball entering portion 63d as the main. .

  In the following description, the normal gaming state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the support mode is the low frequency support mode, and the variable display mode is the first variable display mode is referred to as “first normal gaming state”. A normal gaming state in which the high probability mode, the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the variable display mode is the second variable display mode is referred to as a “second normal game state”, and the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency. The normal gaming state in which the support mode and the variable display mode become the third variable display mode is referred to as a “third normal gaming state”, the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the variable display mode is the second. The normal gaming state that becomes the variable display mode is referred to as the “fourth normal gaming state”, and the lottery mode is a low probability mode and the support mode is frequent. Support mode, the normal game state in which the variable display mode becomes the third change display mode is referred to as a "fifth normal game state".

  FIG. 41A shows a display mode of the display screen 75a in the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state. In these normal game states, a blue effect is displayed on the outer edge portion of the display screen 75a, and the characters “CHANCE” are displayed at the upper center of the display screen 75a as a message suggesting that the player is in an advantageous state. The In the second normal gaming state, a background image simulating “under the sea” is displayed on the display screen 75a, and in the fourth normal gaming state, a background image simulating “beach” is displayed on the display screen 75a. Normal gaming state is distinguished. Although not shown, a counter indicating the remaining number of games is displayed at the corner of the display screen 75a, and the remaining number of games in which the second normal gaming state is continued or the fourth normal gaming state is continued. The number of remaining games is displayed.

  FIG. 41B shows the display mode of the display screen 75a in the third normal gaming state and the fifth normal gaming state. In these normal game states, a red effect is displayed on the outer edge portion of the display screen 75a, and the message “BIG CHANCE” is displayed at the upper center of the display screen 75a as a message suggesting that the player is in a more advantageous state. Is displayed. In the third normal gaming state, a background image simulating “under the sea” is displayed on the display screen 75a, and in the fifth normal gaming state, a background image simulating “beach” is displayed on the display screen 75a. Normal gaming state is distinguished. Although not shown, in the third normal gaming state, a counter indicating the number of remaining games is displayed at the corner of the display screen 75a.

  Next, referring to the flowcharts of FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, the first entrance control process and the second entrance executed as part of the game turn control process in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 in the present embodiment. The department control process will be described. The first entrance part control process is a partial modification of the first working port control process in the first embodiment, and the second entrance part control process is the same as in the first embodiment. The control process for the second working port is partially changed. In the following description, the changes from the first embodiment will be mainly described, and a part of the common parts will not be described.

(Control processing for the first entrance part)
As shown in FIG. 42, in the first pitching part control process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the game is related to the first pitching part 63d. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the first entrance part display unit D1 of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to a fixed display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. . Note that this determination is made by storing the game-playing flag (first game-playing flag) for the first ingress part in the game-playing flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not it is (stored). The first game-playing flag is stored when the first variation display unit D1 starts the variable display of the design, and is erased when the design is stopped and the finalized display ends.

  If the game is not being played, a negative determination is made in step S2001, and the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, it is determined whether or not game play relating to the second incoming ball portion 63e is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second entrance display portion D2 of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to a fixed display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. In this determination, the game playing flag (second game playing flag) for the second entry part is stored in the game playing flag storage area (variable display information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. This is done by determining whether or not it is (stored). The game in-game flag for the second pitching part is stored when the variable display is started on the second pitching part display unit D2, and a picture corresponding to the lottery result (game result) is stopped and displayed. It is erased when the fixed display ends.

  If a positive determination is made in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the second entrance 63e. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2003, the control process for the first incoming ball section is ended as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2003 or step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2004. In step S2004, with reference to the total number-of-holds storage area of the reserved ball storage area 632, the number of reserved information stored in the first ball storage part CRN (specifically the first ball input part 63d) It is determined whether or not the number of such hold information is “0”. When the number of reserved storages CRN for the first entry part is “0”, the game number control process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the number of reserved storages CRN for the first entry part is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2005. In step S2005, data setting processing is performed.

  In the data setting process of the first entrance part 63d, first, the first entrance part reserved storage number CRN is decremented by 1. Thereafter, the data stored in the first area of the first ball holding section holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area AE1, and the data stored in the storage area of the first ball holding section holding area Ra is shifted. Execute. The first entrance area reservation area Ra and the first execution area AE1 have different names, but the first working port reservation area Ra and the first execution area AE1 shown in the first embodiment (FIG. 8).

  This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and the data in the first area is cleared and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as the third area → second area and the fourth area → third area. Then, one LED that is lit is extinguished in the reserved number display section S1 for the first entrance section. In this turn-off process, contrary to the turn-on process that is executed when the hold information is added, the LEDs of the hold number display part S1 for the first incoming ball part are turned off sequentially from the lower side.

  After performing the data setting process described in detail above, in step S2006, the first incoming ball unit is started so as to start the display of the variation of the pattern on the display unit D1 for the first incoming ball portion and the display of the variation of the symbol on the symbol display device 75. After executing the change start process for the first game (change start process for the first entrance part), the game turn control process is terminated. In the following, the first entrance variation variation start process will be described. The basic flow of this process is the same as the first working port variation start process (FIG. 16) shown in the first embodiment. .

(Fluctuation start processing for the first entry part)
In the first entrance part variation start process, first, the determination process is executed. In the success / failure determination process, with reference to the success / failure table for the first entrance area, the information for determination of success / failure among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, that is, the numerical information acquired from the winning random number counter C1 is described above. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot value information. If the determination result is a jackpot result, a type determination process is executed.

  In the type determination process, the information for type determination among the information stored in the first execution area AE1, that is, the numerical information acquired from the hit type counter C2 is grasped. Further, referring to the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, the information for type determination as described above is an information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result, and information corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot result. Group, an information group corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result, and an information group corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result are specified. Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the jackpot result stop stored in advance in the ROM 603 is a picture that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display portion D (first entrance portion display portion D1) of the main display unit 81 in the game round. The information is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. Also, various flag storage areas 635 in the RAM 604 store information for specifying in the MPU 602 whether the current game result is any of the 6R normal jackpot result, the 16R normal jackpot result, the 6R probability variation jackpot result, and the 16R probability variation jackpot result. To store. Specifically, the 6R normal big hit result is stored in the case of the 6R normal big hit result, the 16R normal big flag is stored in the case of the 16R normal big hit result, and the 6R normal change flag is set in the case of the 6R positive variable big hit result. If the result is a 16R probability variation jackpot result, a 16R probability variation flag is stored.

  After executing the setting process, it is determined whether or not the game turn related to the second ball-introducing unit 63e is being executed. When the game is related to the second entering part 63e, the forced end flag is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. When the game times (pattern change display) related to the second ball entering part 63e are being executed, the game times (pattern change display) related to the second ball input part 63e are in the middle based on this forced end flag. Will be forcibly terminated. More specifically, the game times related to the second pitching portion 63d is a case where the game times related to the first pitching portion 63d corresponds to the jackpot result and exceeds the timing at which the final display in the game times is performed. Can be executed, the game times related to the second pitching portion 63e are shortened, and the game times related to the second pitching portion 63e are ended together with the end of the game times related to the first pitching portion 63d. Become. In such a case, the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the game times related to the second incoming ball portion 63e corresponds to the result of detachment.

  When the above-described determination result is a losing result, stop result setting processing for the losing result is executed. Specifically, the ROM 603 stores in advance a picture that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (first display unit D1 display unit D1) of the main display unit 81 in the game round relating to the start of the current change. Is specified from the stop result table for the off-result, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604.

  After executing each stop result setting process, a process for setting a variable display time (display duration) is executed. Specifically, a value corresponding to the variable display time is set in a variable display time counter (hereinafter, referred to as a first variable display time counter) for the first entrance section provided in various counter areas 634 of the AM 604. The first variation display time counter is updated (subtracted) every time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  After the change display time setting process is executed, a change start command and a type command are set. The change start command includes information on the change display time. Here, as described above, the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the non-reach occurrence fluctuation display time table is different from the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the reach occurrence fluctuation display time table. Even if the start command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach, the notification / production control device 143, which is the control device on the sub-side, can identify the presence or absence of reach from the information on the variable display time. . In this regard, it can be said that the change start command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change start command may include information directly indicating whether or not reach has occurred.

  After executing the setting process of the variation start command and the type command, the variation display of the first ball portion display unit D1 in the main display unit 81 is started, and the first game times described above are stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Stores the middle flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is possible to specify that the game times (for example, change display) related to the first incoming ball portion 63d are being executed. In addition, in this Embodiment, it was set as the structure which starts the change display of the pattern in the display part D1 for 1st entrance parts, and the symbol in the symbol display apparatus 75 according to a lottery, However, It is not limited to this, It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the display of the variation of the pattern and the pattern is started before the lottery.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 42 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, that is, if it is determined that the game is being played on the first pitching unit 63d, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the second incoming ball portion 63e. If a negative determination is made in step S2007, the process proceeds to step S2008. In step S2008, it is determined whether it is the timing when the set variable display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the first variation display time counter provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2008, the variation display process is executed in step S2009, and then the first ball-entry portion control process is terminated. In the variable display process of step S2009, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner by performing a process of turning on / off each LED constituting the first entrance part display unit D1.

  Returning to the description of step S2008, when the value of the first variation display time counter is “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S2008, and the process proceeds to step S2010. In step S2010, it is determined whether a fixed display is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a fixed display flag (first fixed display flag) for the first incoming ball part is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If a negative determination is made in step S2010, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, the first entrance portion variation end process is executed.

  In the first entrance portion variation end process, first, a first end portion variation end command (referred to as a first variation end command) is set. The first change end command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process. In the notification / production control device 143, based on the reception of the first variation end command, a process for ending the production in the game times is executed. Further, the first change end command is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification / production control device 143, and the display control device 710 receives the first change end command, thereby playing the game of the game time. A combination of symbols corresponding to the result or the like is fixedly displayed (final stop display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. In addition, it is good also as a structure which terminates the effect for game rotations independently by the alerting / production control device 143 or the display control device 710 without transmitting the first variation end command.

  After the first variation end command is set, the display control of the main display unit 81 is performed so that the pattern is stopped and displayed on the first ball-entry-part display unit D1 in a predetermined manner. For example, when the lottery result (game result) is a losing result, the display of the pattern corresponding to the losing result is performed. Then, a value corresponding to the fixed display time (1 sec) is set in a fixed display time counter (first fixed display time counter) for the first incoming ball section provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. The first fixed display time counter is updated (subtracted) each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  After setting the fixed display time, the first fixed display flag is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The first fixed display flag is deleted when the value of the first fixed display time counter becomes “0”.

  After the change end process is executed in step S2011, the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is any one of the second normal gaming state, the fourth normal gaming state, and the fifth normal gaming state. If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the control process for the first incoming ball section is ended as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2012, the process proceeds to step S2013.

  In the present embodiment, the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 are used for grasping the number of executions of the game times related to the first ball entering portion 63d in the second normal game state, the fourth normal game state, and the fifth normal game state. A game number counter is provided. In the game number counter update process in step S2013, the value of the game number counter is updated. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the value of the game number counter.

  In a succeeding step S2014, it is determined whether or not the game number counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2014, the first ball entrance control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2014, the process proceeds to step S2015, and the variable display time table switching flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The variable display time table is switched at the timing when the game round in which the variable display time table switching flag is set ends. Specifically, when the variation display time table that has been referred to is the second variation display time table, the third variation display time table is switched to, and the variation display time table that has been referred to is the fourth variation. In the case of the display time table or the fifth variation display time table, the display is switched to the first variation display time table.

  In subsequent step S2016, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the fourth normal gaming state or the fifth normal gaming state. If a negative determination is made in step S2016, the first ball entrance control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2016, the process proceeds to step S2017, and after the high-frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 is erased, the control process for the first pitching unit is terminated. .

  Returning to the description of step S2010, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2010, that is, if the first fixed display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S2018. In step S2018, it is determined whether or not the value of the first fixed display time counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2018, the first ball entrance control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2018, the flag erasing process is executed in step S2019, and then the first working port control process is terminated. In this flag erasing process, the first game in-game flag and the first confirmed display flag stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 are erased.

  Returning to the description of step S2007, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2007, that is, if it is the timing to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the second ball entry portion 63e, step S2020 is performed. Proceed to In step S2020, a stop pattern rewriting process is executed. In the stop result rewriting process, the stop pattern determined in the first pitching part variation start process is rewritten to a pattern corresponding to the outlier result. Specifically, when the game times related to the first ball entering portion 63d is a result of losing, the stop pattern is stopped, whereas the game times related to the first ball entering portion 63d is a hit result. In this case, the stop pattern is rewritten with a pattern corresponding to the result. Further, the first variation display time counter is reset.

  After executing the process of step S2020, after executing various processes related to the end of the game times in and after step S2010, the control process for the first pitched part is ended.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43, the control process for 2nd entrance part is demonstrated.

(Control process for the second entrance part)
In the second pitching part control process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the game is related to the second pitching part 63e. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second entrance display portion D2 of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to a fixed display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. This determination is made as to whether or not the above-described second game-in-progress flag is stored (stored) in the game-in-progress flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. By doing. The second game in-game flag is stored when the display of the change of the pattern is started on the second entrance display unit D2, and is erased when the display of the pattern is stopped and the final display is finished.

  If the game is not being played, a negative determination is made in step S2101 and the process proceeds to step S2102. In step S2102, it is determined whether or not the game is related to the first pitching unit 63d. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display unit D1 for the first incoming ball part of the main display unit 81 is in a variable display to a fixed display, that is, whether or not a game for one game is being executed. This determination is made as to whether or not the above-mentioned first game-in-progress flag is stored (stored) in the game-in-progress flag storage area (variable display-in-progress information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. By doing.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result or the pattern corresponding to the special hit result in the first entrance part 63d. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the control process for the second incoming ball section is terminated as it is.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103 or step S2102, the process proceeds to step S2104. In step S2104, the total number-of-holds storage area of the reservation ball storage area 632 is referred to, and the second storage area storage number CRN (specifically, the second input part 63e) It is determined whether or not the number of such hold information is “0”. When the number of reserved storages CRN for the second pitching part is “0”, the game number control process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the number of reserved storages CRN for the second ball entry unit is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S2105 to perform data setting processing.

  In the data setting process for the second entrance portion 63e, first, the second entrance portion reserved storage number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, the data stored in the first area of the second pitching area reservation area Rb is moved to the second execution area AE2, and the data stored in the storage area of the second pitching area reservation area Rb is shifted. Execute. In addition, although these names are different, the second holding area reservation area Rb and the second execution area AE2 have the names different from those of the second working port reservation area Rb and the second execution area AE2 (see FIG. 8).

  This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, and the data in the first area is cleared and the second area → the first area, The data in each area is shifted such as the third area → second area and the fourth area → third area. Then, one LED that is lit is extinguished in the reserved number display section S2 for the second incoming ball section. In the turn-off process, contrary to the turn-on process that is executed when the hold information is added, the LEDs of the hold number display section S2 for the second entrance part are turned off sequentially from the lower side.

  After performing the data setting process described in detail above, in step S2106, the second incoming ball section is started so as to start the pattern fluctuation display on the second ball incoming section display section D2 and the symbol fluctuation display on the symbol display device 75. The game start control process is terminated after executing the fluctuation start process for the second game (variation start process for the second entrance part). In the following, the second starting part variation start process will be described, but the basic flow of this process is the same as the second working port variation start process (FIG. 18) shown in the first embodiment. .

(Fluctuation start processing for the second pitching part)
In the second starting part variation start process, first, a determination process is performed. In the success / failure determination process, with reference to the success / failure table for the second entrance portion, the information for determination of the success / failure among the various information stored in the second execution area AE2, that is, the numerical information related to the hit random number counter C1 is described above. It is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot value information. If the result of this determination is a jackpot result, type determination processing is executed.

  In the type determination process, information for type determination among various pieces of information stored in the second execution area AE2, that is, numerical information acquired from the hit type counter C2, and the distribution stored in the distribution table storage area 622 of the ROM 603 With reference to the table, the information for type determination as described above is an information group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result, an information group corresponding to the 16R normal jackpot result, an information group corresponding to the 6R probability varying jackpot result, and the 16R probability varying jackpot result. It is specified in which of the information groups corresponding to. Thereafter, a stop result setting process for the jackpot result is executed. Specifically, the jackpot result stop stored in advance in the ROM 603 is a picture that is finally stopped and displayed on the second entrance display portion D2 of the main display unit 81 (main display portion D) in the game round. The information is specified from the result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. The stop result table for the jackpot result is provided with a plurality of patterns to be stopped and displayed on the second entrance display unit D2, and information indicating the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the RAM 604. Also, various flag storage areas 635 in the RAM 604 store information for specifying in the MPU 602 whether the current game result is any of the 6R normal jackpot result, the 16R normal jackpot result, the 6R probability variation jackpot result, and the 16R probability variation jackpot result. To store. Specifically, the 6R normal big hit result is stored in the case of the 6R normal big hit result, the 16R normal big flag is stored in the case of the 16R normal big hit result, and the 6R normal change flag is set in the case of the 6R positive variable big hit result. If the result is a 16R probability variation jackpot result, a 16R probability variation flag is stored.

  After the setting process is executed, it is determined whether or not the game times related to the first ball entering portion 63d are being executed. If it is determined that it is being executed, the forced end flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. When the game times (pattern change display) related to the first ball entering part 63d are being executed, the game times (pattern change display) related to the first ball input part 63d are in the middle based on this forced end flag. Will be forcibly terminated. More specifically, the game times related to the first ball entry portion 63e correspond to the jackpot result, and the game times related to the first ball entry portion 63d beyond the timing at which the final display in the game time is performed. In the case where (corresponding to a missed result) can be executed, the game times related to the first ball entering portion 63d are shortened, and the game times related to the first ball entering portion 63d at the end of the game times related to the second ball entering portion 63e. Will also end. In such a case, the pattern that is stopped and displayed in the game times related to the first incoming ball portion 63d corresponds to the result of the removal.

  Returning to the description of the above-described lottery lottery, when the result of the determination of the success / failure lottery is a special hit result, a stop result setting process for the special hit result is executed. Specifically, for the special winning result stored in advance in the ROM 603, a picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display part D (second entrance part display part D2) of the main display unit 81 in the game round. The information is specified from the stop result table, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. If the current game result is a special hit result, the special hit flag is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604.

  When the determination result of the above-mentioned lottery determination is a losing result, a stop result setting process for the losing result is executed. Specifically, the ROM 603 stores in advance a picture that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit D (second display unit D2 display unit D2) of the main display unit 81 in the game round relating to the start of the current change. Is specified from the stop result table for the off-result, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 604. After executing the stop result setting process, the variable display time (display duration) setting process is executed.

  After the change display time setting process is executed, a change start command and a type command are set. The change start command includes information on the change display time. Here, as described above, the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the non-reach occurrence fluctuation display time table is different from the fluctuation display time obtained by referring to the reach occurrence fluctuation display time table. Even if the start command does not include information on the presence or absence of reach, the notification / production control device 143, which is the control device on the sub-side, can identify the presence or absence of reach from the information on the variable display time. . In this regard, it can be said that the change start command includes information indicating whether or not reach has occurred. Note that the change start command may include information directly indicating whether or not reach has occurred. By the way, in the present embodiment, the display on the second working port display unit D2 and the display on the symbol display device 75 are displayed in accordance with the lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the variable display of symbols is started before the lottery.

  After executing the setting process of the variation start command and the type command, the variation display of the second working port display unit D2 in the main display unit 81 is started, and the above-described second game is being performed in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. After the flag is stored, the second ball entry variation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 43 again, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, if it is determined that the game is being performed for the second operating port 63a, the process proceeds to step S2107. In step S2107, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the first operation port 62a. If a negative determination is made in step S2107, the process proceeds to step S2108.

  In step S2108, it is determined whether or not it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the special winning result in the game times related to the first operation port 62a. If a negative determination is made in step S2108, the process proceeds to step S2109.

  In step S2109, it is determined whether it is the timing when the variable display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the second variation display time counter provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2109, the variable display process is executed in step S2110, and then the second working port control process is terminated. In the variable display process of step S2110, the pattern is displayed in a variable manner by performing a process of turning on / off each LED constituting the second working port display unit D2.

  Returning to the description of step S2109, when the value of the second variation display time counter is “0”, an affirmative determination is made in step S2109, and the process proceeds to step S2111. In step S2111, it is determined whether a fixed display is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a final display flag (second final display flag) for the second working port is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If a negative determination is made in step S2111, the process proceeds to step S2112. In step S2112, second working port variation end processing is executed.

  In the second working port variation end process, first, a second working port variation end command (second variation end command) is set. This second variation end command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 13). In the notification / production control device 143, based on the reception of the second variation end command, a process for ending the production in the game times is executed. The second change end command is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification / production control device 143, and the display control device 710 receives the second change end command, thereby playing the game of the game time. A combination of symbols corresponding to the result or the like is fixedly displayed (final stop display) on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. In addition, it is good also as a structure which terminates the effect for game times independently by the alerting / production control device 143 or the display control device 710 without transmitting the second variation end command.

  After setting the second variation end command, the display control of the main display unit 81 is performed so that the picture is stopped and displayed on the second working port display unit D2 in a predetermined manner. For example, when the lottery result (game result) is a losing result, the display of the pattern corresponding to the losing result is performed. Then, a value corresponding to the fixed display time (1 sec) is set in the fixed display time counter for the second working port (second fixed display time counter) provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. The second fixed display time counter is updated (subtracted) each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  After setting the fixed display time, the second fixed display flag is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. The second confirmed display flag is erased when the value of the second confirmed display time counter becomes “0”.

  After the change end process is executed in step S2112, the process proceeds to step S2113. In step S2113, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is any one of the second normal gaming state, the fourth normal gaming state, and the fifth normal gaming state. If a negative determination is made in step S2113, the first ball entrance control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2113, the process proceeds to step S2114.

  In the present embodiment, in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604, in order to grasp the number of executions of the game times related to the first ball entering portion 63d in the second normal game state, the fourth normal game state, and the fifth normal game state. A game number counter is provided. In the game number counter update process in step S2114, the value of the game number counter is updated. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the value of the game number counter.

  In a succeeding step S2115, it is determined whether or not the game number counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S <b> 22115, the control process for the second incoming ball section is ended as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2115, the process proceeds to step S2116, and the variable display time table switching flag is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. The variable display time table is switched at the timing when the game round in which the variable display time table switching flag is set ends. Specifically, when the variation display time table that has been referred to is the second variation display time table, the third variation display time table is switched to, and the variation display time table that has been referred to is the fourth variation. In the case of the display time table or the fifth variation display time table, the display is switched to the first variation display time table.

  In a succeeding step S2117, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the fourth normal gaming state or the fifth normal gaming state. If a negative determination is made in step S2117, the control process for the second incoming ball section is ended as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2117, the process proceeds to step S2118, the high-frequency support mode flag stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604 is erased, and then the control process for the second pitching unit is terminated. .

  Returning to the description of step S2111, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2111, that is, if the second fixed display flag is stored in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604, the process proceeds to step S2119. In step S2119, it is determined whether or not the value of the second fixed display time counter is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S2119, the control process for the second incoming ball section is ended as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2119, the flag removal process is executed in step S2120, and then the second ball entry control process is terminated. In this flag erasing process, the second game in-game flag and the second confirmed display flag stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 are erased.

  Returning to the description of step S2107, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2107, that is, if it is time to stop and display the pattern corresponding to the jackpot result in the game times related to the first ball entry portion 63d, step S2121 Proceed to In step S2121, a stop pattern rewriting process is executed. In the renewal process of the stop result, the stop picture determined in the second pitching part variation start process is rewritten to a picture corresponding to the outlier result. Specifically, in the case where the game times related to the second pitching portion 63e is a result of losing, the stop pattern is stopped, whereas the game times related to the second pitching portion 63e is a winning result. In this case, the stop pattern is rewritten with a pattern corresponding to the result. Also, the second variation display time counter is reset.

  After executing the process of step S2121, after executing various processes related to the end of the game times in and after step S2111, the control process for the second pitched part is ended.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment will be described.

(Transition processing at the end of opening / closing execution mode)
In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the current special game state corresponds to the first winning mode. If the first winning mode is supported, an affirmative determination is made in step S2301 and the process proceeds to step S2302. In step S2302, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the advantageous ball portion 314 during the current special game state.

  In the present embodiment, a probability variation continuous number counter that stores the number of consecutive times per probability variation large is provided in various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604. The probability variation consecutive number counter is updated (added) every time the above-described advantageous ball hitting part 314 is entered as a probability variation jackpot result, and when the normal jackpot result is obtained or the number of consecutive times of the probability variation jackpot result is It is reset when the upper limit (7 times) is reached. In this transition process, it is determined whether or not the number of consecutive times of the probability variation big hit result has reached the upper limit (7 times) with reference to this probability variation consecutive number counter.

  Specifically, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2302, the process proceeds to step S2303, and the probability variation continuous number counter is updated. Specifically, “1” is added to the value of the probability variation consecutive number counter. After executing the update process of the continuous number counter, the process proceeds to step S2304, and it is determined whether or not the value of the certain variation continuous number counter has reached the upper limit. If the number of consecutive times has not reached the upper limit, a negative determination is made in step S2304, and the flow proceeds to step S2305. In step S2305, a high probability mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. When a special ball enters the advantageous ball portion 314 during the special game state and the number of consecutive successes per probability variation has not reached the upper limit, after the special game state ends, the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode is entered. Transition.

  In a succeeding step S2306, the variable display time table reference flag for the second variable display mode is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Although the details will be described later, by setting the second variable display mode variable display time table reference flag, the pattern variable display time in the first working port display section D1 is extended, and the second working port is displayed. The change display time of the pattern on the display unit D2 is shortened. Note that when the variable display time table reference flag for the second variable display mode is set, the other variable display time table reference flags are deleted.

  Returning to the description of step S2302, in the case of no entry into the advantageous entry unit 314 in the current special game state, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, the probability variation continuation counter is reset (set to 0). If an affirmative determination is made in step S2304, the continuous number counter is reset (set to 0) in step S2307. In step S2306, the variable display time table reference flag for the second variable display mode is set in the various flag storage area 635 of the RAM 604. Note that when the variable display time table reference flag for the second variable display mode is set, the other variable display time table reference flags are deleted.

  After setting the second normal gaming state variation display time table reference flag in step S2306, the process proceeds to step S2308. In step S2308, the above-described game number counter setting process is performed. In the present embodiment, the first operation port 62a and the second operation port 63a are shared as the game number counter, and in this setting process, a predetermined number (specifically “100”) is set in the game number counter. To do.

  After executing the setting process of step S2308, the process proceeds to step S2309. In step S2309, various special game state flags (for example, a winning mode flag, a big hit flag, etc.) stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 are erased, and the transition process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S2301, if a negative determination is made in step S2301, that is, if the current special game state corresponds to the second winning mode, the process proceeds to step S2310. In step S2310, it is determined whether or not the transition opportunity to the special game state this time is the second special hit result. If a negative determination is made in step S2310, the present migration process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2310, the process proceeds to step S2311.

  In step S2311, the variable display time table reference flag for the third variable display mode is set in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Although the details will be described later, by setting the third variable display mode variable display time table reference flag, the pattern variable display time in the first working port display section D1 is extended, and the second working port is displayed. The change display time of the pattern on the display unit D2 is shortened. When the variable display time table reference flag for the third variable display mode is set, the other variable display time table reference flags are deleted.

  Thereafter, in step S2309, various special game state flags (for example, a winning mode flag and a jackpot flag) stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604 are erased, and the transition process ends.

  Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 45, the relationship between each variation display mode and the set variation display time will be supplementarily described.

(1) First variation display mode The first variation display mode is a variation display mode corresponding to the first normal gaming state.

  When the game times related to the first pitching part 63d correspond to a detachment result (complete losing result) that does not correspond to reach display, stored hold information (holding information related to the first pitching part 63d) If the number of “0” or “1” is set, any one of “12 sec”, “13 sec”, and “14 sec” is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored hold information is “2”. For example, “7 sec”, “8 sec”, or “9 sec” is set as the variable display time. If the number of stored hold information is “3” or “4”, the variable display time is “3 sec”, Either “4 sec” or “5 sec” is set.

  When the game times related to the first pitching part 63d correspond to any one of the reach result corresponding to the reach display, the special hit result, or the big hit result, “15 sec” to “20 sec” is set as the variable display time. Is done.

  Regarding the variation display time of the second entrance display portion D2 in the first variation display mode, the game times related to the second entrance portion 63e may be out of reach display incompatible with reach display, out of support for reach display, special Regardless of the hit result or the big hit result, “600 sec” is set as the variable display time regardless of the number of stored hold information (hold information related to the second incoming ball portion 63e).

  In the first variable display mode, the fixed display time of the symbols on the display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the symbols on the symbol display device 75 are defined to be “1 sec”.

(Second variation display mode)
The second variation display mode is a variation display mode that shifts after the first special gaming state when the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result is reached, and corresponds to the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state. Yes.

  In the second variation display mode, although the variation display time related to the first incoming ball portion 63d and the variable display time related to the second incoming ball portion 63e are shorter than in the first fluctuation display mode, The relationship that the variable display time related to the ball portion 63d is shorter than the variable display time related to the second incoming ball portion 63e is maintained.

  When the game times related to the first pitching part 63d correspond to a detachment result (complete losing result) that does not correspond to reach display, stored hold information (holding information related to the first pitching part 63d) If the number of “0” is “0”, any one of “6 sec”, “7 sec”, and “8 sec” is set as the variable display time. If the number of stored hold information is “1”, the variable display Either “4 sec” or “5 sec” is set as the time, and if the number of stored hold information is “2”, either “1 sec” or “2 sec” is set as the variable display time and stored. If the number of held information being held is “3” or “4”, “0.5 sec” is set as the variable display time.

  When the game times related to the first pitching part 63d correspond to any one of the reach result corresponding to the reach display, the special hit result, or the big hit result, “15 sec” to “20 sec” is set as the variable display time. Is done.

  Regarding the variation display time of the second entrance display portion D2 in the second variation display mode, the game times related to the second entrance portion 63e may be out of reach display non-correspondence, out of reach reach support, special Regardless of the win result or the big win result, “60 sec” is set as the variable display time regardless of the number of stored hold information (hold information related to the second incoming ball 63e).

  In the second variable display mode, the fixed display time of the symbols on the display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the symbols on the symbol display device 75 are defined to be “1 sec”.

(Third variation display mode)
The third variation display mode corresponds to the third normal gaming state and the fifth normal gaming state that shift when the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state and the fourth normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number. It is a variable display mode.

  In the third variation display mode, the variation display time related to the first entrance 63d is longer than that in the first variation display mode and the second variation display mode, and the variation display time related to the second entrance 63e. Is shorter. As a result, the relationship between the variable display time for the first incoming ball portion 63d and the variable display time for the second incoming ball portion 63e is reversed, and the variable display time for the second incoming ball portion 63e is reversed. It is shorter than the variable display time for 63d.

  Regarding the variation display time of the first entrance display portion D1 in the third variation display mode, the game times related to the first entrance portion 63d are out of reach display non-correspondence, out of reach reach support, special Regardless of the winning result or the big hit result, “60 sec” is set as the variable display time regardless of the number of stored holding information (holding information related to the first incoming ball portion 63d).

  In the case where the game times related to the second incoming ball portion 63e correspond to a result of non-reach non-correspondence (completely off result), stored hold information (holding information related to the second incoming ball portion 63e) If the number of “0” is “0”, any one of “6 sec”, “7 sec”, and “8 sec” is set as the variable display time. If the number of stored hold information is “1”, the variable display Either “4 sec” or “5 sec” is set as the time, and if the number of stored hold information is “2”, either “1 sec” or “2 sec” is set as the variable display time and stored. If the number of held information being held is “3” or “4”, “0.5 sec” is set as the variable display time.

  When the game times related to the second pitching section 63e correspond to any of the reach result corresponding to the reach display, the special hit result, or the jackpot result, “15 sec” to “20 sec” is set as the variable display time. Is done.

  In the third variable display mode, the fixed display time of the symbols on the display units D1 and D2 and the fixed display time of the symbols on the symbol display device 75 are defined to be “1 sec”.

  Next, a basic game flow will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a block diagram showing the flow of the game.

(Game flow)
In the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, the low frequency support mode, and the first variation display mode, the lower operation entrance portion 62 is provided from the right route where the right operation entrance portion 63 is provided. It is advantageous for the player to launch a game ball aiming at the left route.

  Specifically, in the first normal gaming state, the support mode of the electric accessory 71 attached to the lower operation ball entry portion 62 is the low-frequency support mode, so even if a game ball is launched to the right route, When the game ball is fired to the left route with almost no ball entering the side ball entry unit 62, the probability of the ball entering the right side ball entry unit 63 is the game ball shot to the left route. In such a case, the probability is lower than the probability of entering the lower operation entrance portion 62. In other words, although it is possible to advance the game by firing the game ball to the right route in the first normal gaming state, the investment increases and the profit that can be expected for the investment is to launch the game ball to the left route. Smaller than the case.

  When various jackpot results are obtained in the first normal gaming state, the state shifts to the first special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode). In the first special game state, the opening time of the advantageous pitching portion 314 is determined according to the type of the jackpot result. If a ball enters the advantageous ball portion 314 during the first special game state, the second normal game corresponding to the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the second variable display mode after the first special game state ends. Transition to the state.

  An upper limit (100 times) is set for the number of games that are continued in the second normal gaming state, and the total number of game times related to the first and second balls 63d and 63e is 100 times. The second normal gaming state will continue until it reaches or until a big hit result is obtained in the second normal gaming state.

  Here, when the upper limit is reached without a jackpot result in the second normal gaming state, the state shifts to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the third variation display mode. In other words, for the third normal gaming state, for the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode, the mode in the second normal gaming state is taken over, while the variable display mode is switched from the second variable display mode to the third variable display mode. ing.

  As already described, in the second variation display mode, the variation display time of the pattern on the first entrance display D1 is shorter than the variation display time of the pattern on the second entry display D2. The game progresses mainly through the game times related to the first entrance part 63d. On the other hand, in the third variation display mode, the variation display time of the pattern in the second entrance display unit D2 is shorter than the variation display time of the design in the first entrance display D1. The game progresses mainly through the game times related to the second incoming portion 63e.

  The second normal game state and the third normal game state correspond to the high-frequency support mode, and most of the game balls fired on the right route enter the right operation entrance portion 63 (right operation port 63a). . The game balls that have entered the right operation port 63a are alternately distributed to the first and second incoming parts 63d and 63e. That is, the entrance ratio to the first entrance part 63d and the second entrance part 63e is 1: 1.

  As described above, the ratio that results in a probable big hit result in the lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance portion 63d is 50%, and the probability changes in the lottery based on the entrance to the second entrance portion 63e. The percentage resulting in jackpots is 65%. That is, when the two ball entering parts 63d and 63e are compared, a difference is provided so that the second ball entering part 63e is more advantageous to the player than the first ball entering part 63d.

  In the second variation display mode, the game progresses mainly in the game times related to the first ball entering portion 63d, and therefore, the ratio of the probability variation big hit result is slightly over 50%. On the other hand, in the third variation display mode, the game progresses mainly in the game times related to the second incoming ball portion 63e, and therefore the ratio of the probability variation big hit result is substantially less than 65%. In other words, the third normal gaming state corresponding to the third variation display mode is preferentially given a higher ratio of the probability variation jackpot result than the second normal gaming state corresponding to the second variation display mode.

  Since the second normal gaming state corresponds to the high-frequency support mode, the decrease in the number of possession balls is reduced as compared with the first normal gaming state. The reduction of will be conspicuous. Concern that the next big hit will not occur despite the transition to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode as a probabilistic big hit result, which will cause the player's motivation to decline. Is done.

  In this regard, the number of games executed without a jackpot result in the second normal gaming state (the total number of games of the number of games related to the first pitching part 63d and the number of games related to the second pitching part 63e) is as described above. When the upper limit is reached, the second normal gaming state also shifts to the third normal gaming state with a high probability of resulting in a probabilistic jackpot result, thereby increasing the expectation that the probable jackpot result will continue. . According to such a relief function, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, the transition opportunity different from the said upper limit is provided as a transition opportunity from a 2nd normal gaming state to a 3rd normal gaming state. Specifically, there may be a special winning result in the game times related to the first pitching part 63d, and a part of this special winning result (specifically, the second special winning result) is transferred to the third normal gaming state. It has become an opportunity for transition. The special winning result or the second special gaming state that shifts based on the special winning result has a configuration that does not contribute to switching between the winning / failing lottery mode and the support mode. Here, the first special hit result or the second special game state that shifts based on the first special hit result is configured not to contribute to the switching of the variable display mode, whereas the second special hit result And the 2nd special game state which transfers based on the said 2nd special hit result is the structure which contributes to switching of a variable display mode. Specifically, when the second special winning result is obtained in the second normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state, the variable display mode becomes the third variable display mode after the second special gaming state is finished. More specifically, when the second special hit result is obtained during the second normal gaming state, the variable display mode is switched to the third variable display mode. In other words, when a game is progressing toward the above upper limit, the game may suddenly shift to the third normal game state in the middle.

  As described above, it is possible to increase the tension in the second normal gaming state by diversifying the transition opportunity to the third normal gaming state and making it possible to shift to the third normal gaming state before reaching the upper limit. It has become.

  As detailed above, the transition from the second normal gaming state (second variation display mode) to the third normal gaming state (third variation display mode) is triggered by reaching the upper limit or the second special hit result. However, in the latter case of these two opportunities, the second entrance display unit is displayed at the timing when the pattern corresponding to the second special hit result is fixedly displayed on the first entrance display D1. The pattern corresponding to the result of the detachment is confirmed and displayed in D2, and after the second special gaming state is finished, the variation display of the pattern on each display unit D1, D2 is started in a mode corresponding to the third variation display mode. That is, after the transition to the third variation display mode, a substantial time lag does not occur until the game with the game play relating to the second entering portion 63e as the main starts in the third variation display mode.

  On the other hand, in the case of the former of the above two triggers, even if the pattern is confirmed and displayed on the first ball portion display unit D1, the variation display of the pattern on the second ball portion display unit D2 is displayed. Will continue. For this reason, even if it shifts to the 3rd change display mode, the change display time of the picture in display part D2 for the 2nd entrance part is not shortened immediately, and the influence of the 2nd change display mode may remain. In other words, a certain amount of time lag may occur before the game that is mainly based on the game times related to the second ball entering portion 63e is started in the third variation display mode. This time lag depends on the pattern variation display time (60 sec in the present embodiment) on the second entrance display unit D2 set in the second variation display mode.

  If the game in the third normal game state is not started immediately despite the transition to the third normal game state (third variation display mode), it is preferable because it causes discomfort to the player. Absent. One of the features of the present embodiment is that a contrivance is made to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. Hereinafter, the device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 is a timing chart illustrating an example of a game flow when the second normal gaming state is shifted to the third normal gaming state when the upper limit is reached.

  At the timing of tc1, the state shifts from the first special game state corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result to the second normal game state. Correspondingly, a message indicating that the player is more advantageous than the first normal gaming state on the upper part of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, more specifically, a message indicating that the player is in the second normal gaming state. Is displayed as “CHANCE” (see FIG. 41A). Further, an image imitating “underwater” is displayed on the display screen 75a as a background image, and a blue effect is added to the outer edge portion of the display screen 75a. Further, a counter indicating the number of remaining games in which the second normal gaming state is continued is displayed at the corner of the display screen 75a. Thereafter, the counter is subtracted in accordance with the game times.

  In the second normal game state, the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the first ball entering portion 63d, and at the timing of tc2, the number of games executed without a big hit result in the second normal game state is the upper limit (100 Times). At the timing of tc2, although the fixed display of the pattern corresponding to the result of disengagement is completed in the first display part D1 for first entrance and the mode is switched to the third variation display mode, in the display part D2 for the second entrance part The change display of the pattern continues. In other words, at the timing of tc2, the display of the variation of the pattern is started on the display unit D1 for the first entry portion, while the display of the variation of the pattern on the display portion D2 for the second entry portion is the second normal gaming state (the first 2 variation display mode) to the third normal gaming state (third variation display mode).

  On the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, the promotion suggestion effect that suggests the transition (promotion) to the third normal gaming state is started at the timing of tc2. In this promotion suggestion effect, the message displayed at the top of the display screen 75a is changed from “CHANCE” to “STANDBY” and a moving image corresponding to the promotion is displayed in the center of the display screen 75a.

  About this promotion suggestion effect, it continues until the timing of tc3 when the fixed display of the pattern is started on the display unit D2 for the second incoming ball part. Note that the timing at which the number of games reaches the upper limit varies. Therefore, at the timing tc2 when the final display of the pattern is completed on the first ball display unit D1, the remaining fluctuation display time on the second ball display unit D2 is specified, and the promotion is performed according to the specification result. By determining the execution time of the suggestion effect, an excess or deficiency in the execution time of the promotion suggestion effect is avoided.

  At the timing of tc3, in accordance with the start of the definitive display of the second entrance display unit D2, the promotion display is started on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. Specifically, the message displayed on the upper part of the display screen 75a is alternately switched between “STANDBY” and “BIG CHANCE” indicating that it is in the third normal gaming state. At the same time, the effect displayed on the outer edge portion of the display screen 75a is alternately switched between blue and red.

  At the timing of tc4 when the final display of the pattern is finished on the second entrance display unit D2, the message displayed at the top of the display screen 75a is changed to “BIG CHANCE”, and in conjunction with this, the display screen 75a The effect displayed on the outer edge of is changed to red. Then, the counter displayed at the corner of the display screen 75a displays “∞” instead of a number.

  In this way, by using the remaining time of the second entrance display unit D2 and executing the promotion suggesting effect or the like, it is possible to obtain a sense of expectation for the transition to the third normal gaming state. This is preferable in order to make it difficult to give the player an impression as if he / she is also in the transition to the gaming state.

  Incidentally, at the time of transition to the third normal gaming state, the final display end timing of the pattern on the first entrance display D1 coincides with the final display end timing of the design on the second entrance display D2. In this case, the time for executing the above-described promotion suggesting effect cannot be secured. In such a case, the promotion display is executed while skipping the promotion suggestion effect.

  Returning to the description of the first special game state in FIG. 46, if no entry into the advantageous entry ball unit 314 occurs during the first special game state, the low probability mode after the end of the first special game state. , Transition to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode and the second variation display mode.

  As in the third normal gaming state, an upper limit (100 times) is set for the number of games that are continued in the fourth normal gaming state, and the number of games that are related to the first and second pitching parts 63d and 63e is set. The fourth normal gaming state will continue until the total number of gaming times reaches the upper limit of 100, or until a big hit result is obtained in the fourth normal gaming state.

  Here, when the above upper limit is reached without a jackpot result in the fourth normal gaming state, a transition is made to the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, the low frequency support mode, and the first variation display mode. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned second special hit result is obtained during the fourth normal gaming state, the variable display mode is switched to the third variable display mode through the second special gaming state. Thereafter, the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the second entering portion 63e until the total number of games in the fourth normal game state and the fifth normal game state reaches the upper limit. That is, when the jackpot result is obtained, the ratio of the probability variation jackpot result is increased.

  As described in detail above, the transition from the fourth normal gaming state (second variation display mode) to the fifth normal gaming state (third variation display mode) is triggered by the second special hit result. The trigger is that the pattern corresponding to the result of detachment is confirmed on the second entrance display portion D2 at the timing when the design corresponding to the second special hit result is confirmed and displayed on the first entrance portion display portion D1. After the second special gaming state is displayed, the pattern variation display on each of the display units D1, D2 is started in a mode corresponding to the third variation display mode. That is, after the transition to the third variation display mode, a substantial time lag does not occur until the game with the game play relating to the second entering portion 63e as the main starts in the third variation display mode.

  In contrast, the transition from the fourth normal gaming state (second variation display mode) to the first normal gaming state (first variation display mode) is triggered by reaching the upper limit. At this opportunity, even if the pattern is fixedly displayed on the first entrance display unit D1, the display of the variation of the design on the second entrance display unit D2 is continued. For this reason, even if it shifts to the 1st change display mode, the change display time of the picture in display part D2 for the 2nd entrance part is not extended immediately, and the influence of the 2nd change display mode may remain. However, in both the first variation display mode and the second variation display mode, the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the first entering portion 63d. The smooth progress is not hindered.

  The transition from the fifth normal gaming state (third variation display mode) to the first normal gaming state (first variation display mode) is also triggered by reaching the upper limit. In the third variation display mode, the game times related to the second ball entering portion 63e are the main game, and in the first variable display mode, the game times related to the first ball input portion 62d are the main games. Progresses. That is, in these two variation display modes, the main entrance part is different in the progress of the game. For this reason, in the same way as the transition from the second normal gaming state (second variation display mode) to the third normal gaming state (third variation display mode) described above, the first pitching unit in the first variation display mode. A certain amount of time lag may occur before a game whose main game is related to 63d is started. This time lag depends on the pattern variation display time (60 sec in the present embodiment) on the first incoming ball display unit D1 set in the third variation display mode.

  If the game in the first normal game state is not started immediately despite the transition to the first normal game state (first variation display mode), it is preferable because it causes discomfort to the player. Absent. One of the features of the present embodiment is that a contrivance is made to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. Since the device is the same as the device used when shifting from the second normal game state to the third normal game state, an outline thereof will be described.

  When shifting from the first special game state corresponding to the normal jackpot result to the fourth normal game state, the upper part of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 suggests that the player is more advantageous than the first normal game state. The message “CHANCE” is displayed as a message, specifically, a message indicating the fourth normal gaming state (see FIG. 41A). An image imitating “the beach” is displayed on the display screen 75a as a background image, and a blue effect is added to the outer edge portion of the display screen 75a. Further, a counter indicating the number of remaining games in which the second normal gaming state is continued is displayed at the corner of the display screen 75a. Thereafter, the counter is subtracted in accordance with the game times.

  In the fourth normal game state, the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the first pitching portion 63d, and the second special hit result is obtained at the game times, so that the low probability mode, the high frequency support mode, the third Transition to the fifth normal gaming state corresponding to the variable display mode. As already described, in the fifth normal game state, the game progresses mainly in the game times related to the second incoming ball portion 63e. It should be noted that the counter value displayed on the display screen 75a is also subtracted in the fifth normal gaming state in the same manner as the fourth normal gaming state as the game times are consumed.

  After that, when the total number of games in the fourth normal gaming state and the fifth normal gaming state reaches the upper limit, the transition to the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, the low frequency support mode, and the first variable display mode is made. To do. Here, at the timing when the number of games reaches the upper limit (100 times) in the game times related to the second ball entry portion 63e, the final display of the pattern corresponding to the disengagement result is displayed on the first ball portion display portion D1. Although it is completed and switched to the first variation display mode, the variation display of the pattern may continue on the first display unit D1 for the incoming ball portion. That is, the display of the variation of the pattern is started in the second entrance display unit D2, while the variation display of the design in the first entrance display D1 is the fifth normal gaming state (the third variation display mode). ) To the first normal gaming state (first variation display mode).

  On the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, a demotion suggestion effect that suggests a transition (demotion) to the first normal gaming state is started at the timing when the final display of the pattern on the second entrance display unit D2 is completed. Is done. In this demotion suggestion effect, the message displayed at the top of the display screen 75a is changed from “BIG CHANCE” to “CAUTION” and a moving image corresponding to the demotion is displayed in the center of the display screen 75a.

  This demotion suggestion effect is continued until the timing at which the fixed display of the pattern is started on the first entrance display unit D1. Note that the timing at which the number of games reaches the upper limit varies. Therefore, the remaining change display time in the first ball display unit D1 is specified at the timing when the final display of the pattern is completed in the second ball display unit D2, and the demotion suggestion effect according to the specification result. By determining the execution time of, it is avoided that an excess or deficiency occurs in the execution time of the demotion suggestion effect.

  The demoted display is started on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 in synchronism with the timing at which the final display of the first entrance display D1 is started. Specifically, the message displayed on the upper part of the display screen 75a and the effect displayed on the outer edge portion of the display screen 75a blink.

  At the timing when the fixed display of the pattern is finished on the first entrance display unit D1, the message displayed at the top of the display screen 75a, the effect displayed on the outer edge of the display screen 75a, and the display screen 75a. The counter displayed at the corner of the screen is not displayed, and it is clearly indicated that the state has shifted to the first normal gaming state.

  Incidentally, at the time of transition to the first normal gaming state, the final display end timing of the pattern on the second entrance display D2 matches the final display end timing of the design on the first entrance display D1. In this case, the time for executing the above-described demoting suggestion effect cannot be secured. In such a case, the demotion display is executed while skipping the demotion suggestion effect.

  According to the second embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

  In the present embodiment, the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state are provided as the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode. In the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state, for example, the low probability mode is supported. Compared to the first normal gaming state, the probability of a jackpot result is tripled. Here, in the second normal gaming state, the display variation time of the pattern on the first entrance display unit D1 is shorter than the display variation display time of the design on the second entrance display D2. The main target of progression is the game times related to the first entrance display unit D1. On the other hand, in the third normal gaming state, the variation display time of the pattern on the second entrance display unit D2 is shorter than the variation display time of the pattern on the first entrance display D1. The main target of the game progress is the game times related to the second entrance display unit D2. That is, when transitioning from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, the main game times change although the high probability mode is inherited. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the monotonization of the game in the high probability mode and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

  When comparing the first and second balls 63d and 63e, the second ball 63a is favored with respect to the distribution probability that results in a probable big hit. For this reason, by shifting from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state, the main target of the game progress is the game turn related to the first entrance portion 63d that is relatively disadvantageous to the player → relatively advantageous. The game moves to the second pitching part 63e. In this way, if the player's advantage is further changed (increased) even in the high probability mode, the game progresses without a big hit result despite the transition to the high probability mode. Even in this case, the player's expectation can be directed to the transition to the fourth normal gaming state. By having such a relief function, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation when staying in the high probability mode for a long time.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of games in the second normal gaming state (the total number of games related to the first ball entering part 63d and the number of games related to the second ball entering part 63e) reaches the upper limit, It will shift to the normal gaming state. Here, there is a possibility that a certain amount of deviation may occur in the frequency at which the game balls flowing down the game area PE enter the right operation entrance portion 63. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the total number of games related to both the ball entering parts 63d and 63e reaches the upper limit, the fourth normal game is configured to shift to the third normal game state. It can suppress that the transition function to a state is not exhibited well.

  As described above, the game balls that have flowed into the right working ball entering portion 63 are alternately distributed to the first ball entering portion 63d and the second ball entering portion 63e. With such a configuration, the chances that only the game times related to one of the ball-in-progress parts progress independently are reduced, and the game times related to the first ball-in part 63d and the game times related to the second ball-in part 63e are linked. Thus, diversification of the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode can be suitably realized.

  The configuration in which game balls that have flowed into the right-hand actuated entrance portion 63 are distributed alternately (in a predetermined order) to the first entrance portion 63d / the second entrance portion 63e is a game ball when viewed from one entrance portion. It will be a hindrance in securing the number of balls entered. This is not preferable in realizing diversification of games by utilizing the simultaneous progress of game times. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, in the second normal skill state and the third normal game state, the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode for the electric accessory 71 attached to the right-hand actuating ball entering portion 63. By adopting a configuration that compensates for the shortage of numbers, the above problems can be solved preferably.

  When the second special winning result is obtained in the second normal gaming state, the state shifts to the third normal gaming state before reaching the upper limit of the number of games. In this way, by diversifying the transition timing to the third normal gaming state, the upper limit can be increased, for example, by increasing the upper limit to some extent, and diversification of the game can be suitably realized.

  In the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, the game progresses with the game times related to the first ball entering portion 63d as the center. Here, when the second special hit result is obtained during the fourth normal gaming state, a transition is made to the fifth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. The fifth normal gaming state is continued until the high-frequency support mode ends and the state shifts to the first normal gaming state. In the fifth normal game state, the game proceeds centering on the game times related to the second pitching portion 63e. For this reason, when a jackpot result is obtained in the fifth normal gaming state, expectation for the probability variation jackpot result is increased. In this way, while maintaining the same ball change and jackpot probabilities, etc., by diversifying the normal gaming state (so-called short-time gaming state) compatible with the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, Can contribute to the improvement.

<Modification 1>
In the second embodiment, the third normal game state is obtained by increasing the distribution probability that results in a probabilistic jackpot result in the third normal game state, compared to the distribution probability that results in a probable big jackpot result in the second normal game state. Although the superiority of the gaming state is ensured, it is sufficient if the third normal gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state, and the specific configuration thereof is arbitrary. For example, the superiority of the third normal gaming state is ensured by adopting a configuration in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired when the third normal gaming state results in a jackpot result is larger than that of the second normal gaming state. Is also possible. In addition, as a relief measure when a game progresses without a jackpot result in the second normal gaming state, all of them become a probable jackpot result when the jackpot result is in the third normal gaming state. It may be configured.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment, when the number of games executed in the second normal gaming state reaches the upper limit “100 times”, the third normal gaming state is shifted to the fourth normal gaming state. Although the conditions are set by adopting a configuration that shifts to the first normal gaming state when the number of games executed in (1) reaches the upper limit “100 times”, it is not limited to this. The upper limit related to the second normal gaming state may be different from the upper limit related to the fourth normal gaming state. For example, the upper limit related to the second normal gaming state may be made larger or smaller than the upper limit related to the fourth normal gaming state.

<Modification 3>
In the second embodiment, when the sum of the number of games related to the first pitching part 63d and the number of games related to the second pitching part 63e reaches the upper limit “100 times”, the gaming state is changed to the first game state. Although it was set as the structure which transfers to 2nd normal game state from 3rd normal game state, it is not limited to this. For example, the game state may be shifted from the second normal game state to the third normal game state when the number of game times related to the first ball input unit 63d reaches the first upper limit. A configuration may be adopted in which the gaming state is shifted from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state when the gaming times related to 63e reach the second upper limit.

  Further, when the upper limit for the first incoming ball portion 63d and the upper limit for the second incoming ball portion 63e are used together, the gaming state is changed from the second normal gaming state when the upper limit for the first incoming ball portion 63d is reached. The game state is changed to the predetermined normal game state A when the upper limit for the second ball entry portion 63e is reached by switching to the predetermined normal game state A that is more advantageous to the player (by switching the variable display time table to be referenced). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the state is shifted to the predetermined normal gaming state B (switching of the variable display time table to be referenced).

<Modification 4>
In the second embodiment, the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state in a situation where the support mode by the electric accessory 71 is the high-frequency support mode. However, it is optional whether or not to enter the high-frequency support mode as a premise for generating these transitions.

<Modification 5>
In the second embodiment, the configuration in which the game balls are alternately distributed to the first ball entering portion 63d and the second ball entering portion 63e is illustrated, but the order of the game ball distribution is arbitrary. It is also possible to generate a bias such that the number of balls entering either one is greater than the number of balls entering the other.

<Third Embodiment>
In the second embodiment described above, after the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the second normal gaming state, the third normal gaming state is performed until the next jackpot result is obtained. The gaming state is continued and the transition to the second normal gaming state is avoided. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, after the transition to the third normal gaming state, the second embodiment is configured in such a manner that the transition to the second normal gaming state is possible before the next jackpot result. The form and configuration are different. Hereinafter, a specific configuration for realizing such state transition will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48A is a schematic diagram showing a low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the second entrance portion 63e stored in the success / failure table storage area 621 of the ROM 603, and FIG. 48B is a success / failure table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. It is the schematic which shows the high probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the 2nd entrance part 63e memorize | stored in FIG.

  As already described, in the third normal gaming state, the game progresses mainly with the game times related to the second incoming ball portion 63e. As shown in FIG. 48, in the winning or failing lottery based on the entry to the second entering portion 63e, the third special winning result can be won as the special winning result in addition to the first special winning result. Yes. As for the third special hit result, it is an opportunity to switch the referenced variable display time table from the third variable display time table to the second variable display time table, and the end of the second special game state corresponding to the third special hit result Sometimes the variable display mode is switched from the third variable display mode to the second variable display mode. Thus, even after the promotion to the third normal gaming state, by adopting a configuration that can be demoted to the second normal gaming state, it is possible to suitably increase the sense of game tension in the third normal gaming state.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, the third normal gaming state is shifted to the second normal gaming state. However, instead of or in addition to this, the fourth normal gaming state is changed to the fifth normal gaming state. After the transition, it is also possible to adopt a configuration that allows the transition to the fourth normal gaming state before the number of games reaches the upper limit. Specifically, when the third special winning result is won during the fifth normal gaming state, the variable display time table may be switched from the third variable display time table to the second variable display time table. It is.

<Modification 2>
In the third embodiment, the probability of transitioning (degrading) from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state as a special winning result is the special winning result and the third normal gaming state from the second normal gaming state. Although it is lower than the probability of transition (promotion) to the gaming state, it is not limited to this. For example, the probability of transitioning from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state (demotion) as a special winning result is the transition from the second normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state (promotion) as a special winning result. May be higher than the probability of winning, or the probability of transitioning from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state (demotion) and the special winning result resulting in the third from the second normal gaming state. The probability of shifting (promoting) to the normal gaming state may be the same.

<Modification 3>
In the third embodiment, when the player is in the third normal gaming state, the probability of transitioning (degrading) to the second normal gaming state as a special hit result is lower than the probability of a jackpot result. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When in the third normal gaming state, the probability of becoming a special hit result and shifting (degrading) to the second normal gaming state may be higher than the probability of being a jackpot result, or the third normal game In the state, the probability of becoming a special hit result and shifting (degrading) to the second normal gaming state may be the same as the probability of being a jackpot result.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the third embodiment, the third special game result is obtained in the winning lottery based on the entry to the second entry unit 63e, and the third normal game state is shifted to the second normal game state. However, in the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the transition from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state is different from the third embodiment.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the third special table is included in the success / failure table corresponding to the second entry portion 63e stored in the success / failure table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. No hit result is provided. Instead, the third special hit result is added to the success / failure table corresponding to the first entrance portion 63d stored in the success / failure table storage area 621 of the ROM 603. That is, the configuration in which the variable display mode is switched from the third variable display mode to the second variable display mode through the second special gaming state when the third special hit result is obtained based on the ball entering the first ball portion 63d. It has become.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the proportion resulting in a probable big hit result by the allocation lottery based on the entrance to the first entrance portion 63d is 50%, and the allocation is based on the entrance to the second entrance portion 63e. The percentage that results in a promising big hit by lottery is 100%. In other words, when a game ball is being fired to the right route in the second normal game state, a probability variation jackpot result is obtained with a probability of more than 50%, and a game ball is being fired to the right route in the third normal game state. In some cases, the probability variation jackpot result is obtained with a probability of less than 100%.

  The third normal gaming state is a gaming state in which expectation for a so-called villa is increased because a promising jackpot result is ensured as long as a jackpot result is obtained in the winning lottery relating to the second pitching portion 63e. However, when the game times related to the first pitching portion 63d are entered and demoted to the second normal game state, the probability of a probable big hit result decreases to more than 50%. It is assumed that the game is played in the hope that the state will continue.

  Here, the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143 grasps the time during which the variable display of the pattern is executed in the first entrance display unit D1, and from this grasped time, the third normal game It is possible to specify a time zone in which the possibility of demotion from the state is “0” (hereinafter referred to as “avoidance section”). In the notification / production control device 143, as part of the control processing, the symbol display device 75 and the speaker unit 29 perform processing for notifying that it is a time zone in which demotion is avoided. Specifically, as shown in the timing chart of FIG. 49, the color of the effect displayed on the outer edge of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is changed from “red” to “gold”, and the speaker unit 29 BGM corresponding to the time zone where demotion is avoided is output. A girl character image is displayed so as to overlap the variable display area of the display screen 75a (specifically, behind the symbol), and a timer indicating the remaining time in the avoidance section is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 75a. A counter is displayed.

  With regard to the notification (demotion avoidance notification) indicating the avoidance of demotion, the design is displayed on the second display unit D2 before the design is displayed on the first display unit D1. From the timing at which the pattern can be determined, specifically the timing at which the design is fixedly displayed on the first entrance display D1, the minimum variation display time (0.5 sec) of the design on the second entrance display D2 It is executed in the section excluding. Then, when the section ends, the effect color is changed from “gold” to “red”, the BGM from the speaker unit 29 is changed to a BGM corresponding to outside the avoidance section, and the girl character image is not displayed. Thus, instead of the timer counter, a character “CAUTION” is displayed as a message indicating that there is a possibility of demotion.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the transition from the third normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state can be performed, the player's tension can be maintained, but such a feeling of tension continues excessively. There is a concern that it will be a factor to fatigue. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the above concerns can be eliminated by adopting a configuration in which at least a time zone during which the transition to the second normal gaming state is avoided is notified.

<Modification 1>
In the fourth embodiment, the shortest variation display time (0.5 sec) of the pattern on the second ball display unit D2 from the time until the image is fixedly displayed on the first ball display unit D1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. About the change display time of the pattern in the display part D2 for 2nd entrance parts, it differs in length according to the number of reservations concerning the 2nd entrance part 63e. In consideration of such circumstances, the longest variation display time (for example, 8 sec) of the pattern on the second ball display unit D2 from the time until the image is fixedly displayed on the first ball display unit D1. It is good also as a structure which performs demotion avoidance alert | reporting in the time which remove | divided. When the demotion avoidance notification is performed based on the longest variation display time, the actual variation display time in the second entrance display unit D2 may be shorter than that. In such a case, after the estimated time has elapsed, the timer counter display is set to “?????? sec” and the display is continued until the actual remaining time interrupts the above-described minimum fluctuation display time. What is necessary is just to be the structure to do.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the second to fourth embodiments, the second variable display mode is switched to the third variable display mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured to switch to the third variation display mode regardless of the variation display mode in which the user is staying. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 49, a specific configuration for realizing the behavior shown in the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the second to fourth embodiments. FIG. 50A is a schematic diagram showing an allocation table for the first incoming ball portion 63 d stored in the allocation table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, and FIG. 50B is an allocation table storage area 622 of the ROM 603. FIG. 50C is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the jackpot result and the transfer destination, and FIG. 50C is a schematic diagram showing a stored allocation table for the second incoming ball portion 63e.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (a), the distribution table for the first incoming ball portion 63d is provided with a distribution of the 6R normal jackpot result, the 6R probability variation jackpot result A, the 6R probability variation jackpot result B, and the 16R probability variation jackpot result. Yes. Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the sorting table for the second incoming ball portion 63e is provided with sorting of the 16R normal jackpot result, the 6R probability variation jackpot result B, and the 16R probability variation jackpot result.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (c), the 6R normal jackpot result is that the normal game state that transitions after the first special game state ends is the fourth normal game corresponding to the low probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the second variable display mode. It is a jackpot result that becomes a state. The 16R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the normal gaming state that transitions after the end of the first special gaming state becomes the fifth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the third variation display mode. In other words, in some cases where the normal jackpot result is obtained, the game starts from the fifth normal gaming state. In the fourth normal gaming state and the fifth normal gaming state, although the probability of being a jackpot result and the support mode itself by the electric accessory 71 are not changed, there is a difference in the allocation probability that is a probable jackpot result. Therefore, it is an opportunity to acquire many balls by suddenly shifting to the fifth normal game state without going through the fourth normal game state.

  The 6R probability variable jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the normal gaming state that shifts after the first special gaming state is the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the second variable display mode. The 6R probability variation jackpot result B and the 16R probability variation jackpot result are jackpots in which the normal gaming state that transitions after the completion of the first special gaming state becomes the third ordinary gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, and the third variation display mode. It is a result. In other words, in some cases where the probable big hit result is obtained, the game is started from the third normal gaming state. Although the probability of the jackpot result itself does not change, there is a difference in the distribution probability of the probability variation jackpot result. Therefore, it is an opportunity to acquire many balls by suddenly shifting to the third normal gaming state without going through the second normal gaming state.

  By stepping up from the first normal gaming state → the second normal gaming state → the third normal gaming state, or by stepping up to the first normal gaming state → the fourth normal gaming state → the fifth normal gaming state, In the configuration in which the degree of advantage increases, monotonization of the game can be suppressed by diversifying the game state. However, increasing the number of steps until the most advantageous state (the third normal gaming state or the fifth normal gaming state) in each route gives an impression that the hurdle is high, and the player's willingness to play There is concern that it will hinder the increase. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by adopting a configuration in which a step in the middle can be skipped and the state can be directly shifted to the most advantageous state.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, one of the features is that a device for suppressing monotonization of the game in the first special game state is made. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, with reference to FIG. 51, the structure of the game board 60 in this Embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 51 is a front view of the game board 60.

(Game board 60)
In each opening formed in the game board 60, a general winning opening 61, operating ball entering portions 62 and 63, variable winning devices 64 and 65, a through gate 66, a variable display unit 67, and the like are arranged. When the entrance to the entrance such as the general prize opening 61, the action entrances 62, 63, and the variable prize-winning devices 64, 65 occurs, it is detected by the detection sensor, and a predetermined number of prizes are determined based on the detection result. Benefits such as ball payout are given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the general winning ports 61 are arranged on the left route and the right route, respectively. Among these general winning awards 61, a general winning award 61 (hereinafter referred to as a right general winning award 61R) arranged on the right route is between the through gate 66 and the upper variable award winning device 64, more specifically, the upper variable award winning device 64. Located in the vicinity. Specifically, since the right general winning opening 61R is located on the flow path toward the upper variable winning device 64, a part of the game balls launched toward the upper variable winning device 64 wins the right general winning port 61R. Is configured to do.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, during the first special gaming state, the player is prompted to launch a game ball aiming at the upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning port 61R, and the upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning port. One of the features is that a predetermined display effect is performed based on winning in 61R. The fact that the upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning opening 61R are arranged on the side of the symbol display device 75 (display screen 75a) is when viewing the display screen 75a, the upper variable winning device 64, and the right general winning port 61R. This is a device for reducing the amount of movement of the line of sight.

  In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 3) having different probabilities of being a jackpot result in the winning / losing lottery based on the balls entering the operation balls 62 and 63 are provided. The hall manager is allowed to change these setting values. Specifically, the setting value can be changed by inserting the setting change key into the setting key switch provided in the main controller 162, placing the setting change key at the ON position, and operating the setting change switch.

  Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the above-described set values. The value of the random number for winning the big hit is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 621 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 603. As the success / failure table, the first implementation described above is that a success / failure table for low probability mode (low / probability success / failure information group) and a high / probability mode success / failure table (high probability / prohibition success / failure information group) are set. It is the same as the form.

  A low probability mode success / failure table and a high probability mode success / failure table are provided for each set value. In particular, for the low probability mode success / failure table, there is a difference in jackpot probability depending on the set value (FIG. 53). Specifically, when the success / failure table for low probability mode corresponding to setting 1 is referred to, the jackpot probability is 1/260, and when the success / failure table for low probability mode corresponding to setting 2 is referred to, it is a jackpot probability When the probability is 1/280 and the success / failure table for the low probability mode corresponding to setting 3 is referred to, the jackpot probability is 1/300. In this way, the difference is set so as to be advantageous to the player in the order of setting 3 <setting 2 <setting 1, and the player who wants to advance the game as much as possible is expected to be setting 1. It is assumed that

  In addition, when the success / failure table for the high probability mode is referred to, the jackpot probability is common at 1/30 in the settings 1 to 3, and the success / failure table for the low probability mode is referred to. In other words, there is no difference between setting 1 and setting 3. Incidentally, it is possible to match the advantage-disadvantage relationship in the high probability mode with the advantage-disadvantage relationship in the low probability mode. That is, it is possible to set the jackpot probability to be higher in the order of setting 3 <setting 2 <setting 1.

  In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot results: 16R normal jackpot result, 16R probability variation jackpot result A, and 16R probability variation jackpot result B. The distribution probability of these jackpot results is set 1 to setting. 3 is common.

  Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 52, a supplementary description will be given of an electrical configuration for performing display control of the symbol display device 75. FIG.

(Electric configuration according to notification / production control device 143 and display control device 710)
An MPU 652 is mounted on a notification / production control board 651 provided in the notification / production control device 143. The MPU 652 includes a ROM 653 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 652 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 653 is executed. A certain RAM 654 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 653 and the RAM 654 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 652, and each may be configured as a separate chip. The same applies to MPUs of other control devices.

  The MPU 652 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 652 and receives game turn control commands (game turn control information) such as the above-described change start command, type command, and change end command from the main control device 162. . Also, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command or a hold command, and an open / close execution mode command (open / close execution mode information) such as an opening command or an ending command are received.

  As described above, the lamp units 26 to 28, the speaker unit 29, and the display control device 710 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 652. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification / production control device 143 are transmitted to the display control device 710 while maintaining the information form as it is.

  The display control device 710 includes a display control board 711 on which an MPU 712 that is an element in which a program ROM 713 and a work RAM 714 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 715, a character ROM 716, and a video RAM 717 are mounted. It has. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 713 and the work RAM 714 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 712, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 712 of the display control device 710 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification / production control device 143 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 715 (specifically Execute internal command generation for VDP 715. More specifically, the MPU 712 executes a process for specifying a variable display pattern of each game time in the symbol display device 75 based on a command transmitted from the notification / production control device 143 and a process related to a hold notice described later. And the drawing process for the VDP 715 is executed corresponding to the processing result. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75.

  The program ROM 713 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 712 and fixed value data, and JPEG format image data for a background image is also stored and held. The work RAM 714 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like that are used when the MPU 712 executes various programs. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 714.

  The VDP 715 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 75. Since the VDP 715 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 715 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 715 adjusts the timings of the MPU 712, the video RAM 717, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 717 from the character ROM 716 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 75.

  The character ROM 716 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 75. The character ROM 716 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 716 and share the image data and the like with each character ROM 716. Further, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 713 is stored in the character ROM 716.

  The video RAM 717 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 75, and the display contents on the display screen 75 a of the symbol display device 75 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 717. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 54, the display content on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 will be supplementarily described. FIG. 54A is a schematic diagram showing display contents in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 54B is a schematic diagram showing display contents in the first special gaming state.

  In the normal gaming state, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), three symbol strings of left, middle and right are displayed at the center of the display screen 75a. On the display screen 75a, the symbols of each symbol row are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (for example, from top to bottom) with periodicity. Then, the variable display stops in the order of left symbol sequence → right symbol sequence → middle symbol sequence, and the lottery result is notified by displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the lottery result on the effective line. For example, when the current lottery result corresponds to the jackpot result, the same symbol is stopped and displayed for each symbol row. After that, an opening video showing the transition to the special game state (first special game state) corresponding to the jackpot result is displayed through the confirmation display.

  As shown in FIG. 55, the effects executed during the first special game state (hereinafter referred to as special effects) are the opening part in which the opening video is displayed, and the round games from the first round to the 16th round. It is roughly divided into three parts: a main part to be executed and an ending part on which an ending video is displayed. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), in the main part, a girl character is displayed in the center of the display screen 75a (an area where symbols are displayed in the normal game state), and in the corner of the display screen 75a, the current character is displayed. And the total number of game balls (prize balls) paid out in this special game state (total number of payouts).

  The main part is the first half part (stock part that accumulates information related to the determination of the setting suggestion condition based on the number of balls entered into the upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning opening 61R), and the second half part (stored in the stock part). If the setting suggestion condition is satisfied in the main part, the ending part is configured. One of the features is that the currently set value is suggested. Although the details of the setting suggestion condition will be described later, the possibility that the setting suggestion condition is satisfied increases as the number of balls entered into the upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning opening 61R increases.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 56 to FIG. 60, the special effect control process (first special game state control process) that is executed as part of a predetermined period by the MPU 652 of the notification / effect control device 143 will be described. .

(First special gaming state control process)
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56 (a), the first special gaming state control process includes the opening part process (step S3001), the main part process (step S3002), and the ending part process (step S3003). It consists of three main processes.

(Processing for the opening part)
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 56B, in the opening part process, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the opening moving image is being displayed on the opening part. If a negative determination is made in step S3101, the process proceeds to step S3102. In step S3102, it is determined whether an opening command corresponding to the first special gaming state has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S3102, the opening part processing is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103.

  In step S3103, an opening part start process is executed. In the opening part start process, an opening command is transferred to the display control device 710, the light emission mode of the lamp unit 26 is controlled so as to be a light emission mode corresponding to the opening, and the BGM corresponding to the opening from the speaker unit 29 is performed. And voice control to output sound effects.

  After the setting suggestion lottery table is determined in subsequent step S3014, the processing for the opening part is terminated. In a setting suggestion lottery to be described later, whether or not setting suggestion is possible is determined with reference to the value of a lottery counter provided in the RAM 654 (various counter areas 675) of the notification / production control device 143 and the setting suggestion lottery table. To do. Here, the relationship between the lottery counter and the setting suggestion lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  As for the lottery counter, “1” is added when a ball enters the upper variable winning device 64 during the round, and “10” when a ball enters the right general winning port 61R during the interval between rounds. Are added.

  In the ROM 653 (lottery table storage area 661) of the notification / production control device 143, a setting suggestion lottery table A to a setting suggestion lottery table C are stored.

  For the setting suggestion lottery table A, when the lottery counter value is 0 to 149, the setting suggestion winning probability is 0%, and when the lottery counter value is 150 to 199, the setting suggestion winning probability is 10%. When the lottery counter value is 200 to 249, the setting suggestion winning probability is 40%. When the lottery counter value is 250 to 299, the setting suggestion winning probability is 70% and the lottery counter value is 300 abnormal. In the case of, it is stipulated that the winning probability of setting suggestion is 100%.

  For the setting suggestion lottery table B, when the lottery counter value is 0 to 149, the setting suggestion winning probability is 0%, and when the lottery counter value is 150 to 199, the setting suggestion winning probability is 20%. When the lottery counter value is 200 to 249, the setting suggestion winning probability is 50%. When the lottery counter value is 250 to 299, the setting suggestion winning probability is 80% and the lottery counter value is 300 abnormal. In the case of, it is stipulated that the winning probability of setting suggestion is 100%.

  For the setting suggestion lottery table C, when the lottery counter value is 0 to 149, the setting suggestion winning probability is 0%, and when the lottery counter value is 150 to 199, the setting suggestion winning probability is 30%. When the lottery counter value is 200 to 249, the setting suggestion winning probability is 60%. When the lottery counter value is 250 to 299, the setting suggestion winning probability is 90% and the lottery counter value is 300 abnormal. In the case of, it is stipulated that the winning probability of setting suggestion is 100%.

  That is, for the setting suggestion lottery table A to the setting suggestion lottery table C, the probability that the setting suggestion increases as the number of balls entered into the upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning opening 61R increases. The suggestion lottery table A <the setting suggestion lottery table B <the setting suggestion lottery table C is differentiated so that the probability of the setting suggestion occurring increases.

  It should be noted that the setting of the lottery counter for setting suggestion is favored for the entry to the right general prize opening 61R rather than the entry to the upper variable prize winning device 64, and the upper variable prize in the first special game state. Since the difference in the number of balls entered into the device 64 hardly occurs, the contribution rate to the setting suggestion is higher in the right general winning port 61R than in the upper variable winning device 64.

  When the first special gaming state is triggered by the 16R normal jackpot result, the probability of selecting the setting suggestion lottery table A is 30%, the probability of selecting the setting suggestion lottery table B is 30%, and the setting suggestion The probability that the lottery table C will be selected is 40%, and the selection suggestion lottery table C is preferentially selected.

  When the first special gaming state is triggered by the 16R probability variation jackpot result A, the probability that the setting suggestion lottery table A is selected is 30%, and the probability that the setting suggestion lottery table B is selected is 40%. The probability that the suggestion lottery table C is selected is 30%, and the selection of the setting suggestion lottery table B is preferentially performed.

  If the first special gaming state is triggered by the 16R probability variation jackpot result B, the probability that the setting suggestion lottery table A is selected is 40%, and the probability that the setting suggestion lottery table B is selected is 30%. The probability that the suggestion lottery table C is selected is 30%, and the selection of the setting suggestion lottery table A is preferentially performed.

  That is, in the first special gaming state, the probability of setting suggestion increases in the order of 16R probability variation jackpot result B <16R probability variation jackpot result A <16R normal jackpot result.

  As shown in FIG. 57 (b), as the ending image (moving image) displayed in the ending part in the first special gaming state, the setting suggestion corresponding ending images X1 to 1 displayed when the setting suggestion lottery is won. X3 and setting suggestion non-supporting ending images Y1 to Y3 that are displayed when the setting suggestion lottery is missed are provided.

  The setting suggestion non-compliant ending image Y1 is an image simulating the morning sun, and is displayed when the number of consecutive jackpots is 0 to 4. The ending image Y2 is an image imitating sunset, and is displayed when the number of consecutive big hits is 5 to 9. The ending image Y3 is an image that imitates the moonlit night, and is displayed when the number of consecutive big hits is 10 or more.

  In the ending images X1 to X3 corresponding to the setting suggestion, girl characters are displayed. In the ending image X1, three people are displayed, in the ending image X2, five people are displayed, and in the ending image X3, it is displayed. The number of people to be played is seven.

  When the setting suggestion is won in setting 1, the ending image X1 is excluded from the selection candidates, the probability that the ending image X2 is selected is 50%, and the probability that the ending image X3 is selected is 50%. ing. When setting suggestion is won in setting 2, the probability that ending image X1 is selected is 30%, the probability that ending image X2 is selected is 50%, and the corner error that ending image X3 is selected is 20%. It has become. When the setting suggestion is won in setting 3, the probability that the ending image X1 is selected is 50%, the probability that the ending image X2 is selected is 50%, and the ending image X3 is excluded from the selection candidates.

  Therefore, if the appearance frequency of the ending image X3 is high, the possibility of the setting 1 is high, and if the appearance frequency of the ending image X1 is high, the possibility of the setting 3 is high. The set value can be predicted according to the appearance frequency.

  Returning to the description of step S3101 in FIG. 56B, if the determination in step S3101 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S3105. In step S3105, it is determined whether a release command corresponding to the first round has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S3105, the processing for the opening part is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S3105, the process proceeds to step S3106.

  In step S3106, a transition process to the main part is executed. In this transition processing, the release command corresponding to the first round is transferred to the display control device 710, the light emission mode of the lamp unit 26 is switched to that corresponding to the main part, and the BGM and sound effect output from the speaker unit 29 are changed. Switch to the one corresponding to the main part.

  In the subsequent step S3107, the main part flag is set in various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654, and the processing for the opening part is completed. By setting the main part flag, various processes of the main part process constituting the first special gaming state process are executed. Hereinafter, the main part process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Main part processing)
In the main part processing, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the main part flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654. If the main part flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S3201, and the main part processing is terminated. If the main part flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3202, and it is determined whether or not an ending command is received from the main controller 162. If a positive determination is made in step S3202, the process proceeds to step S3203.

  In step S3203, it is determined whether a release command corresponding to the 16th round has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S3203, the process proceeds to step S3204. In step S3204, it is determined whether or not a round is in progress. If the round is in progress, an affirmative determination is made in step S3204, and the process proceeds to step S3205. After the round process is executed in step S3205, the main part process is terminated. Here, the round process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Round processing)
In the round process, first, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not a close command is received from the main controller 162. If a negative determination is made in step S3301, the process proceeds to step S3302. In step S3302, it is determined whether a winning command related to the upper prize winning port 311 is received from the main controller 162 or not. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, the process advances to step S3303 to execute a payout total number update process.

  Specifically, a winning command related to the upper prize winning port 311 is transferred to the display control device 710 and a sound effect corresponding to the winning is output from the speaker unit 29. In the display control device 710, the total number of payouts displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is updated (added by the number of winning balls corresponding to the upper prize winning port 311).

  In the subsequent step S3304, the first stock icon SI1 displayed on the display screen 75a is updated based on winning in the upper prize winning opening 311. Here, with reference to FIG. 54B, the configuration related to the first stock icon SI1 will be described supplementarily. FIG. 54B is a schematic diagram showing display contents on the display screen 75a in the round part.

(1st stock icon)
The first stock icon SI1 is an image simulating a blue bullet, and a first stock icon display area ST1 in which a plurality of first stock icons SI1 can be displayed vertically is provided on the left side of the display screen 75a. The first stock icon SI1 is 1 in the first stock icon display area ST1 every time the number of game balls that have entered the upper prize winning slot 311 during the first special game state round reaches the first predetermined number (10). Is displayed. Specifically, when the additional display of one first stock icon SI1 is completed, an outer frame of the first stock icon SI1 scheduled to be additionally displayed next is displayed above the first stock icon SI1. Thereafter, every time a ball enters the upper prize winning port 311, the blue colored portion expands in the region surrounded by the outer frame, and when the number of balls reached the first predetermined number, the entire region is Filled in blue, the additional display of the first stock icon SI1 is completed.

  In the first special game state, the number of balls entered into the upper grand prize opening 311 is 10 and the opening time reaches 30 sec. When the upper variable winning device 64 is in the open state, most of the game balls fired to the right route enter the upper large winning opening 311. Since the launch period of the game ball is 0.6 sec, basically, 10 rounds are generated before the opening time reaches 30 sec in each round. Therefore, one first stock icon SI1 is additionally displayed in most rounds, and in the case of a 16R jackpot result, approximately 15 first stock icons SI1 are additionally displayed by the end of the 15th round.

  After the stock icon update process is executed in step S3304, the process proceeds to step S3305. In step S3305, "1" is added to the suggestion lottery counter provided in the various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654.

  After the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter is added in step S3305 or when a negative determination is made in step S3302 (when a winning command related to the upper large winning opening 311 is not received), the process proceeds to step S3306. . In step S3306, it is determined whether a winning command related to the right general winning opening 61R has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S3306, the processing for this round is terminated as it is.

  If a positive determination is made in step S3306, the process proceeds to step S3307. In step S3307, a process for updating the total number of payouts is executed. Specifically, a winning command related to the right general winning opening 61R is transferred to the display control device 710, and a sound effect corresponding to winning is output from the speaker unit 29. In the display control device 710, the total number of payouts displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is updated (added by the number of winning balls corresponding to the right general winning opening 61R).

  Returning to the description of step S3301, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3301, that is, when a close command is received, the process proceeds to step S3308. In step S3308, stock target switching processing is executed.

  In the stock target switching process, the closing command received from the main control device 162 is transferred to the display control device 710. The display control device 710 performs display indicating that the stock target has been switched on the display screen 75a based on the reception of the closing command from the notification / production control device 143. Details of this display will be described later.

  In the subsequent step S3309, a round end process is executed. Specifically, the BGM output from the speaker unit 29 is switched from the one corresponding during the round to the one corresponding during the interval, and the light emission mode of the lamp unit 26 is changed from the mode corresponding during the round to the mode corresponding to the interval. Switch to. Thereafter, in step S3310, interval flags are set in various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654, and the processing for this round is completed.

  Returning to the description of step S3204 in FIG. 58, if it is determined in step S3204 that the game is not in a round, that is, if an interval flag is stored in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654, the process proceeds to step S3206. After the interval process is executed in step S3206, the main part process ends. The interval processing will be described below with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

(Interval processing)
In the interval processing, first, in step S3401, it is determined whether or not an open command is received from the main controller 162. If a negative determination is made in step S3401, the process proceeds to step S3402. In step S3402, it is determined whether or not a winning command related to the upper prize winning port 311 has been received from the main controller 162. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3402, the process advances to step S3403 to execute a process for updating the total number of payouts.

  Specifically, a winning command related to the upper prize winning port 311 is transferred to the display control device 710 and a sound effect corresponding to the winning is output from the speaker unit 29. In the display control device 710, the total number of payouts displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is updated (added by the number of winning balls corresponding to the upper prize winning port 311).

  After executing the update process of step S3403 or when a negative determination is made in step S3402, the process proceeds to step S3404. In step S3404, it is determined whether or not a winning command related to the right general winning opening 61R has been received from the main controller 162. If a negative determination is made in step S3404, the interval processing is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3404, the process proceeds to step S3405. In step S3405, the payout total number update process is executed. Specifically, a winning command related to the right general winning opening 61R is transferred to the display control device 710, and a sound effect corresponding to winning is output from the speaker unit 29. The display control device 710 updates the total number of payouts displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the reception of the winning command related to the right general winning opening 61R (the prize corresponding to the right general winning opening 61R). Add the number of balls).

  In a succeeding step S3406, the second stock icon SI2 is added based on the ball entering the right general winning opening 61R. Here, with reference to FIG. 54 (b), the configuration related to the second stock icon SI2 will be supplementarily described.

(Second stock icon)
The second stock icon SI2 is an image simulating a red bullet, and the second stock icon SI2 can be displayed in a vertical arrangement on the right part of the display screen 75a (a part close to the right general winning opening 61R). A stock icon display area ST2 is provided. In the event that the entry into the right general winning opening 61R occurs during the interval of the first special game state, one second stock icon SI2 is additionally displayed in the second stock icon display area ST2 for each entry.

  In the first special game state, the interval time is 3 seconds, and approximately 1/10 of the game balls launched to the right route enter the right general winning opening 61R. Considering that the game ball firing cycle is 0.6 sec, the right general winning opening 61R is entered about once every two to three intervals. That is, if the game ball is continuously fired to the right route for all 15 intervals, about 7 to 8 balls are entered into the right general winning opening 61R in the first special game state. Will be. That is, 7 to 8 second stock icons SI2 can be additionally displayed in one first special gaming state.

  After the additional display of the pattern corresponding to the right general winning opening 61R is completed in step S3406, the process proceeds to step S3407. After the addition processing of the setting suggestion lottery counter in the various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654 is executed in step S3407, the interval processing is terminated. In the setting suggestion lottery counter addition process, “10” is added to the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter. The value to be added is larger than the value to be added based on the ball entering the top prize winning port 311 during the round.

  Returning to the description of step S3401, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3401, that is, if an open command is received, the process proceeds to step S3408. In step S3408, stock target switching processing is executed.

  In the stock target switching process, the release command received from the main controller 162 is transferred to the display controller 710. The display control device 710 performs display indicating that the stock target has been switched on the display screen 75a based on the receipt of the release command from the notification / production control device 143. Details of this display will be described later.

  In subsequent step S3409, a round start process is executed. Specifically, the BGM output from the speaker unit 29 is switched from the one corresponding to the interval to the one corresponding to the round, and the light emission mode of the lamp unit 26 is switched from the mode corresponding to the interval to the mode corresponding to the round. After that, in step S3410, the interval flags stored in the various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654 are deleted, and this interval processing is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 61, the difference in display related to the stock icon during the round and during the interval will be described. FIG. 61A is a schematic diagram showing a display during a round, and FIG. 61B is a schematic diagram showing a display during an interval.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (a), during the round, the first stock icon display region ST1 on the left side of the display screen 75a emits light brightly (darkness is released), and the right part of the display screen 75a The second stock icon display area ST2 is darkened. A character “Lock” is displayed above the dark second stock icon display area ST2. Thereby, during the round, the first stock icon SI1 is acquired by the occurrence of a ball entering the upper university winning opening 311. On the other hand, even if the ball entering the right general winning opening 61R occurs, the second stock icon SI2 It is suggested that not get. It should be noted that the second stock icon SI2 is not acquired even if a ball enters the upper major winning opening 311 during the round, and the first stock icon even if a ball enters the right general winning port 61R. SI1 is not acquired.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (b), during the interval, the first stock icon display area ST1 on the left side of the display screen 75a is darkened, and the second stock icon display area ST2 on the right side of the display screen 75a is bright. The flash is on (darkening has been canceled). The characters “Lock” are displayed above the dark-stocked first stock icon display area ST1. Thereby, during the interval, the second stock icon SI2 is acquired due to the entry to the right general winning opening 61R, while the first stock icon SI1 even if the entering to the upper large winning opening 311 occurs. It is suggested that not get. It should be noted that the second stock icon SI2 is not acquired even if a ball enters the upper major winning opening 311 during the interval, and the first stock icon even if a ball enters the right general winning port 61R. SI1 is not acquired.

  Returning to the description of step S3203 of FIG. 58, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3203, that is, if a release command corresponding to the sixteenth round is received, the process proceeds to step S3207. In step S3207, a setting suggestion lottery process is executed. In the setting suggestion lottery process, the setting suggestion lottery table (see FIG. 57B) set in step S3104 and the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter updated in steps S3305 and S3407 are used. Referring to it, it is determined whether or not to suggest setting by lottery.

  If it is determined in step S3207 that the setting suggestion non-corresponding lottery result is obtained, a negative determination is made in step S3208, the process proceeds to step S3209, and a transition process to a setting suggestion non-corresponding battle part is performed. On the other hand, if a lottery result corresponding to the setting suggestion is obtained in step S3207, an affirmative determination is made in step S3208, the process proceeds to step S3210, and a transition process to a battle part corresponding to the setting suggestion is performed.

  By executing the transition process of steps S3209 to S3210, the BGM output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to the BGM corresponding to the battle part, and the light emission mode of the lamp unit 26 is switched to the light emission mode corresponding to the battle part. In these transition processes, information indicating the result of the setting suggestion lottery is added to the release command corresponding to the 16th round transmitted from the main control device 162 and transferred to the display control device 710. The display control device 710 shifts to a battle part that does not support setting suggestion or a battle part that supports setting suggestion based on the reception of the release command corresponding to the 16th round.

  Here, the display in a battle part is demonstrated with reference to FIG. FIG. 62A is a schematic diagram showing the display contents at the start of the battle part, and FIG. 62B is a schematic diagram showing the display contents at the end of the battle part corresponding to the setting suggestion.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), when shifting to the battle part, a plurality of target images TF simulating a helicopter are displayed at the center of the display screen 75a. The stock icons SI1 and SI2 acquired in the stock part are carried over from the stock part to the battle part. In the battle part, the displayed stock icons SI1 and SI2 are fired toward the target image TF. Then, when the stock icons SI1 and SI2 hit the target image TF, the target image TF is erased (the helicopter is shot down). In the battle part corresponding to the setting suggestion, the number of target images TF to be finally displayed is 0, and it is notified that the shooting has been successfully completed (see FIG. 62B). On the other hand, in the battle part that does not support setting suggestion, a part of the target image TF remains in the end, and it is notified that the shooting has failed.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 58, after the transition process of step S3209 or step S3210 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3211 to reset (clear 0) the setting suggestion lottery counter. In the following step S3212, the interval flag stored in the various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654 is deleted, and the main part processing is ended.

Returning to the description of step S3202, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3202, that is, if an ending command is received from the main controller 162, the process proceeds to step S3213. In step S3213, it is determined whether the setting suggestion is won in the lottery process in step S3207. If a negative determination is made in step S3213, the ending part transition process that does not support setting suggestion is executed in step S3214, and then the main part process is terminated. In the setting suggestion-incompatible ending part transition process, the BGM output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to the setting suggestion-incompatible ending part BGM, and the light emission mode of the lamp unit 26 is set for the setting suggestion-incompatible ending part. Switch to the light emission mode.
On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3213, the ending part transition process corresponding to the setting suggestion is executed in step S3215, and then the main part process is terminated. In the setting suggestion corresponding ending part transition process, the BGM output from the speaker unit 29 is switched to the setting suggestion corresponding ending part BGM, and the light emission mode of the lamp unit 26 is changed to the light emission mode for the setting suggestion corresponding ending part. Switch.

  Here, in the ending part process shown in step S3003 of FIG. 56A, in the ending part corresponding to the setting suggestion, the ending image corresponding to the setting suggestion with reference to the ending image determination table shown in FIG. Which one of X1 to X3 is to be displayed is determined by lottery, and in an ending part that does not support setting suggestion, referring to the ending image determination table shown in FIG. 57B, ending images Y1 to Y3 that do not support setting suggestion Which of these is to be displayed is determined according to the number of consecutive jackpots. Then, the information indicating the determined ending image is added to the ending command received from the main controller 162 and transferred to the display controller 710. When receiving the ending command, the display control device 710 starts displaying the ending image designated by the notification / production control device 143. The display of the ending image is continued until the normal gaming state is restored.

  According to the sixth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

  In the present embodiment, the upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning port 61R are arranged on the right route, and the game ball launched aiming at the upper variable winning device 64 during the first special gaming state is on the right. The general winning opening 61R can be entered. Here, the upper variable winning device 64 can be switched between an open state (corresponding to “accepted state”) / closed state (corresponding to “non-accepted state”), and is open during the first special game state. Will be repeated. In view of the fact that it is possible to enter the upper variable prize-winning device 64 in the open state, the game ball is launched and closed in a time zone in which the upper variable prize-winning device 64 is in the open state. It is assumed that an action such as avoiding the launch of a game ball is performed for the time zone in the state.

  As a result, the degree of attention of the player increases during the time period in which the player is in an open state, while there is a concern that the degree of attention of the player decreases in the case of the closed state. Here, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is assumed that a ball has entered the right general winning opening 61R in a state where the upper variable winning device 64 is open in the first special gaming state. In the first special gaming state, when the upper variable winning device 64 is in a closed state, a ball entering the right general winning port 61R is generated. In addition to the prize ball, a privilege that the execution probability of the setting suggestion is increased is given. Thereby, it is possible to prompt the player who expects the setting suggestion to continue to emit the game ball, and it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the degree of attention in the closed time zone. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to improve the degree of freedom of setting the interval time during which the closed state is maintained, and even if the interval time is increased to some extent, the soundness of the game can be suppressed while suppressing the decrease in the interest of the gaming machine Can enhance sex.

  When the time of the closed state is shorter than the time of the open state, it is difficult to earn the number of balls entered to the right general winning opening 61R during the closed state. In particular, if the time of the closed state is short, there may be a bias that the entry does not occur due to variations in the behavior of game balls, etc. It will be cruel to you. Therefore, the count value corresponding to the entry to the right general winning opening 61R is carried over to the end of the first special gaming state, and the setting suggestion is seen by looking at the entire entering situation in the first special gaming state. By making it the structure which performs determination, the influence of the bias mentioned above can be relieved. This is a preferable configuration for urging the continuation of firing during the interval.

  The setting suggestion lottery counter used for the setting suggestion lottery is updated (added) by entering the upper variable winning device 64 during the round, and updated (added) by entering the right general winning opening 61R during the interval. ) With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who expects the setting suggestion to launch the game ball during both the round and the interval, and the above-described effect of suppressing the reduction in the degree of attention is preferably achieved. It can be demonstrated.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the setting suggestion determination is performed by integrating the winnings to the upper variable winning device 64 and the right general winning opening 61R, the setting suggestion is also performed by entering the upper variable winning device 64. For some players, the possibility of deducting the launch of game balls during the interval cannot be denied. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the degree to which the entry to the right general winning opening 61R during the interval contributes to the determination of the setting suggestion is greater than the entry to the upper variable prize winning device 64 during the round. By providing such a difference, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

  During the first special game state, the first stock icon display area ST1 (first stock icon SI1) and the second stock icon display area ST2 (second stock icon SI2) are displayed during both the round and the interval. . The first stock icon display rain region ST1 and the second stock icon display region ST2 are brightly lit (highlighted) and darkened (non-highlighted) during rounds and intervals. Target). In this way, by switching the stock icon display area to be stocked according to the progress of the game, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game in the first special game state.

  The switching of the display mode of each stock icon display area ST1, ST2 is synchronized, and the display change on the display screen 75a can be emphasized. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance of overlooking that the target stock icon display area has been switched. Since the stock icon is additionally displayed in the stock icon display area in which the display is emphasized, oversight of the additional display can be suppressed.

  In the first stock icon display areas ST1 and ST2, even if one is highlighted, the other is not hidden and the display is continued. By setting it as such a structure, it can suppress that a stock destination becomes unknown.

  By linking the first stock icon display area ST1 and the second stock icon display area ST2, the period during which no stock target exists is excluded, and the notification of the stock target is continued both during the round and during the interval. The player can be encouraged to continue the game. This is preferable in order to suppress the act of refraining from launching the game ball aiming at the interval time during which the upper variable winning device 64 is in the closed state (so-called “stopping”).

<Modification 1>
In the sixth embodiment, one first stock icon SI1 is added to the right general winning opening 61R when the number of balls entering the upper prize winning opening 311 reaches the first predetermined number (10). When the number of incoming balls reaches the second predetermined number (1), one second stock icon SI2 is added. However, the opportunity to add each stock icon SI1, SI2 has been changed as follows: Also good. For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (b), when a ball enters the upper prize winning slot 311, one first stock icon SI1 is added with the first probability (for example, 10%), and the right general winning prize is obtained. When a ball enters the mouth 61R, one second stock icon SI2 may be added with a second probability (for example, 100%).

<Modification 2>
As long as it can indicate which of the first stock icon display area ST1 and the second stock icon display area ST2 is to be added with the stock icon, the specific structure of the target suggestion is arbitrary. is there. For example, it is good also as a structure which suggests an addition object by adding an effect to the stock icon display area used as the addition object of a stock icon.

<Modification 3>
When the upper variable winning device 64 is in the closed state, even if the game balls are restarted from that timing, the interval time ends before the released game balls reach the right general winning port 61R. It is also possible. That is, when a so-called stop hit is made, it is difficult to enter the right general winning opening 61R in a timely manner even if the game ball is fired after visually confirming that it is in the closed state. May be. Accordingly, the player who expects the setting suggestion lottery counter to be updated (added) based on the ball entering the right general winning opening 61R in the closed state is preferably urged to continue the game ball firing. be able to.

<Modification 4>
In the said 6th Embodiment, although it comprised so that interval time might become the same also about any 1st special game state, you may vary the length of interval time according to the kind of jackpot result. For example, when the 16R normal jackpot result A and the 16R normal jackpot result B are provided as the jackpot results, the 16R normal jackpot result A may be configured to have a longer interval time than the 16R normal jackpot result B.

<Modification 5>
In the said 6th Embodiment, although it comprised so that it might become the same about all interval time in a 1st special game state, it is not limited to this, Even if it makes interval time long and short differ by a round Good. For example, the interval time may be longer in a specific round (for example, the seventh round) than in other rounds.

<Modification 6>
In the sixth embodiment, the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter is updated (added) when a ball enters the upper variable winning device 64 during the round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the value of the setting suggestion lottery counter based on the ball entering the upper variable winning device 64 during the round is not updated (added).

<Modification 7>
In the sixth embodiment, the color of the first stock icon SI1 and the color of the second stock icon SI2 are made different from each other, but the discrimination power of both is improved. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to share an overview of the first stock icon SI1 and the second stock icon SI2.

<Modification 8>
In the sixth embodiment, the first stock icon display area ST1 corresponding to the upper variable winning device 64 is provided on the left portion of the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, and the right general winning opening is provided on the right portion of the display screen 75a. Although the second stock icon display area ST2 corresponding to 61R is provided, the arrangement of the stock icon display areas ST1 and ST2 may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the stock icon display areas ST1 and ST2 may be displayed on the right side of the display screen 75a.

<Modification 9>
In the sixth embodiment, the switching display timing of the target that is activated in the first stock icon display area ST1 and the second stock icon display area ST2 is changed to the open / closed state of the upper variable winning device 64. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the timing at which the game ball that has flowed into the upper prize winning opening 311 reaches the attached detection sensor (detection position) is delayed to some extent, and the game ball that has flowed into the right general winning opening 61R is attached to the attached detection sensor (detection position). There is a certain delay in the timing to reach (). In consideration of these delays, the switching display timing may be delayed from the switching timing of the upper variable winning device 64 to the open state / closed state. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the chances that the entry to the right general winning opening 61R and the upper variable winning device 64 seems to be just in time, and that it is invalidated.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the sixth embodiment, the first stock icon display area ST1 for displaying the stock icon (first stock icon SI1) acquired based on the ball entering the upper university winning opening 311 and the right general winning Although the second stock icon display area ST2 for displaying the stock icon (second stock icon SI2) acquired based on the entrance to the mouth 61R is individually provided, in this embodiment, the stock icon The configuration related to the display is different from that of the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 63, a configuration relating to display of stock icons in the present embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the sixth embodiment. The specific configuration related to the setting suggestion lottery is the same as that of the fifth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the main part (1st to 15th rounds) in the first special game state, a girl character is displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. Below this character, there is provided a stock icon display area ST for displaying stock icons SI acquired based on the entrance to the upper university winning entrance 311 or the entrance to the right general winning entrance 61R in the order of acquisition. Yes. That is, for the stock icon display area ST shown in the present embodiment, the two stock icon display areas ST1 and ST2 shown in the fifth embodiment are integrated into one.

  In the stock icon display area ST, a frame part defining the outer edge of the stock icon display area ST is displayed, and the stock icon display area ST and its peripheral area are partitioned by this frame part. About this frame part, it is displayed with the said girl character with the transfer from an opening part to a main part. While this character is not displayed at the end of the main part, the frame of the stock icon display area ST is continuously displayed until the end of the ending part.

  Here, in the fifth embodiment, the opportunity to acquire the first stock icon SI1 during the round is set as the ball entering the upper prize winning port 311 and the second stock icon SI2 is acquired during the interval. The opportunity was to enter the right general winning opening 61R. Of these two opportunities, the former requires 10 balls to acquire the first stock icon SI1, and the latter acquires the second stock icon SI2 by one ball. This embodiment is the same as the fifth embodiment in that the above difference is provided in the number of incoming balls, which is the acquisition condition of the stock icon SI, but the type of stock icon SI to be acquired is the input It is common regardless of the ball tip.

  Approximately 2/3 of the game balls fired to the right route during the round enter the upper prize winning port 311. For this reason, it is necessary to fire about 15 game balls in order to acquire the stock icon SI based on the ball entering the upper prize winning port 311. On the other hand, about 1/10 of the game balls fired to the right route during the interval enter the right general winning opening 61R. For this reason, it is necessary to fire about 10 game balls in order to acquire the stock icon SI based on the ball entering the right general winning opening 61R. If the number of entered balls during the round does not reach 10, the number of entered balls is carried over to the next round, and the variation in the number of stock icon SI obtained based on the entrance to the upper prize winning slot 311 hardly occurs. It has a configuration. On the other hand, the entry to the right general winning opening 61R during the interval is directly connected to the stock icon SI, and the carry-over as described above does not occur. That is, as a whole, it is easier to acquire the stock icon during the interval than during the round, and the variation in the acquisition of the stock icon SI is less during the round than during the interval.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode is partially changed from the round during the interval to notify the player that the acquisition of the stock icon SI is easier during the interval than during the round. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 63 (b), an effect is added to the character of the girl displayed across the round, and the character “high probability of stock” is displayed above the stock icon display area ST. Is displayed. These indications are erased at the beginning of the next round.

<Modification 1>
In the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, the stock icon display area ST capable of displaying the stock icon SI is provided on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, but the arrangement of the stock icon display area ST is arranged. The installation location is arbitrary. For example, a lamp unit for displaying stock may be provided around the display screen 75a.

<Modification 2>
In the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, the right general winning opening 61R is arranged on the upstream side of the upper variable winning device 64 in the right route, and the upper variable winning device 64 is in the open state (acceptance). Even if it is a state), it was set as the structure which can enter the right general winning opening 61R, However, It is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 64 (a), the right general winning opening 61R is disposed on the downstream side of the upper variable winning device 64 in the right route, and the upper variable winning device 64 is in an open state (accepting state). In such a case, the upper variable winning device 64 may prevent the player from entering the right general winning port 61R.

<Modification 3>
Regarding the detection sensor in the upper variable winning device 64 and the detection sensor in the right general winning opening 61R, there is a slight time lag until the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion reaches the detection sensor and a ball is detected. In consideration of such a time lag, the switching timing of the stock object in the first stock icon display area ST1 and the second stock icon display area ST2 shown in the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment are used. It is also possible to delay the display / non-display switching timing of the stock high probability shown in accordance with the time lag.

<Modification 4>
In the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment, the setting value is suggested to the player based on the ball entering the right general winning opening 61R. However, at least the player has some privilege. As long as it is granted, the privilege is not limited to the setting suggestion. For example, in a configuration in which it is difficult or impossible for a player to make a transition to the high probability mode, it is possible to adopt a configuration that suggests whether or not the player is in the high probability mode.

<Eighth Embodiment>
One of the features of the present embodiment is that the device is designed to improve the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball. In the following, a characteristic configuration and its premise configuration in the present embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment. In the game board 60 shown in the present embodiment, the lower variable prize-winning device 65 is omitted, but other configurations related to the game board 60 are the same as those in the first embodiment. Various configurations relating to the front door frame 14, the inner frame 13, the back pack unit 15, and the like are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  First, with reference to FIG. 65, a configuration related to storage of hold information will be described. The MPU 602 of the main control device 162 uses a variety of counter information such as a hit random number counter C1, a hit type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, a fluctuation type counter CS, a random number initial value counter CINI, etc. The lottery, the display setting of the main display unit 81, the outline setting of the symbol display of the symbol display device 75, and the like are performed.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 631 set in the RAM 604. In the lottery counter buffer 631, information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as a reserved ball as an acquisition information storage means when a winning is made to the operation ports 62a and 63a. It is stored in area 632.

  The holding ball storage area 632 includes a holding area RE for an operating port and an execution area AE. The reserved area RE includes a first area Ra1, a second area Ra2, a third area Ra3, a fourth area Ra4, a fifth area Ra5, a sixth area Ra6, a seventh area Ra7, and an eighth area Ra8. In accordance with the winning histories to the mouths 62a and 63a, the numerical value information of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2 and the reaching random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 is used as holding information, and any area Ra1 ~ Ra8. Note that the hold information corresponds to special information.

  In the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8, when winning to the operation ports 62a and 63a occurs continuously a plurality of times, the first area Ra1 → second area Ra2 → third area Ra3 → fourth area Ra4. The numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the fifth area Ra5 → the sixth area Ra6 → the seventh area Ra7 → the eighth area Ra8. By providing eight areas Ra1 to Ra8 in this way, there are four ball entry histories to the lower operation port 62a and the right operation port 63a, that is, a total of eight winning histories to the operation ports 62a and 63a. Until it is stored on hold.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first area Ra1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the operation port display portions D1, D2 of the main display unit 81. At the start of one game round, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  Specifically, each counter is configured so that the hit random number counter C1 is incremented by one in the range of, for example, 0 to 299, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 299). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 299). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and when the game ball wins the operation ports 62a and 63a, the game ball is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 in detail when the game ball is detected by a detection sensor described later. The

  The value of the random number for winning the big hit is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 621 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 603. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described.

  In the success / failure table, address information composed of binary number information and jackpot numerical value information composed of binary number information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, ten types of address information expressed in decimal numbers from “1” to “10” are set, and jackpot value information is expressed in decimal numbers as “7”, “36”, “67”. , “100”, “131”, “164”, “195”, “223”, “241”, “272” are set, and the address information and the jackpot value information are in a one-to-one relationship. It is associated. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical value information is included in “0” to “299”, which is the numerical value range of the random number information that can be updated in the hit random number counter C1.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the success / failure lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high probability mode, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only the jackpot value information whose address information is “1” is referred to in the lottery lottery, and in the high probability mode, the jackpot number information corresponding to all the address information is determined in the lottery lottery. Referenced. In other words, there is one piece of numerical information for winning the jackpot in the low probability mode, and there are ten pieces of numerical information in the high probability mode, which is more than in the low probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability mode is 1/300, whereas the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability mode is 1/30, and the high probability mode is a jackpot than the low probability mode. The probability of winning is increased. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary.

  The hit type counter C2 is configured such that 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 29, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 29). The hit type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when a game ball wins the operation port 62a, 63a, it is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at a timing detected by a detection sensor described later in detail.

  The game result distribution destination for the win type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area 622 as a distribution information group storage unit in the ROM 603. Then, a normal jackpot result (low probability special game result) and a probability variable jackpot result (high probability special game result) are set as the distribution destinations.

  The normal jackpot result is that the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the support frequency is high until the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the support mode shifts. It is a jackpot result that becomes a mode. After the end reference count has elapsed, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

  The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state winning and the operation shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the allocation table, “0-9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10-29” corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, but this numerical allocation is arbitrary.

  In the present embodiment, a difference is provided so that the distribution based on the ball entering the right operation port 63a is more advantageous to the player than the distribution based on the ball entering the lower operation port 62a. Specifically, the probability variation jackpot results are roughly divided into two results with different advantages, specifically, the first probability variation jackpot result with a round number of “16” and the second probability variable jackpot result with a round number of “4”. When the probability variation jackpot result is obtained by the allocation based on the ball entering the right operation port 63a, the first probability variation jackpot result is compared with the case where the probability variation jackpot result is obtained by the allocation based on the ball entering the lower operation port 62a. By adopting the configuration that tends to be, the difference in the above-described advantages is caused between the distribution mode based on the ball entering the lower working port 62a and the distribution mode based on the ball entering the right working port 63a.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 238) and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and when a game ball is won in the operation ports 62a and 63a, the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at a timing detected by a detection sensor described later in detail. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603, it is determined whether to generate a reach. However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 602 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 75 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures). In the gaming machine in which the display result is the special display result, the special display result is obtained in a stage before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) in the symbol display device 75 is started. This means a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to become.

  In other words, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode can be obtained by stopping and displaying symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. This is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be established is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is set on a preset active line in the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may be established, and a symbol change display is performed by a final stop symbol row in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 602 to determine the variation display time in the operation port displays D1 and D2 of the main display unit 81 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 75. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the symbol display device 75 determines the variation pattern when the symbol variation starts.

  When determining the variable display time in the symbol display device 75 or the main display unit 81 (specifically, the operation port display units D1 and D2), the buffer values of the reach random number counter C3 and the variable type counter CS, the variable display time table of the ROM 603 The storage area 623 is referred to. Further, in the MPU 602, the stop result in the result display unit for the operating port is determined using the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. The stop result determination table stored in the ROM 603 is used.

  For example, the open random number counter C4 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 249, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 249). The open random number counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric storage area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 66. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 71 to the open state based on the stored value of the open random number counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 71 is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 71 is not controlled to the open state.

(About various processes executed by the main controller 162)
Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 66, the timer interrupt process executed when the MPU 602 in the main controller 162 advances the game at each game time will be described. This process is started periodically by the MPU 602 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S4001, various winning detection sensors are read. That is, the state of various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the winning detection sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  Thereafter, in step S4002, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  In subsequent step S4003, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the open random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  In the subsequent step S4004, a through winning process for winning through the through gate 66 is executed. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not a through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. If the same flag is stored, it is stored in the electric storage area. The value of the open random number counter C4 updated in the step S4003 is stored in the electronic character storage area under the condition that the number of stored accessory reservations is less than 4. If the through-gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635, the winning detection flag is deleted and the through-gate winning process is terminated.

  After the through gate winning process of step S6004 is executed, the process proceeds to step S6005, where the operating port winning process associated with winning the operating ports 62a and 63a is executed in step S6005, and this timer interrupt process is terminated. To do.

(Prize processing for working port)
Here, the winning process for the operation port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 67 and 68.

  In step S4101, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (wins) the lower operation port 62a. If it is determined that a game ball has entered the lower operation port 62a, the process proceeds to step S4102, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 181 to pay out three game balls is set.

  In the subsequent step S4103, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the lower operation port 62a to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a ball has entered the lower working port 62a. Thereafter, in step S4104, information acquisition processing for storing each value such as the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter C2 is performed, and the main winning processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4101 that the game ball has not won the lower operation port 62a, the process proceeds to step S4105. In step S4105, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (wins) the right operation port 63a. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the right operation port 63a, the process proceeds to step S4105, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 181 to pay out one game ball is set. The prize ball command set in steps S4102 and S4105 is transmitted to the payout control device 181 in an external output process of a normal process described later.

  In subsequent step S4107, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has entered the right operation port 63a to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a ball has entered the right working port 63a. Thereafter, an information acquisition process is performed in step S4104, and the main winning process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in both processes of steps S4101 and S4105, that is, if there is no entry in any of the lower working port 62a and the right working port 63a, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

  Here, the information acquisition processing in step S4104 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S4201, the start hold storage number N stored in the hold number storage area FE of the hold ball storage area 632, specifically, the information acquisition process of the lower operation port 62a and the right operation port 63a is performed. It is determined whether or not the start-pending storage number N related to the pitched part that has been triggered is less than the upper limit (“4” in the present embodiment). If the start hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the start hold storage number N is less than the upper limit value, the start hold storage number N of the corresponding pitching unit is incremented by 1 in step S4202. At the same time, the total number of reservations (hereinafter referred to as the common reservation number CRN) stored in the reservation number storage area FE in step S4203 is incremented by one.

  In subsequent step S4204, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in step S4003 are stored in the free storage area area of the working port holding area RE. The first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common hold number CRN incremented by 1 in step S4202 is stored. After executing the storage process, the process advances to step S4205.

  In step S4205, the display update processing of the hold number display portions S1 and S2 of the main display unit 81 (main display portion D) is executed. In the display update process, when the current winning destination (winning destination) is the lower operating port 62a, the display of the lower operating port hold number display section S1 is updated, and the current incoming destination (winning destination) is operated to the right. In the case of the mouth 63a, the display of the right working mouth reserved number display section S2 is updated.

  The lower working port reserved number display portion S1 is configured by four LEDs, and the number of LEDs that are lit is equal to the number of held related to the lower working port 62a. When the number of reserves related to the lower operation port 62a increases due to the winning of this time, processing is performed to increase the number of LEDs that are lit accordingly. Similarly, the right-hand-operated-holding-number display unit S2 is configured by four LEDs, and the number of LEDs that are lit is equal to the number of held-up related to the right-handed operation port 63a. When the number of reserves related to the right operation port 63a increases due to the current winning, a process of increasing the number of lit LEDs is performed accordingly.

  In subsequent steps S4206 and S4207, the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 710, which are control devices on the sub-side (sub-side), recognize that the winning of the operation ports 62a and 63a has occurred, and a hold described later. A confirmation process for holding notice and a setting process for holding command, which are processes for executing a notice, are executed, and this information acquisition process is terminated. Note that the hold command includes information on which of the lower operation opening 62a and the right operation opening 63a is based on winning a winning part.

  The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S4207 is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 710 in the external output process of the normal process described later. The display control device 710 receives the hold command and executes a process for changing the display in the hold number display area in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S4301 to S4306 is executed as a periodic processing of a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update processing of steps S4308 and S4309 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, first, an external signal output process is executed in step S4301. In the external signal output process in step S4301, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 181. Further, when various commands such as a production command such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, a hold command, and a shift command described later are set, the command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143. .

  Next, in step S4302, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 604.

  In a succeeding step S4303, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, jackpot determination, symbol variation display setting by the symbol display device 75, display control of the main display unit 81, and the like are performed.

  After executing the game times control process of step S4303, the process proceeds to step S4304, and the game state transition process is executed. Although details will be described later, the gaming state shifts to an opening / closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like by this gaming state transition processing. Details of the game turn control process in step S4303 and the game state transition process in step S4304 will be described later.

  In a succeeding step S4305, a power combination support process for controlling the driving of the power combination 71 provided in the right-hand actuating ball entering portion 63 is executed. In this electronic combination support process, an electronic combination release lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric combination 71 using the numerical information acquired from the open random number counter C4 stored in the electronic combination storage area 633 of the RAM 604. In addition, when the electrified open state is won, an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 71 is executed. In addition, display control of the through gate display unit DS is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric role release lottery.

  As already described, the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set as the modes of support by the electric accessory 71, and the transition to one of the support modes is performed in the gaming state transition process. After this processing, the high frequency support mode is set when the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, and the low frequency support mode is set when the flag is not set.

  In the electronic role support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. In the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 71 is in the open state is set more frequently when the electrified open state is won than in the low-frequency support mode. Set a longer opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 71 occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is started after one open state is completed. The closing time until is set to be shorter than one opening time.

  Incidentally, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604.

  Thereafter, in step S4306, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is turned on once every predetermined period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that a launch permission signal is input from the power supply / launch controller 191. Energize. Thereby, a game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

  In subsequent step S4307, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not one cycle (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing.

  That is, in step S4308, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 604. In step S4309, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when those counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 604.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S4301 to S4306 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

(Game control process)
Next, the game times control processing in step S4303 will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIGS.

  In the game turn control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. If it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the process after step S4402, that is, the game times starting process at steps S4403 to S4405 and the game time progression process at steps S4406 to S4409 are not executed. The control process ends.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S4402 whether the game is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operation port display portions D1 and D2 of the main display unit 81 are in a variable display or a fixed display. If the game is not being played, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S4403 to S4405. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S4403, it is determined whether or not the total number of start holding balls (common holding number CRN) is “0”. The case where the common holding number CRN is “0” means that the holding information is not stored in the holding ball storage area 632. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is.

  On the other hand, if the common hold number CRN is not “0”, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 632 in step S4404 for variable display is executed. Further, in step S4405, the game start control process is terminated after executing the fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display of the working port display portions D1 and D2 and the fluctuation display of the symbol display device 75 in the main display unit 81. .

  Here, the data setting process in step S4404 and the change start process in step S4405 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S4404 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S4501, the start pending storage number N stored in the pending number storage area FE and the common pending number CRN which are the targets of the current setting process are decremented by one. In subsequent step S4502, the data stored in first area Ra1 of reservation area RE is moved to execution area AE.

  Thereafter, in step S4503, a process of shifting data stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra8 (that is, the hold information) of the hold area RE is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 to the lower side, and clears the data in the first area Ra1 and also changes the second area Ra2 to the second area. 1 area Ra1, 3rd area Ra3-> 2nd area Ra2, 4th area Ra4-> 3rd area Ra3, 5th area Ra5-> 4th area Ra4, 6th area Ra6-> 5th area Ra5, 7th area Ra7-> 7th area The data in each area is shifted, such as 6 area Ra6, 8th area Ra8 → 7th area Ra7.

  In a succeeding step S4504, a shift command which is information for causing the notification / production control device 143 to recognize that the data of the reservation area RE has been shifted is set. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step S4504 is transmitted to the display control device 710 via the notification / effect control device 143 in step S4301 in the normal process (FIG. 69). By receiving the shift command, the display control device 710 executes a process for changing the display in the hold number display area Da for the operation port, which will be described later, in accordance with the decrease in the hold number.

(Variation start processing)
Next, the variation start process of step S4405 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the change start process, first, in step S4601, a success / failure determination process for determining whether or not the hold information referred to in the current change start process corresponds to the big win is executed. Specifically, the information acquired from the information for determining the jackpot among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information updated by the hit random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, when the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode, referring to the winning table for the low probability mode stored in the winning table storage area 621 of the ROM 603, the grasped information becomes the information corresponding to the big hit winning. If the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode, the information obtained by referring to the winning table for the high probability mode stored in the winning table storage area 621 of the ROM 603 is a big hit. Identify whether it is included in the information corresponding to the winning.

  In the subsequent step S4602, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in step S4601 is a result corresponding to the big win. If the result corresponds to the big win, the type determination process is executed in step S4603.

  In the type determination process, the information acquired from the information for type determination among the information stored in the execution area AE, that is, the information updated from the information updated by the hit type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area 622 of the ROM 603, it is specified whether or not the type-determining information obtained is included in the information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, when the hold information corresponds to the entry into the lower operation port 62a, the distribution table for the lower operation port 62a is referred to, and the hold information corresponds to the entry into the right operation port 63a. If it is, the type determination is performed with reference to the distribution table for the right operation port 63a.

  In the subsequent step S4604, based on the information specified in the type determination processing in step S4603, it is determined whether or not the type of the big hit of this time is a probable change big win result (16R probability change big win result, 4R probability change big win result). If it is the probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for probability variation jackpot is executed in step S4605, and if it is not the probability variation jackpot result, stop result setting processing for normal jackpot is executed in step S4606. If it is determined in step S4602 that it is not a big win, a stop result setting process for losing is executed in step S4607. The probability variation jackpot result is roughly divided into a 16R probability variation jackpot result and a 4R probability variation jackpot result. When the probability variation jackpot result is obtained, whether the 16R probability variation jackpot result or the 4R probability variation jackpot result is determined by the above-described distribution.

  In each stop result setting process in steps S4605 to S4607, the information on the pattern form to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 81 is referred to the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 603. The specified information is stored in the RAM 604. Further, in steps S4605 and S4606, information for specifying in the MPU 602 that the result of determining whether or not the current game time is a probable big hit result or a normal big hit result is stored in various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604. Specifically, the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in step S4605, and the normal jackpot flag is stored in step S4606.

  After executing any one of steps S4605 to S4607, in step S4608, a variable display time setting process is executed.

(Variable display time setting process)
In the variable display time setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 73, first, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not the winning lottery is won. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the probable big hit flag or the normal big hit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4701, that is, if the result of the above-mentioned lottery is a result of losing, the process proceeds to step S4702. In step S4702, it is determined whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 75 in the current game round. Specifically, if the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of reach, an affirmative determination is made in step S4702 as the occurrence of reach display. When specifying the presence or absence of reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 603 is referred to.

  If an affirmative determination is made in either step S4701 or step S4702, the process proceeds to step S4703, and this time with reference to the reach generation change display time table stored in the change display time table storage area 623 of the ROM 603. Fluctuation display time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS or the like is acquired, and in the subsequent step S4704, the fluctuation display time information is provided in a fluctuation display time counter area (fluctuation display time measuring means provided in various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604). ). Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the reach display is executed when the result of the lottery win is a jackpot winning result or when the result of the same lottery is a missed result and the lottery for generating the reach is won. ing.

  Here, the reach display is provided with a normal reach display and a super reach display which have different display modes. The variable display time information corresponding to each of the normal reach display and the super reach display is set in the variable display time table for reach generation. By referring to the table, the variable display time information corresponding to each reach display is set. To be acquired. Regarding the determination of the type of reach display, a table is provided in which the type of reach display corresponds to the value of the variation type counter CS. By referring to the table, the value of the current variation type counter CS is determined. The corresponding reach display is determined.

  More specifically, the reach generation variation display time table corresponds to the jackpot type. Specifically, the variable display time is set so that the combination of specific symbols can be stopped in the case of a probable jackpot result, and the combination of non-specific symbols can be stopped in the case of a normal jackpot result. In addition, the variable display time is set.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4702, the value of the current variation type counter CS is referred to with reference to the reach non-occurrence variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 623 in step S4705. In step S4706, the variable display time information is set in the variable display time counter area. Thereafter, the setting process ends.

  The variable display time information when no reach occurs is set so that the variable display time is shortened as the number of common hold counts CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of the common pending number CRN may be used, and the variable display time may be set shorter as the number of the common pending number CRN is smaller. . Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the non-reach time is selected so that the shorter variable display time is selected compared to the situation where the number of pending information is the same as in the situation where the low frequency support mode. Although the generation variation display time table is set, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation display time may be the same, or may be opposite to the above relationship. Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the variable display time at the time of reach occurrence, and the variable display time that is easily selected and the variable display time that is difficult to select are different at the time of jackpot winning and out of reach. It is good also as a structure. Also, a variation display time table for probability variation jackpot, a variation display time table for normal jackpot, a variation display time table for outreach, and a variation display time table for complete losing may be set individually. As described above, the variation display time for each game time is determined by using the presence / absence of reach, the type of reach display, the number of hold information, the value of the variation type counter CS, and the like as parameters.

  Returning to the description of the change start process (FIG. 72), after the change display time setting process is executed in step S4608, a change start command and a type command are set in step S4609. The change start command includes information on presence / absence of reach and information on change display time. The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes, as game result information, information on probability variation jackpot results, information on normal jackpot results, information on miss results, and the like.

  The variation start command and type command set in step S4609 are transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S4301 in the normal process (FIG. 69). Based on the received change start command and type command, the notification / production control device 143 determines the light emission pattern of the lamp unit 26 and the sound output pattern from the speaker unit 29 in the game time, and the content of the determined production. The lamp unit 26 and the speaker unit 29 are controlled so as to be executed. Further, the notification / production control device 143 transmits the change start command and the type command to the display control device 710 while maintaining the information form. In the display control device 710, based on the received variation start command and type command, the symbol display device 75 determines the variation display pattern in the symbol display device 75 in the game time, and the determined variation display pattern is executed. 75 is displayed and controlled. Thereafter, in step S710, the variation display of the pattern is started on the corresponding one of the operation port display portions D1 and D2 of the main display unit 81, and then the variation start processing is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 70), when the main display unit 81 is in the variable display mode, the game times progress process of steps S4406 to S4409 is executed. In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S4406, it is determined whether or not the variation display time of the current game time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 604 is “0”. The value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (FIG. 73) as described above. The set value of the variable display time information is decremented (subtracted) every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 66) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S4407. In the variable display process, the display mode of the corresponding one of the operation port display portions D1 and D2 of the main display unit 81 is changed. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished.

  If the variable display time has elapsed, the variable end process is executed in step S4408. In the variation end process, the information stored in the RAM 604 in any of the above steps S4405 to S4407 is specified, and the input corresponding to the input is performed so that the pattern corresponding to the information is stopped and displayed on the display unit for the ball entrance unit. Controls the sphere display.

  In a succeeding step S4409, a change end command is set. Then, this game times control process is complete | finished. The variation end command set in step S4409 is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 in step S4301 in the normal process (FIG. 69). The notification / production control device 143 transmits the received change end command to the display control device 710 while maintaining the information form. The display control device 710 receives and displays the change end command, and finally displays (final stop display) the combination of the final stop symbols in the game times.

(Game state transition processing)
Next, the gaming state transition processing in step S4304 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

  In the game state transition process, first, in step S4801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S4802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the pattern in the main display unit 81 (specifically, the display unit for the entrance part) of one game time is finished. If it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S4803 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not either the normal jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 604. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, in step S4804, the round number counter RC provided in the various counter areas 634 of the RAM 604 is set to a value determined according to the jackpot type, specifically, Set “16” or “4”. The round number counter RC is a counter for counting the number of times the special winning opening 311 is opened. Thereafter, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is in the opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S4801, and control proceeds to step S4805. In step S4805, a big prize opening / closing process is executed. In the big prize opening / closing process, when the big prize opening 311 is closed, the variable prize driving unit 451 is set in the driving state on condition that the round number counter RC is “1” or more. The mouth 311 is opened. Further, when the grand prize winning opening 311 is being opened, the variable prize driving is performed on condition that a predetermined time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning prize opening 311 or a predetermined number of game balls have been won. The driving state of the part 451 is stopped, and the special winning opening 311 is closed. Note that the flow path switching member 316 built in the upper variable winning device 64 operates in a predetermined round during the opening / closing execution mode, but the details of the movement are the same as in the first embodiment. Description is omitted.

  In a succeeding step S4806, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter RC is “0”. If the value of the round number counter RC is not “0”, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round number counter RC is “0”, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S4807.

  In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, when the probability variation jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 604, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the high probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability mode and high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win is won. Further, when the normal jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 604, the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode is terminated when the number of game times continues 100 times, and thereafter, the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode.

  Then, in step S4808, after executing the opening / closing execution mode termination process, the gaming state transition process is terminated. In the opening / closing execution mode end processing, the stored flag is erased from the normal jackpot flag or the probability variation jackpot flag.

(Regarding the electrical configuration relating to the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 710)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 75, the electrical configuration relating to the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 710 will be supplementarily described.

  An MPU 652 is mounted on a notification / production control board 651 provided in the notification / production control device 143. The MPU 652 includes a ROM 653 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 652 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 653 is executed. A certain RAM 654 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 653 and the RAM 654 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 652, and each may be configured as a separate chip. The same applies to MPUs of other control devices.

  The MPU 652 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 652, and the game time control commands (game time control information) such as the change start command, the type command, and the change end command already explained from the main control device 162 are used. Receive. Also, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command or a hold command, and an open / close execution mode command (open / close execution mode information) such as an opening command or an ending command are received.

  As described above, the lamp units 26 to 28, the speaker unit 29, and the display control device 710 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 652. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification / production control device 143 are transmitted to the display control device 710 while maintaining the information form as it is.

  The display control device 710 includes a display control board 711 on which an MPU 712 that is an element in which a program ROM 713 and a work RAM 714 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 715, a character ROM 716, and a video RAM 717 are mounted. It has. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 713 and the work RAM 714 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 712, and each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 712 of the display control device 710 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification / production control device 143 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 715 (specifically Execute internal command generation for VDP 715. More specifically, the MPU 712 executes a process for specifying a variable display pattern of each game time in the symbol display device 75 based on a command transmitted from the notification / production control device 143 and a process related to a hold notice described later. And the drawing process for the VDP 715 is executed corresponding to the processing result. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75.

  The program ROM 713 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 712 and fixed value data, and JPEG format image data for a background image is also stored and held. The work RAM 714 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like that are used when the MPU 712 executes various programs. These work data, flags, etc. are stored in each area of the work RAM 714.

  The VDP 715 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 75. Since the VDP 715 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 715 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 715 adjusts the timings of the MPU 712, the video RAM 717, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 717 from the character ROM 716 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 75.

  The character ROM 716 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 75. The character ROM 716 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  In addition, in the character ROM 716, as part of the above data, image data (holding icon MP) to be displayed in the holding display area NE of the symbol display device 75 and image data for partition frames to be displayed in the execution target display area Db. Is stored, and an image data storage area 772 for a notice effect storing image data to be displayed when a notice effect described later is executed. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 716 and share the image data and the like with each character ROM 716. Further, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 713 is stored in the character ROM 716.

  The video RAM 717 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 75, and the display content of the symbol display device 75 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 717. The video RAM 717 is provided with a holding display area 781 and an execution display area 782 corresponding to the holding display area NE.

  In the holding display area 781, the first unit area to the eighth unit area are set so as to correspond one-to-one with the first area Ra1 to the eighth area Ra8 in the holding area RE for the working port. In each unit hold display area Da1 to Da8 of the hold number display area Da on the display screen 75a, the hold icon MP is displayed according to the hold display information (data) written in each unit area. In the unit hold display areas Da1 to Da8 corresponding to unit areas for which no data is set, no image is displayed or a background image on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is displayed.

  The execution display area 782 corresponds to the execution area AE. In the execution target display area Db on the display screen 75a, the hold icon MP is displayed according to the data written in the execution display area 782. When no data is set, a background image on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is displayed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 76 to FIG. 77, the configuration relating to the symbol variation display of each game time and the contents of the variation display will be described. 76 and 77 are schematic diagrams for explaining display contents on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. FIG.

  The character ROM 716 of the display control device 710 has nine types of main symbol data (see FIGS. 76 (a) to (i)) with numbers “1” to “9” and no numbers. Sub-symbol data (see FIG. 76 (j)) is stored in advance.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (a), on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 of the upper, middle and lower stages are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. On the display screen 75a, the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

  In the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the display screen 75a is configured such that 3 symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of 9 symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be. Further, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set on the display screen 75a. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols with the same numerals) is formed on any effective line. When the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished in the state of being played, the big hit video is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the probability variation jackpot result.

  In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). 2 symbol rows), the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a third symbol row (or third symbol row).

  Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols”, and if a probable jackpot result occurs, for example, the same specific symbols The combination of is stopped and displayed. In addition, the main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a normal jackpot result occurs, for example, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Is done.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 75 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variable display in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol column, Can be appropriately changed. For example, a plurality of symbol sequences may be set to be arranged side by side, and the direction of symbol variation display in the symbol sequence may be set to the vertical direction.

  On the display screen 75a, a hold display area NE is set in a portion below the variable display area ME having the variable display area of the upper symbol row, the variable display area of the middle symbol, and the variable display area of the lower symbol. ing. In the holding display area NE, the holding number display area divided in such a way that unit holding display areas Da1 to Da8 of the same number as the maximum holding number when the game ball wins the operation ports 62a and 63a are arranged in the left-right direction. Da is provided.

  Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when a game ball enters the lower operating port 62a is 4, and the maximum number of stored balls when the game ball enters the right operating port 63a is four. Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, a total of eight pieces of hold information are stored so as to be in the winning order to the lower working port 62a and the right working port 63a. Correspondingly, in the hold number display area Da, the first unit hold display area Da1, the second unit hold display area Da2, the third unit hold display area Da3, the fourth unit hold display area Da4, the fifth unit hold display. An area Da5, a sixth unit hold display area Da6, a seventh unit hold display area Da7, and an eighth unit hold display area Da8 are set. A hold icon MP is displayed as a predetermined hold display image in these unit hold display areas.

  For example, when the number of holds is 0 when the game ball wins the operation ports 62a and 63a, that is, when the number of holds (total number of holds) becomes 1 by the current winning, the first unit hold display area Da1. The hold icon MP is displayed only. In the case where the number of holds becomes four by winning the game balls in the operation ports 62a and 63a, the hold icon MP is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 to the fourth unit hold display area Da4. It has become. Note that FIG. 77 (b) illustrates the case where the number of reservations is three.

  In the hold display area NE, a hold icon MP corresponding to a game time to be executed (running) is arranged next to the hold number display area Da (specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1). An execution target display area Db to be displayed is provided. In the present embodiment, the execution target display area Db is arranged on the left side of the reserved number display area Da, but the positional relationship and the like are arbitrary. For example, the execution target display area Db may be arranged on the right side of the reserved number display area Da.

  When the game round is ended and the next game round is started, the hold icon MP displayed in the hold count display area Da (specifically, the first unit hold display area Da1) is shifted to the execution target display area Db ( Move). When there is another hold icon MP being displayed in the hold number display area Da, the hold icon MP is close to the execution target display area Db (neighboring) in the unit hold display area. Shift to. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, the side close to the execution target display area Db is expressed as “downstream side”, and the side opposite to the execution target display area Db is expressed as “upstream side”.

  As already described, in the present embodiment, the outline of the variation display mode of the symbols on the display screen 75a is specified by the notification / production control device 143 with reference to the command from the main control device 162, and based on the specification result. The details of the variable display mode are determined by the display control device 710. Specifically, the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143 executes a variable display control process as part of a periodic process that is activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec). An outline of the aspect is specified. Here, the variable display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Variable display control processing)
In the variation display control process, it is first determined in step S4901 whether or not a game is being played, that is, whether or not the symbol display device 75 is executing a variation display or a final display of symbols for one game. If it is determined that the game is not being played, the process proceeds to step S4902, and it is determined whether or not the change start command transmitted from the main controller 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4902, the present variation display control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4902, the fluctuation display control process is terminated after a fluctuation start process described later is executed in step S4903.

  Returning to the description of step S4901, if an affirmative determination is made in step S4901, that is, if it is determined that the game is being played, the process proceeds to step S4904. In step S4904, it is determined whether a change end command transmitted from main controller 162 has been received. If a negative determination is made in step S4904, the variation display control process is terminated after the mid-variation process is executed in step S4905. The changing process is a process of executing various effects and changing the determined effects in the game times started by the change start process.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S4904, the process proceeds to step S4906, and after the variation end processing is executed in step S4906, the variation display control process is terminated. In the variation end processing, the symbol variation display and the effect being executed are terminated (determined and stopped) so as to correspond to the hold information related to the game times. In this process, the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 are driven and controlled to produce an effect corresponding to the fixed stop. Then, after the confirmation command is output to the display control device 710, the process for ending the change ends. The MPU 712 of the display control device 710 controls the symbol display device 75 to confirm and stop the symbol based on the received confirmation command.

(Variation start processing)
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 79, supplementary description will be given of the variation start processing in step S4903. The variation start process is a process for starting an effect for game rotation based on the reception of the variation start command transmitted from the main controller 162. In the change start process, a reach display, a hold notice effect, which will be described later, and the like are set as effects for game times. Here, the process related to the setting of reach display will be described, and the process related to the setting of the hold notice effect will be described later.

  In the variation start process, first, the variation start command received this time is read in step S5001, and information on the presence / absence of reach and variation display time information are specified from the command. As described above, when a change start command is transmitted from main controller 162, a type command is also transmitted. In step S5001, the type command received together with the variation start command received this time is read, and game result information such as information on the probability variation jackpot result, information on the normal jackpot result, or information on the miss result is specified from the command. In step S5001, from the above-identified information, information on whether or not the jackpot is won, information on the type of jackpot if the jackpot is won, information on whether or not reach occurs if the jackpot is not won, and the variable display time Is stored in the register of the MPU 652.

  In subsequent step S5002, based on the information grasped in step S5001, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game time started this time is a game result corresponding to the jackpot result. If the result is a jackpot result, that is, if the result is a probabilistic jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, in step S5003, a jackpot effect setting process is executed.

  In the jackpot effect setting process, the stop result of the jackpot symbol is determined (stop result determination process is performed). In the stop result determination process, when it is a probabilistic jackpot result, the stop result in which the combination of the same specific symbols (main symbols with odd numbers) is established on one active line L1 to L5, Determined as a stop result. In the case of a normal jackpot result, a stop result in which a combination of the same non-specific symbols (main symbols with an even number) is established on one active line L1 to L5 is used as a stop result of this game. decide.

  The types of main symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 that are stopped and displayed when the jackpot result is obtained are randomly determined by lottery or the like. The final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 653 stores the valid lines L1 to L5 and address information, and the final stop line determined by the above processing is the final stop line provided in the RAM 654. It is stored as address information in the line address storage area. At this time, a process for storing the determined stop result information in the stop result address storage area is executed. In the following description, the address information of the stop result determined by the various stop result determination processes is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 654.

  Also, in the jackpot effect setting process, the variable display mode of the jackpot symbol is determined (variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) is performed). As already explained, when a jackpot result is obtained, the result is notified through a reach display. In the variable display mode determination process for reach display, the variable display pattern table for reach display stored in the various table areas of the ROM 653 is acquired, and the variable display time of the variable start command received this time and the game in the type command An effect pattern of normal reach display or super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. Further, a process for storing the address information of the determined variation display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654 is executed. In the variation display mode determination process described below, the corresponding variation display pattern table is acquired from the variation display pattern table storage area of the ROM 653 to determine the effect pattern corresponding to the variation display time and the game result. Then, the address information of the effect pattern determined in the effect pattern determination process is stored in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 654.

  If it is determined in step S5002 that the result is not a jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S5004. In step S5004, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. If reach occurs, the process advances to step S5005 to execute reach setting processing for reach generation. In the production setting process for generating reach, the outline of the production and the combination of symbols to be finally stopped are determined. About the former, since it is the same as that of the process of said step S5003, description is used. Since this process corresponds to a missed reach, a stop symbol is determined so as not to have a symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result. That is, the stop result in which the combination of the reach and reach symbols is established on one of the effective lines L1 to L5 is determined as the current stop result. In this case, the types of combinations of outreach symbols and the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like. In this determination, the same symbol combination is not formed on any of the effective lines L1 to L5, and the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 that is the same as the symbol forming the reach line is set to the reach line. The stop result on the effective line is determined so that the final stop is made at the stop position shifted before or after. Thereafter, a process of storing information on the determined stop result in the stop result address storage area is executed.

  If it is determined in step S5004 that no reach has occurred, the process advances to step S5006. In step S5006, the outline of the effect for complete removal and the combination of symbols to be finally stopped are determined. Since this processing corresponds to complete losing, the stop symbol is determined such that the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result is not formed.

  After executing any one of steps S5003, S5005, and S5006, the process proceeds to step S5007. In step S5007, a process of outputting the command including the stop result and the effect pattern information determined in step S5003, step S5005, and step S5006 to the display control device 710 as a stop result command and a pattern command is executed. Based on the received stop result command and pattern command, the MPU 712 of the display control device 710 performs display control of the symbol display device 75 to execute an effect in the current game round.

  After the process of step S5007 is executed, in the subsequent step S5008, a process for starting an effect for game times is executed, and then the process for starting variation is terminated. Specifically, based on the effect pattern determined in steps S5003, S5005, and S5006, drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started, and an effect for game times is started.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the variable display mode of symbols displayed on the symbol display device 75 (display screen 75a) based on FIG. FIG. 80A is a schematic diagram showing the types of variation display modes, and FIG. 80B is a schematic diagram showing an overview of each variation display mode.

(Variation display mode)
As shown in FIG. 80 (a), there are five symbol variation display modes executed on the display screen 75a: complete detachment, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. Separated. About each of these variable display modes, the variable display time is set to be different, and the outline of the variable display mode for each game time is grasped based on the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main controller 162. It is possible.

  Specifically, “3 sec to 8 sec” is set for the fluctuation display time that is completely out of place (a difference is set according to the number of holds), “10 sec” is set for the fluctuation display time for normal reach A, and the fluctuation display time for normal reach B Is about 15 seconds longer than the fluctuation display time of normal reach A, the fluctuation display time of super reach A is "16 sec" longer than the fluctuation display time of normal reach A and B, and the fluctuation display time of super reach B is super reach. “17 sec”, which is longer than the fluctuation display time of A, and “18 sec”, which is longer than the fluctuation display times of the other super reach A and B, for the fluctuation display time of the super reach C. For example, when the information regarding the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is “15 sec”, the notification / production control device 143 knows that the normal reach B should be executed. .

In the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, it is easy to select Super Reach C> Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach B> Normal Reach A. Outgoing> Normal reach A> Normal reach B> Super reach A> Super reach B>
The structure is easy to select in the order of super reach C. In other words, the winning expectation degree for jackpot is set higher as the variable display time becomes longer.

  Here, the fluctuation display mode of the normal reach A and B will be described with reference to FIG. When the normal reach A or B is selected, first, the variable display (scroll display) of all the symbol sequences that are stopped is started, and then the symbol variable display is terminated in the upper symbol column Z1 (stop) In addition, in the lower symbol row Z3, the symbol variation display is terminated (stopped display). In a state where the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed in this manner, the reach symbol is displayed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 77). Is formed. Then, reach display (reach change display) is performed by performing change display of the middle symbol row Z2 under the situation where the reach line is formed. After reaching the reach display, the variable display is terminated by stopping and displaying the middle symbol row Z2. Then, the fact that the symbol that is the same as the symbol that constitutes the reach display stops on the reach line is informed that the jackpot has been won, and the other symbols on the reach line stop to win the jackpot It will be notified that it is not. In this way, the combination of symbols that are finally stopped and displayed is maintained as they are for a predetermined period. In other words, the current game time continues until the stop display period elapses, and the transition to the next game time is permitted after the stop display period elapses.

  In the present embodiment, the difference in the fluctuation display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is ensured by setting the difference in the fluctuation display time of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach line is formed. The method of setting the difference is arbitrary. For example, by setting a difference in the time from when the variable display is started to when the reach line is formed, the difference in the variable display time can be secured.

  Next, the variation display mode of super reach A, B, C will be described based on the above-described variation display mode of normal reach A, B. As shown in FIGS. 80 (b2) to 80 (b4), the super reach A, B, and C forms the above reach line through the same process as the normal reach A and B. And after forming a reach line, it is the structure which performs a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character as a moving image together with the fluctuation display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, after a reach line is formed in Super Reach A, a character imitating a fairy is displayed at the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME). After the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed at the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME). In Super Reach C, the reach line is formed, A character imitating a girl is displayed at the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME).

(About hold notice)
In the present embodiment, the effect related to the hold notice suggesting the content of the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 has a predetermined probability before the game times related to the hold information are started. It is configured to be executed in. An effect corresponding to the hold information that has not yet been selected for the lottery is executed at a timing prior to the game times related to the hold information, so that it corresponds to the game times that are currently in progress for the player. In addition to games that check the lottery result of the hold information, a game that confirms or predicts the result when the hold information that becomes the lottery target later becomes the lottery target according to the content of the above-mentioned production is added, Diversification will be achieved. Thereby, the attention degree to a game can be raised.

  This hold notice is executed in conjunction with the change display of the symbols described above in the change display area ME of the display screen 75a, and the change of the hold display mode in the hold display area NE of the display screen 75a. It is divided roughly into what is executed. Among these, for the hold notice executed in the hold display area NE, the hold display on the display screen 75a is used. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 81A and the schematic diagram of FIG. 81B, the configuration as a premise of the hold notice, specifically, the hold display control executed by the MPU 712 of the display control device 710 Will be described (holding display control command handling process). The pending display control command handling process is a process executed as part of a periodic process that is activated at a predetermined cycle (2 msec in the present embodiment).

(Processing for holding display control command)
As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in the hold display control command handling process, first, a hold notice effect setting process is executed in step S5101. Details of the setting process for the hold notice effect will be described later. In a succeeding step S5102, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received from the main control device 162 via the notification / production control device 143. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5102, in step S5103, 1 is added to the value of the hold number counter (holding storage number SN) provided in the various counter areas of the work RAM 714. Thereafter, the process advances to step S5104 to execute the hold display addition process, and the hold display control command response process is terminated.

  The reserved storage number SN corresponds to the hold display area 781 of the video RAM 717. When the display setting of the hold icon MP is performed in the hold display addition processing, the hold display information (specifically, the hold display data 78 is stored in the hold image data storage area 771 in the unit area corresponding to the hold storage number SN in the hold display area 781. The address of the reserved image) is set. In each unit hold display area Da1 to Da8 of the hold number display area Da on the display screen 75a, the hold icon MP is additionally displayed according to the data written in each unit area.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (b1), the hold icon MP is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 and the second unit hold display area Da2, that is, the hold storage number SN = “2”. When the hold command is received under the situation, the hold storage number SN is changed from “2” to “3”, and the hold display information is set in the third unit area of the hold display area 781. . As a result, as shown in FIG. 81 (b2), the hold icon MP is displayed in the third unit hold display area Da3.

  Returning to the description of step S5102, if a negative determination is made in step S5102, the process proceeds to step S5105. In step S5105, it is determined whether or not a shift command is received from main controller 162 via notification / effect control apparatus 143. If a negative determination is made in step S5105, the on-hold display control command handling process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S5105, the process proceeds to step S5106. In step S5106, 1 is subtracted from the value of the holding number counter (holding storage number SN) provided in the holding counter area of the work RAM 714.

  In the subsequent step S5107, a shift process is executed, and this pending display control command response process is terminated. In the shift process, the hold display information set in the first unit area of the hold display area 781 is moved to the execution display area 782, and is set in the first unit area to the eighth unit area of the hold display area 781. The held hold display information is sequentially shifted to the lower area side.

  Specifically, the hold display information of the first unit area is moved to the execution display area 782, and the second unit area → first unit area, third unit area → second unit area, fourth unit area → third The unit area, the fifth unit area → the fourth unit area, the sixth unit area → the fifth unit area, the seventh unit area → the sixth unit area, the eighth unit area → the seventh unit area, etc. Shift hold display information.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 81 (b1), in a situation where the hold icon MP is displayed in the first unit hold display area Da1 and the second unit hold display area Da2, that is, the number of hold memories = “2”. When the shift command is received under the circumstances, the number of reserved memories is changed from “2” to “1”. Accordingly, the hold display information in the execution display area 782 is erased, the hold display information in the first unit area is in the execution display area 782, the hold display information in the second unit area is in the first unit area, The unit area hold display information is shifted to the second unit area. As a result, as shown in FIG. 81 (b3), the hold icon MP is displayed in the execution target display area Db and the first unit hold display area Da1.

  Here, the holding image data storage area 771 stores a plurality of holding icons MP of different colors (specifically, four types of white, blue, yellow, and red) as a holding image group. The address is different. When setting the hold display information, the notification / effect control device 143 determines which color to display in accordance with the presence / absence of the hold notice described above, and this information is determined by the notification / effect control device. The notification / production control device 143 is incorporated in the hold command when passing through 143. That is, the display control device 710 grasps which color the address corresponding to is set as the hold display information by reading the information about the color from the received hold command.

  Next, processing related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 will be described. As the processing related to the hold notice, the above-described confirmation process for the hold notice (step S4206 in FIG. 68) and the hold command setting process (step S4207 in FIG. 68) are set. 66 (see FIG. 66), which is set as part of the process (see FIG. 67), specifically, is executed as part of the information acquisition process in step S4104. That is to say, the confirmation process for holding notice and the setting process for holding command are executed based on winning in the operation ports 62a and 63a. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 82, the confirmation process for holding notice will be described.

(Confirmation process for hold notice)
In the confirmation process for the hold notice, in step S5201, the start hold storage number N and the common hold number CRN stored in the hold number storage area FE of the hold ball storage area 632 are read, and information on the hold number is stored in the MPU 602. Store in register. Thereafter, in steps S5202 to S5206, it is confirmed whether or not the winning information is included in the hold information acquired by the current winning.

  Specifically, first, in step S5202, the information for jackpot determination among the hold information acquired in step S4204 based on the current winning to the operation ports 62a and 63a, that is, the value of the acquired hit random number counter C1. To figure out.

  In a succeeding step S5203, it is determined whether or not the low probability mode is set. Specifically, by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 635 of the RAM 604, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the low probability mode. If the mode is the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S5204, and the information for determining the big hit (the value of the hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S5202 with reference to the low probability mode success / failure table is information corresponding to the big win Determine if it is in the group. In the case of the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S5205, and the jackpot determination information (value of the hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S5202 is referred to as a jackpot winning by referring to the high probability mode success / failure table. Specify whether it is included in the set information.

  After step S5204 or step S5205, the process proceeds to step S5206, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination information (value of the hit random number counter C1) grasped in step S5202 corresponds to the jackpot winning. If it corresponds to the jackpot winning, the jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S5207, and the confirmation process for the hold notice is ended as it is.

  In the process of step S5207, the information for determining the jackpot type out of the hold information acquired in step S4204 based on the current winning, that is, the value of the acquired hit type counter C2 is grasped, and the distribution table is referred to. The jackpot type is determined. The information stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S5207 includes information related to the jackpot type.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5206, the process proceeds to step S5208. In step S5208, the information for determining the reach reach out of the hold information acquired in step S4204 based on the current winning in the operating ports 62a and 63a, that is, the value of the acquired reach random number counter C3 is grasped.

  In the following step S5209, the reach determination table (reach determination information group) stored in the reach determination table storage area (reach determination information group storage means) of the ROM 603 is referred to, and the reach grasped in step S5208 is determined. It is specified whether the information for determination (the value of the reach random number counter C3) is included in the information set as the reach winning.

  After executing the processing of step S5209, the process proceeds to step S5210, and it is determined whether or not the reach determination information (the value of the reach random number counter C3) grasped in step S5208 corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If it corresponds to the occurrence of reach, in step S5211, the reach occurrence information is stored in the register of the MPU 602, and then this confirmation process is terminated. On the other hand, if it does not correspond to the occurrence of reach, this confirmation process is terminated as it is.

(Hold command setting process)
Next, the hold command setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the hold command setting process, first, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not jackpot information is stored in the register of the MPU 602. It is determined whether or not the information is identified as corresponding to the jackpot winning. If jackpot information is stored, the process advances to step S5302 to set a jackpot handling pending command. Note that the above-described command setting and various command settings described later are performed by storing command information in a command setting area provided in the RAM 604. The big hit correspondence pending command includes information related to the big hit type.

  On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, if it is determined that jackpot information is not stored in the register of MPU 602, the process proceeds to step S5303, and whether or not reach occurrence information is stored in the register of MPU 602. It is determined whether or not the information for reach determination is specified as corresponding to the occurrence of reach in the confirmation processing for the previous hold notice (FIG. 82). If the reach occurrence information is stored, a release reach hold command is set in step S5304. If reach reach information is not stored, a complete release support hold command is set in step S5305.

  When the hold command is set in steps S5302, S5304, and S5305, the change display time is determined with reference to the value of the change type counter CS and the like, and information related to the change display time is stored in the hold command. . In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table is referred to in the same manner as the variable display time setting process shown in step S4608. The hold command set in this way is transmitted to the display control device 710, and the display control device 710 can grasp the variation display mode of the symbol based on the hold command. Note that, as described above, in the case of complete detachment, the variable display time can be changed according to the number of the hold information stored when starting the game times related to the hold information. Therefore, when setting a completely out of correspondence hold command, a temporary setting of the variable display time is performed.

  After executing any of the command setting processes of Step S5302, Step S5304, and Step S5305, in Step S5306, a process of setting information on the number of hold for the hold command is executed. Specifically, as the processing, the hold command information set as described above is configured as information of a plurality of bytes, and information indicating that the command is a hold command or a hold command for some of the bits. Are included, and information on the number of holds can be set.

  In step S5306, information on the number of holdings stored in the register of the MPU 602 in step S5201 in the confirmation processing for the previous holding notice (FIG. 82) is first read, and then the number of holdings in the already set holding command is read. The read information on the reserved number is stored in the information bits by an arithmetic process such as logical sum. As a result, for the hold command set in any one of steps S5302, S5304, and S5305, information for identifying the number of hold information corresponding to the hold command Will be included. After executing the process of step S5306 described in detail above, the hold command setting process is terminated.

  The hold command including the hold number information in step S5306 is transmitted to the notification / production control device 143 by the external output process in step S4301 in the next normal process (FIG. 69). The notification / production control device 143 receives the hold command and specifies that the hold information has increased. Further, the notification / production control device 143 adds information for holding notice to be described later to the holding command and transmits it to the display control device 710. The display control device 710 executes hold display, hold notice processing, and the like based on the received hold command.

  In addition, the setting method of the hold command is based on whether the display control device 710 holds the big win or not, whether or not the big hit is won, the type of the big win at that time, the reach or not when the big hit is won, etc. Any design can be used as long as it can identify the variation display mode of the symbol. For example, a combination of a jackpot corresponding pending command, a miss reach pending command, and a completely miss pending command is individually set in correspondence with the number of each pending, and in the pending command setting process, a confirmation process for pending notice ( It is also possible to select one pending command according to the confirmation result in FIG.

  Next, processing related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143 will be described. As the process related to the hold notice, a command response process for determining a command from the main control device 162 and a hold notice effect setting process for determining a hold notice form are set.

(Processing for pending commands)
In the hold command handling process, when a hold command transmitted by the main control device 162 is received, a process corresponding to information included in the received hold command is executed. The pending command handling process is executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined cycle (for example, a 2 msec cycle).

  In the pending command handling process, it is first determined whether or not a pending command has been received. The command received by the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143 is temporarily stored in the command storage area 672 of the RAM 654. The command storage area 672 is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored commands. Even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, Processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily. When determining whether or not a corresponding pending command has been received, it is determined whether or not a jackpot corresponding pending command has been received in the current read target area in the command storage area 672. It should be noted that the configuration of reading out such commands is the same in reading out other commands such as a change start command.

  If a hold command has been received, various information included in the hold command is stored in the hold information storage area 677. The hold information storage area 677 has a first area Rc1 to an eighth area Rc8, and is configured to store one hold information for each area. The hold information stored in each of the areas Rc1 to Rc8 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side when a shift command is received from the main controller 162, that is, when a game is started. Specifically, the data in the first area Rc1 is cleared and the second area Rc2 → first area Rc1, third area Rc3 → second area Rc2, fourth area Rc4 → third area Rc3. The data in each area is shifted, such as area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7. Also in the hold information storage area 677 of the notification / production control device 143, the hold information is gathered in time series regardless of the destination, similarly to the hold ball storage area 632 (specifically, the hold area RE) of the main control device 162. The configuration is memorized. Specifically, the information on the number of holds included in the command received this time is specified, and the above-mentioned various information is stored in the area corresponding to the information on the specified number of holds among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8.

  When the above-described hold command is received, the hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654, and when the shift command is received, the shift command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas 676. . Each of these flags is triggered by a setting process for the hold notice effect described below, and is erased when the setting process for the hold notice effect ends.

  In the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143, the setting process for the hold notice effect is performed based on the information stored in the hold information storage area 677. Here, the holding notice effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the setting process for holding notice effect is a process executed as part of a periodic process that is repeatedly activated at a predetermined period (for example, a period of 2 msec).

(Setting process for hold notice effect)
In the hold notice effect setting process, first, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not a hold command is received from the main control device 162. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold command reception flag is set in the various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5401, a hold command reception lottery process is executed in step S5402.

  In the lottery process related to the hold command, the lottery target of the hold notice is limited to the newly added hold information this time. In other words, among the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8 provided in the hold information storage area 677 of the RAM 654, a lottery for whether or not to hold a hold notice is performed based on information stored in the area corresponding to the hold command received this time. . This lottery is based on the stored information, whether the game times related to the hold information are big hits, whether or not reach display is performed, and if reach display is performed, the pattern is grasped, and accordingly The lottery table and the value of the lottery counter area 674 are used.

  In the lottery table storage area of the ROM 653, as a lottery table for receiving a hold command, a lottery table for big hits, a lottery table for miss normal reach A, a lottery table for miss normal reach B, a lottery table for miss super reach A In addition, a lottery table for missed super reach B, a lottery table for missed super reach C, and a lottery table for completely missed are stored.

  These various tables are set so that the winning probability increases in the order of jackpot> super reach C> super reach B> super reach A> normal reach B> normal reach A> complete miss.

  Returning to the description of step S5401, if a negative determination is made in step S5401, that is, if it is determined that a hold command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S5403. In step S5403, it is determined whether a shift command is received from main controller 162 or not. Specifically, it is determined whether a shift command reception flag is set in various flag storage areas 676 of RAM 654. If a negative determination is made in step S5403, that is, if neither a hold command nor a shift command is received, the setting process for the hold notice effect is ended as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5403, a shift command reception lottery process is executed in step S5404.

  In the lottery process related to the shift command, the lottery subject of the hold notice is all the hold information remaining after the shift. In other words, a lottery for whether or not to hold a hold notice is performed based on all the information stored in the first area Rc1 to the eighth area Rc8 provided in the hold information storage area 677 of the RAM 654. This lottery is performed individually for each piece of stored information. The lottery order (priority order) is defined to be the new order (eighth area Rc8 → seventh area Rc7 →... → first area Rc1). For example, when the common holding number CRN is “2”, the lottery is first performed based on the information stored in the second area Rc2, and the information stored in the first area Rc1 when the lottery is not won. A lottery will be performed based on the above.

  In the present embodiment, in particular, the value of the common holding number CRN is increased, so that the display time of the change in the game times corresponding to complete losing is shortened. Therefore, as described above, the new hold information is preferentially selected as a lottery object, so that it is possible to suitably ensure the period of the notice effect when the hold notice is executed.

  As for the lottery method, in the same way as when the hold command is received, whether or not the game times related to the hold information is a big hit from the stored information, whether or not reach display is performed, and when reach display is performed Is performed based on the lottery table corresponding to the pattern and the value of the lottery counter area 674.

  In the lottery table storage area of the ROM 653, as a lottery table for receiving a shift command, a lottery table for big hits, a lottery table for a miss normal reach A, a lottery table for a miss normal reach B, a lottery table for a miss super reach A In addition, a lottery table for missed super reach B, a lottery table for missed super reach C, and a lottery table for completely missed are stored.

  These various tables are set so that the winning probability increases in the order of jackpot> super reach C> super reach B> super reach A> normal reach B> normal reach A> complete miss. However, the lottery table group for receiving the shift command is set so as to reduce the probability of winning the hold notice when compared with the lottery table group for receiving the hold command. For example, when the lottery tables for jackpots are compared, the winning probability when referring to the lottery table for receiving the shift command is set lower than the winning probability when referring to the lottery table for receiving the hold command.

  However, when the value of the common hold number CRN (hold number) is smaller than the predetermined number (“4” in the present embodiment), the overall expected expectation is lower than when the hold command is received, but the common hold When the value of the number CRN (the number of holdings) is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the overall expectation of winning is set to exceed that when a holding command is received.

  In the present embodiment, in particular, when the value of the common pending number CRN exceeds the predetermined number (“4”), the degree of reduction of the variable display time in the game times corresponding to complete losing is the value of the common pending number CRN. Compared to the predetermined number (“4”) or less, it becomes larger. In this case, the game progress can be speeded up, but there is a concern that the monotony of the game progress becomes conspicuous. In this regard, with the above configuration, when the number of reservations increases and the reduction of the variable display time becomes significant, a reservation notice is likely to occur. This is preferable in order to prevent a decrease in the degree of attention to the game while speeding up the progress of the game.

  After the lottery process of step S5402 or step S5404 is executed, the process proceeds to step S5405. In step S5405, it is determined whether or not an execution condition for the hold notice effect is satisfied in the lottery processing. If a negative determination is made in step S5405, that is, if the winning is not made in steps S5402 and S5404, the setting process for the on-hold notice effect is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5405, a hold notice effect pattern determination process is executed in subsequent step S5406, and then the hold notice effect setting process is terminated.

  When it is determined that the hold notice effect is to be performed, the hold information is excluded from the lottery for the hold notice effect until the game times related to the corresponding hold information are executed. Then, the information related to the current hold notice effect is deleted when the corresponding hold information moves to the execution area.

  Here, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 85 and 86, the types of the hold notice effect (specifically, the notice effect executed in the hold display area NE) will be described.

(Type of hold notice effect)
Each hold notice effect is common in that it is configured to suggest a degree of expectation as a jackpot result by changing the display mode of the hold icon MP displayed in the hold display area NE. As the display mode (color) of the hold icon MP, four colors of white, blue, yellow, and red are set. Of these colors, white is the standard, and when the hold notice effect is executed, the hold icon MP becomes another color (blue, yellow, red).

  The color of the hold icon MP is set so that the degree of expectation that results in a jackpot result increases in the order of white <blue <yellow <red. Specifically, when a hold notice is executed with the hold icon MP corresponding to the game round that results in the jackpot result, there is a high possibility that the order of white <blue <yellow <red will be selected. On the other hand, when the hold notice is executed with the hold icon MP corresponding to the game times that are the result of losing, there is a high possibility that red <yellow <blue <white will be selected in this order.

  This hold notice effect is roughly classified into a first type notice effect and a second kind notice effect depending on the display mode (color change) of the hold icon MP. As shown in FIG. 86 (a), after the color of the hold icon MP is changed in the first type notice effect, it is maintained until the color of the hold icon becomes the corresponding game time (until the execution target display area Db is moved). Is done. On the other hand, in the second type notice effect, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), the color of the hold icon MP changes a plurality of times as the game progresses. That is, the final color change is delayed.

  For example, even when the color that finally changes is red, the color is first changed to a lower color (blue or yellow), which is less expected than that, and more expected when the hold icon MP shifts. Step up (promote) to a higher color. By using these two types of holding notice effects together, there is a possibility that even if the color has a low level of expectation, the color will change to a color with a high level of expectation until the game time is reached. Thereby, it is suppressed that the attention degree to a reservation notice production falls early.

  Note that the color of the hold icon MP does not change only in the hold count display area Da, but may change when moving to the execution target display area Db. For example, when the hold icon MP that is yellow in the hold number display area Da moves to the execution target display area Db, the hold icon MP is changed to red, or the hold icon MP is white in the hold number display area Da. When the held icon MP moves to the execution target display area Db, the held icon MP can be changed to another color (blue, yellow, red).

  In the second type notice effect, the color of the hold icon MP changes in the process of moving to the execution target display area Db. However, for the hold icon MP that is the target of the second type notice effect, when the operation button 35 (see FIG. 1) of the front door frame 14 is operated with good timing when the hold icon MP is additionally displayed. 87, the color of the hold icon MP may suddenly change to the color set as the final target without waiting for the shift operation. As described above, when the operation button 35 is operated in accordance with the behavior of the game ball, the attention to the behavior of the game ball is improved by generating a reaction to the operation. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the sudden change of the color of the hold icon MP, which is the target of the second type notice effect, to the color set as the final target is referred to as “special change”.

  Here, a part of the super reach display shown in the present embodiment is an operation corresponding reach display in which the progress pattern changes based on the operation of the operation button 35. Specifically, in the operation corresponding reach display, when the operation button 35 is operated in accordance with an instruction from the gaming machine, the normal reach display is changed to the super reach display, and when the operation is not performed, the super reach display is performed. Development is avoided. That is, the operation button 35 is an opportunity to change the progress pattern of reach display. Hereinafter, a process (operation corresponding reach display control process) executed as part of the regular process by the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143 in order to realize this function will be described.

(Control processing for operation-compatible reach display)
In the operation corresponding reach display control process, first, in step S5501, it is determined whether or not the game is related to the operation corresponding reach. If a negative determination is made in step S5501, the operation-corresponding reach display control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5501, processing proceeds to step S5502.

  In step S5502, it is determined whether or not the operation of the operation button 35 is being accepted (during the operation acceptance period). If a negative determination is made in step S5502, the process proceeds to step S5503. In step S5503, it is determined whether it is the operation suggestion start timing. If it is not the operation suggestion start timing, a negative determination is made in step S5503, and the operation corresponding reach display control process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5503, the process proceeds to step S5504.

  In step S5504, an operation suggestion start process is executed. Specifically, a sound effect corresponding to the operation suggestion is output from the speaker unit 29 and an operation suggestion start command is output to the display control device 710. The display control device 710 shows a button icon imitating the operation button 35 and a remaining operation reception time as an image suggesting the operation on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the reception of the operation suggestion command. Display the timer gauge.

  In subsequent step S5505, an operation reception time is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the reception time (5 sec in this embodiment) is set in the operation reception time counter provided in the various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654. The value of the operation reception time counter is subtracted every time the periodic process is executed by the MPU 652.

  After that, the operation corresponding hold change restriction process is executed in step S5506, and then the operation corresponding reach display control process is terminated. By executing the operation-related hold change restriction process, even when the operation button 35 is operated in accordance with the entry into the operation ports 62a, 63a, the color change of the hold icon MP based on the operation is avoided. Will be.

  Returning to the description of step S5502, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5502, that is, if the operation is being accepted, the process proceeds to step S5507. In step S5507, based on information from the operation detection sensor attached to the operation button 35, it is determined whether or not the operation button 35 has been operated. If the operation button 35 is operated, an affirmative determination is made in step S5507, and the flow advances to step S5508.

  In step S5508, an operation reception notification process is executed. In the operation reception notification process, a sound effect corresponding to the operation reception is output from the speaker unit 29 and an operation reception command is output to the display control device 710. The display control device 710 switches the button icon to an icon corresponding to the operation and hides the timer gauge based on the reception of the operation acceptance command. After performing the process of step S5508, the process proceeds to step S5509.

  In step S5509, it is determined whether or not the current game time is a game time related to super reach. If a positive determination is made in step S5509, the process proceeds to step S5510. In step S5510, the transition process to the super reach display is executed, and then the operation corresponding reach display control process is terminated. By executing the transition process to the super reach display in step S5510, characters (girl character, boy character, fairy character) corresponding to the super reach are displayed in the center of the display screen 75a.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5509, that is, if the current game time does not correspond to super reach, the process proceeds to step S5511. In step S5511, the normal reach continuation process is executed, and then the operation corresponding reach display control process is terminated.

  In the present embodiment, the operation suggestion of the operation button 35 occurs not only in a part of game times related to super reach but also in a part of game times related to normal reach. That is, even if the operation button 35 is operated during the operation reception time based on the operation suggestion, there is a case where it does not develop into super reach.

  Returning to the description of step S5507, if a negative determination is made in step S5507, the process proceeds to step S5512. In step S5512, it is determined whether it is the end time of the reception time. If a negative determination is made in step S5512, the control process for reach display corresponding to this operation is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5512, the process proceeds to step S5513. In step S5513, an operation suggestion end process is executed. In the operation suggestion end process, a sound effect indicating the passage of reception time is output from the speaker unit 29 and an operation reception time end command is transmitted to the display control device 710. The display control device 710 hides the button icon and the time gauge displayed on the display screen 75a based on the reception of the operation reception time end command. After the processing of step S5513 is executed, the normal reach continuation processing is executed in step S5511, and then the operation corresponding reach display control processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 89, the game board 60 in the present embodiment will be supplementarily described. FIG. 89 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the game board 60 showing the lower operation entrance ball portion 62 and its peripheral configuration, and FIG. 89 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view taken along line AA of FIG. 89 (a).

(Game board 60)
As shown in FIG. 89 (a), on the upper surface of the lower frame portion of the center frame 76, a stage portion 77 is formed on which a game ball can roll to the left and right. The game ball that has flowed in from the inlet formed in the left frame portion of the center frame 76 is discharged onto the stage portion 77 through a warp passage formed in the center frame 76.

  In a portion of the stage portion 77 located above the lower operation entrance portion 62, a groove portion that is inclined downward is formed rearward. A game ball is placed at the end of the groove portion and the lower operation entrance portion 62 is provided. An inlet portion 78a of a guide passage 78 for guiding to is formed. The exit portion 78 b of the guide passage 78 is located immediately above the lower working entrance ball portion 62, and the game ball that has flowed out from the exit portion 78 b falls toward the lower operation entrance ball portion 62. With respect to game balls that go to the lower working ball entering portion 62 via the stage portion 77 and the guide passage 78, the balls that enter the lower working ball entering portion 62 are compared to game balls that do not pass through the stage portion 77 and the like. The probability is high.

(Lower operation entrance 62)
Next, with reference to FIG. 89 (b), a specific description will be given of the specific configuration of the lower operation entrance portion 62. FIG. The lower operation entrance ball portion 62 is formed by combining a plurality of housing structural bodies 810 and 820, and a single ball passage 801 is formed therein. The ball passage 801 includes a vertically long upstream passage portion 802 located on the front side of the game board 60, a vertically long downstream passage portion 804 located on the back side of the game board 60, the upstream passage portion 802, and the downstream side It has a horizontally long connecting passage portion 803 that connects the passage portion 804 and has a crank shape that is bent at an intermediate position. The inlet portion of the upstream passage portion 802 functions as the lower working port 62a, and the game ball that has flowed into the lower working port 62a is collected through the upstream passage portion 802 → the communication passage portion 803 → the downstream passage portion 804. Guided to the aisle.

  A ball detection sensor 850 (specifically a magnetic sensor) that detects a game ball is disposed in a portion of the communication passage portion 803 that is closer to the upstream-side passage portion 802. The ball detection sensor 850 outputs a HI level signal when a game ball is detected, and outputs a LOW level signal when it is not detected. The ball detection sensor 850 is connected to the main control device 162, and the main control device 162 monitors the presence or absence of a ball entry based on a detection signal (detection information) from the ball detection sensor 850. Specifically, in the main control device 162, when the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850 is read, based on the fact that the detection signal is continuously at the HI level for a plurality of times, It is determined that a ball has entered.

  The housing components 810 and 820 constituting the lower operation ball entry portion 62 are both transparent, and the game balls passing through the ball passage 801 are visible through the housing components 810 and 820. . The ball detection sensor 850 is also visible from the front side of the gaming machine, and it is visually confirmed that the game ball that has flowed into the lower working port 62a faces the ball detection sensor 850 and passes through the ball detection sensor 850. It is possible.

  As already described, when the game ball flows into the lower operation port 62a, the color of the hold icon MP corresponding to the second type notice effect may change by operating the operation button 35 with good timing. In the following description, an operation that can be a trigger for a change in the color of the hold icon MP (the special change) is referred to as a “special operation” in order to distinguish it from an operation that triggers the operation corresponding effect.

  Next, the special operation determination process executed by the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The special operation determination process is a process executed as part of the regular process by the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143.

(Special operation judgment process)
In the special operation determination process, first, in step S5601, it is determined whether or not the special operation timer counter is operating. The special operation timer counter is a counter that defines reception times for special operations stored in various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654. In step S5601, it is determined whether or not the special operation timer counter is “0”. judge.

  If a negative determination is made in step S5601, the process proceeds to step S5602. In step S5602, it is determined based on the detection information from the ball detection sensor 850 whether or not it is the timing when it is determined that a ball has entered the lower working port 62a. If a negative determination is made in step S5602, the special operation determination process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5602, the process proceeds to step S5603.

  In step S5603, it is determined whether it is during the reception time for the operation corresponding reach. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operation reception time counter described above is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5603, the special operation determination process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S5603, the process proceeds to step S5604.

  In step S5604, a special operation timer counter setting process is executed. In this process, a value corresponding to the reception time of the special operation is set in the special operation timer counter provided in the various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654. Thereafter, it is determined in step S5605 whether or not a special operation of the operation button 35 has been performed. Here, with reference to FIG. 91, the reception time of the special operation will be described. FIG. 91A is a schematic diagram showing the ball passage 801, and FIG. 91B is a timing chart showing the special operation reception time.

  As shown in FIG. 91A, the communication passage portion 803 has a horizontally long shape, and the game ball that has passed through the communication passage portion 803 changes its direction at the back wall portion 821 and falls along the downstream passage portion 804. Will be. Here, when the communication passage portion 803 is viewed from the front of the gaming machine, it is difficult to accurately grasp the depth position of the game ball passing through the communication passage portion 803. That is, even if it can be determined that the game ball is located in the communication passage portion 803, the game ball is present at any position with respect to the ball detection sensor 850 (specifically, the detection position DP of the ball detection sensor 850). It is difficult to visually identify whether or not That is, in the present embodiment, the ball detection sensor 850 is disposed in the communication passage portion 803 that makes it difficult to accurately grasp the position of the game ball.

  Here, the reception time for the special operation is defined to be approximately the same as the required time TX required for the game ball flowing into the lower operation port 62a to move from the detection position DP to the back wall portion 821. . For this reason, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the signal from the ball detection sensor 850 is switched from the LOW level (OFF) to the HI level (ON) at the timing of td1. The MPU 602 of the main controller 162 determines that the ball has entered the lower working port 62a at the timing td2 after the timing td1. Acceptance of special operation is started at the timing of td2. Thereafter, even if the signal from the ball detection sensor 850 is switched to the LOW level, the reception of the special operation is continued, and the reception of the special operation is finished at the timing td3 when the required time TX has elapsed from the timing td2. It becomes.

  In addition, when the entrance to the lower operation port 62a occurs continuously, as shown in FIG. 91 (b), the second entrance (game ball) can be detected during the reception time. If a new entry occurs during the reception time, the reception time will not be extended based on the entry. If a special operation is performed during the reception time, The association is the first entry, and the second entry is excluded from the viewpoint of special operation.

  Returning to the description of step S5605 in FIG. 90, if a special operation is not performed, a negative determination is made in step S5605, and the processing for special operation determination ends. If a positive determination is made in step S5605, the process proceeds to step S5606. In step S5605, it is determined whether or not the timer trigger is a winning that exceeds the storage upper limit (holding upper limit) related to the lower operating port 62a. If a negative determination is made in step S5606, the first special operation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654, and the special operation setting process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5606, the second special operation flag is set in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654, and the special operation setting process ends.

  Returning to the description of step S5601, if the special operation timer counter is operating, an affirmative determination is made in step S5601, and the flow advances to step S5609. In step S5609, the special operation timer counter is updated. In the subsequent step S5610, it is determined whether or not the value of the special operation timer counter is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5610, the special operation determination process is terminated as it is. If a negative determination is made in step S5610, the process of steps S5605 to S5608 is executed, and then the special operation determination is performed. The process is terminated.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 92, the operation corresponding hold change control process executed as part of the periodic process in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143 will be described.

(Control processing for pending change for operation)
In the operation corresponding hold change control process, it is first determined in step S5701 whether or not the change in the color of the hold icon MP is reserved. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a change reservation flag (to be described later) is stored in various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654. If a negative determination is made in step S5701, the process proceeds to step S5702.

  In step S5702, it is determined whether or not the above-described first special operation flag is stored in various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5702, the process proceeds to step S5703.

  In step S5703, it is determined whether the newly added hold information corresponds to the second type notice effect. If the second type notice effect is not supported, a negative determination is made in step S5703, the first special operation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654 is erased, and then this operation corresponding hold change is performed. Control process is terminated. If a positive determination is made in step S5703, the process proceeds to step S5704.

  In step S5704, it is determined whether or not the pending change corresponding to the special operation is being regulated. As described in the operation corresponding reach display control process of FIG. 88, in the game times in which the operation corresponding reach display is performed, the operation is suggested from the operation button 35 to the end of the corresponding game times. Although special operations are accepted, pending changes are restricted. In such a case, a negative determination is made in step S5704, and the process proceeds to step S5705.

  In step S5705, the first forced change process is executed. In the first forced change process, a sound effect corresponding to the first forced change is output from the speaker unit 29 and a first forced change command is output to the display control device 710. The first forced change command includes information for specifying the hold information (hold icon MP) that is the target of the forced change. In the display control device 710, based on the reception of the first forced change command, the color of the hold icon MP that is the target of the second type notice effect should be changed through a step-up if it is originally. Change to the color (special change above).

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 93 (a) → FIG. 93 (b), the hold information newly acquired based on the ball entering the lower operation port 62a corresponds to the second type notice effect. When this hold information is acquired, the operation button 35 is operated aiming at the timing when the game ball passes through the ball detection sensor 850 of the lower working port 62a, and the hold added lastly when the timing coincides brilliantly. The color of the icon MP is forcibly changed by omitting the step-up to the color that should finally change in the second type notice effect.

  Returning to the description of step S5704, if the hold change corresponding to the special operation is being regulated, an affirmative determination is made in step S5704, and the process proceeds to step S5706. In step S5706, change reservation processing is executed. Specifically, the first change reservation flag is set in various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654. Thus, the forced change of the color of the hold icon MP is avoided until the reach display is finished and the next game round is started, that is, until the hold icon MP is shifted.

  Returning to the description of step S5702, if a negative determination is made in step S5702, that is, if the first special operation flag is not stored in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654, the process proceeds to step S5707. In step S5707, it is determined whether the second special operation flag is stored in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654. If the second special operation flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S5707, and the operation-corresponding hold change control process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S5707, the process proceeds to step S5708. In step S5708, it is determined whether any of the stored hold information corresponds to the second type notice effect. If a negative determination is made in step S5708, the second special operation flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654 is erased, and the operation corresponding hold change control process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5708, the process proceeds to step S5709.

  In step S5709, as in step S5704, it is determined whether or not the pending change corresponding to the special operation is being regulated. If a negative determination is made in step S5709, the second forcible change process is executed in step S5710, and the control process for pending change for this operation is terminated.

  In the second forced change process, a sound effect corresponding to the second forced change is output from the speaker unit 29 and a second forced change command is output to the display control device 710. The second forced change command includes information for specifying the hold information (hold icon MP) that is the target of the forced change. In the display control device 710, based on the reception of the second forced change command, the color of the hold icon MP that is the target of the second type notice effect should be changed through a step-up if it is originally intended. Change the color of the (special change). Unlike the first forced change process, the second forced change process may include a plurality of hold icons MP that are subject to special changes.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 94 (a) → FIG. 94 (b) → FIG. 94 (c), the third hold information acquired based on the ball entering the lower working port 62a is the second type notice effect. It corresponds to. After the number of stored hold information reaches the upper limit, the operation button 35 is operated aiming at the timing at which the game ball passes through the ball detection sensor 850 of the lower working port 62a, and the timing coincides wonderfully. The color of the first hold icon MP is forcibly changed by omitting the step-up to the color that should change last in the second type notice effect.

  Returning to the description of step S5709, if the hold change corresponding to the special operation is being regulated, an affirmative determination is made in step S5709 and the process proceeds to step S5710. In step S5710, a change reservation process is executed. Specifically, the second change reservation flag is set in various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654. Thus, the forced change of the color of the hold icon MP is avoided until the reach display is finished and the next game round is started, that is, until the hold icon MP is shifted.

  Returning to the description of step S5701, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5701, that is, if the first change reservation flag or the second change reservation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654, the process proceeds to step S5712. . In step S5712, it is determined whether it is time to shift the hold information. If a negative determination is made in step S5712, the operation corresponding hold change control process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5712, the process proceeds to step S5713.

  In step S5713, forced change processing is executed. Specifically, when the first change reservation flag or the second change reservation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654, the hold icon MP that is a reservation target is specified, and the display control device 710 is specified. A forced change command is output to. This forced change command includes information for specifying the hold information (hold icon MP) to be forcibly changed. Based on the reception of the forced change command, the display control device 710 changes the color of the hold icon MP, which is the target of the second type notice effect, to a color that should have changed through step-up. . Thereafter, the change reservation flag stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM 654 is deleted, and the control processing for the change change corresponding to the operation is terminated.

  According to the eighth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion (lower working port 63a) of the lower working ball entry portion 63 passes the detection position DP by the ball detection sensor 850 (corresponding to “ball detection means”). When the operation button 35 (corresponding to “operation means”) is operated in accordance with this, the display of the hold icon may be changed to a more expected one. As described above, when the operation button 35 is operated at an appropriate timing in accordance with the movement of the game ball, a reaction (reaction) to the operation is generated, so that a player who expects the reaction can receive it. On the other hand, attention can be paid to the movement of the game ball. By adding such a new game that has not existed in the past, the degree of attention to the game can be dramatically improved.

  The game ball that has flowed into the lower operation port 63a is detected by the ball detection sensor 850 after moving from the upstream passage portion 802 extending in the vertical direction to the communication passage portion 803 extending in the substantially horizontal direction. By quickly guiding the game ball that has flowed into the lower operation port 63a to the communication passage unit 805 by the upstream-side passage portion 802 extending in the vertical direction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of congestion of game balls in the vicinity of the lower operation port 63a. . Since the communication passage portion 803 extends in the substantially horizontal direction, the acceleration of the game ball is reduced as compared with the upstream passage portion 802. With such a configuration, the game ball passes through the ball detection sensor 850 in a state where acceleration is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress an operation that is aimed at the passage timing of the ball detection sensor 850 from becoming excessively difficult. Therefore, the above-described attention level improving effect can be suitably exhibited.

  According to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, special operation is performed by operating the operation button 35 while the game ball is passing through a predetermined section including the detection position DP and its downstream side in the communication passage portion 803. The response process is executed. Thereby, it can suppress that the timing of operation becomes too severe. Here, assuming a configuration in which the reception time of the special operation is simply increased, there is a concern that the distance between the detection position SP and the game ball when the operation is received becomes large, and the appearance is likely to be uncomfortable. . In this regard, as shown in this embodiment, if the reception time of the special operation is increased after the communication passage portion 803 extends in the front-rear direction, it is possible to accurately determine the position in the depth direction of the game ball. Therefore, it is difficult to ascertain the discomfort.

  The ball passage 801 shown in this embodiment is composed of an upstream passage portion 802, a communication passage portion 803, and a downstream passage portion 804, and these passage portions 802 to 804 are arranged vertically in a front view of the gaming machine. It is arranged to be. In the front view of the gaming machine, the ball passage looks as if it is a single vertically long passage, so that the moving speed of the game ball decreases when passing through the connecting passage portion 803, and the third passage portion is moved. It can be seen that the movement speed increases again. As described above, it is excessively difficult to operate the operation button 35 aiming at the passing timing of the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP) by lowering the apparent moving speed of the game ball in the communication passage portion 803. The smooth flow of the game ball that has flowed into the lower operation port 62a can be secured while suppressing this.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the reception of the special operation at the operation button 35 is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP), the operation button immediately before passing through the ball detection sensor 850. When 35 is operated, the operation is not accepted. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP) is arranged at a position closer to the boundary portion with the upstream passage portion 802 in the communication passage portion 803, so that it is outside the reception period. It is preferable to prevent the operation from being performed in vain.

<Ninth embodiment>
As shown in the eighth embodiment, in the configuration in which the communication passage portion 803 extends in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the game board 60, a plurality of game balls continuously flow into the lower operation port 62a. As a result, a situation occurs in which the preceding game ball B1, the subsequent game ball B2, and the communication path portion 803 move together (see FIG. 95A). When such a situation occurs, the preceding game ball B1 is hidden behind the subsequent game ball B2, and it becomes difficult or impossible to see, and the operation button is aimed at the timing when the preceding game ball B1 passes the ball detection sensor 850. It is difficult to measure the timing visually when operating 35. Therefore, in this case, it is assumed that the operation button 35 is easily operated in accordance with the passage timing of the subsequent game ball B2, which is relatively easy to visually recognize.

  In the eighth embodiment, the operation timing of the operation button 35 is prevented from becoming excessively severe by adding the time required for passing through the communication passage portion 803 to the reception time of the special operation of the operation button 35. However, in such a configuration, the succeeding game ball B2 can pass through the ball detection sensor 850 during the reception time of the special operation related to the preceding game ball B1. Even if the operation button 35 is operated with the aim of the subsequent game ball B2, it is assumed that the target of the hold change becomes the hold icon MP related to the preceding game ball B1 is a factor that makes the player feel uncomfortable. Is done.

  In the present embodiment, one of the features is that a device for suppressing such a sense of incongruity is made. Hereinafter, a characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the eighth embodiment.

  In the case where the continuous entry as described above occurs, that is, when the subsequent game ball B2 passes the ball detection sensor 850 during the special operation reception time related to the previous game ball B1, the subsequent game ball B2 is detected as a ball. At the timing when the sensor 850 is passed, the association of the special operation is switched from the preceding game ball B1 to the subsequent game ball B2. In the following, with reference to FIG. 95 (b), the flow of association switching when the event shown in FIG. 95 (a) occurs will be described. In FIG. 95 (b), the reception time set in the eighth embodiment is indicated by a two-dot chain line for comparison with the eighth embodiment.

  In the example shown in FIG. 95 (b), it is determined that the preceding game ball B1 has entered at the timing of te1, and a special operation for the preceding game ball B1 is received at the timing of te1. Has been started. It is determined that the subsequent game ball B2 has entered at the timing of te2 before the timing of te3 when the reception time set at the timing of te1 elapses.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (a), the following game ball B1 is transferred to the downstream passage portion 804 from the communication passage portion 803 (under a situation where the game ball B1 remains in the communication passage portion 803). The game ball B2 may have passed the ball detection sensor 850. In this case, the reception time is reset at the timing of te2 to substantially extend the reception time, and the special game association is switched from the preceding game ball B1 to the subsequent game ball B2. In other words, from the timing of te1 to immediately before the timing of te2, the game ball B1 precedes the association of the special operation, whereas from the timing of te2 to the timing of te4, the association of the special operation follows. It is a game ball B2.

  With such a configuration, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed. Further, by avoiding that one special operation is associated with two front and rear entrances, it is possible to suppress giving the player the impression that the operation timing may be about. This is preferable for enhancing the player's satisfaction when the special operation is successful when the special operation is performed at the timing of entering the ball.

<Tenth Embodiment>
As shown in the eighth embodiment, the communication passage portion 803 extends in the thickness direction (front-rear direction) of the game board 60, and the time required for the passage of the communication passage portion 803 is taken into account. When the reception time for the special operation is set, the length of the reception time depends on the length of the communication passage portion 803 (the thickness of the game board 60). In the present embodiment, one of the features is that a device for relaxing the restriction on the thickness of the game board 60 is taken. In the following, with reference to FIG. 96, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the eighth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 60.

  As for the ball passage 801X provided in the lower operation ball entry portion 62X, the upstream passage portion 802X located on the front side of the front surface of the game board 60 and the game board 60, as in the eighth embodiment. The connecting passage portion 803X extends in the thickness direction and the downstream passage portion 804X. The rear end portion of the communication passage portion 803X is aligned vertically with the back surface of the game board 60, and the total length is shorter than the communication passage portion 803X shown in the eighth embodiment. The upstream portion of the downstream-side passage portion 804 </ b> X is offset forward from the downstream portion, and longitudinally cuts through the opening 79 formed in the game board 60.

  Thereby, the time required for the passage of the communication passage portion 803X shown in the present embodiment is shorter than that in the eighth embodiment. In accordance with this, the time for accepting special operations is also shorter than that in the eighth embodiment.

  With such a configuration, the reception time is set in accordance with the passage length of the communication passage portion 803X and the special operation is prevented from becoming excessively severe, and a plurality of game balls are continuously connected to the lower operation port 62a. It is possible to suitably prevent the preceding game ball from being hidden behind the subsequent game ball and becoming difficult or impossible to visually recognize when it flows into the. This is preferable in securing an opportunity to perform a special operation aiming at the preceding game ball and an opportunity to perform a special operation aiming at the subsequent game ball.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the operation button 35 is operated (special operation) at the timing when the game ball passes the ball detection sensor 850, the change of the hold icon MP corresponding to the second type notice effect is preceded. Although the configuration is the same as that of the eighth embodiment in that the configuration is executed, the specific configuration (for example, the relationship between the special operation and the entrance detection) for realizing the function is described above. This is different from the eighth embodiment. Hereinafter, a characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the eighth embodiment.

  With respect to the lower working ball entry portion 62 shown in the present embodiment, the housing structure 801Y is colored and opaque, and as shown in the partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 97, the ball passage 801 formed therein, the ball The configuration is different from that of the eighth embodiment in that the game ball passing through the passage 801, the ball detection sensor 850, and the like are not visible from the front of the game machine. That is, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball that has flowed into the lower operation port 62a passes through the ball detection sensor 850 cannot be visually confirmed. Therefore, when the operation button 35 is to be operated in accordance with the timing of passing through the sphere detection sensor 850, it is necessary to predict the passage timing to some extent.

  As shown in FIG. 98, when it is determined that a game ball has passed through the ball detection sensor 850 and a ball has entered, a hold icon MP is displayed in the hold display area NE of the symbol display device 75 (display screen 75a). It will be added promptly. As described above, when the visual confirmation is not possible, the operation button 35 is operated at the timing when the hold display area NE is watched and the hold icon MP is added instead of the game ball heading toward the lower operation port 62a. there is a possibility. If such an operation is accepted as a special operation, there is a concern that the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game by predicting the passage timing will not be exhibited well. In the present embodiment, in order to avoid such inconvenience, the relationship between operation detection and ball detection is devised. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 99, the special operation determination process executed as part of the regular process by the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143 will be described.

(Special operation judgment process)
In the special operation determination process, first, in step S6001, it is determined whether or not a prize waiting timer counter CW provided in various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654 is operating. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning awaiting timer counter CW is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S6001, the process proceeds to step S6002.

  In step S6002, it is determined based on a detection signal from an operation detection sensor attached to the operation button 35 whether or not the operation button 35 has been operated. The operation detection sensor is connected to the notification / production control device 143, and outputs an OFF signal (LOW level signal) when no operation is performed, and an ON signal (HI level) when an operation is performed. Signal). The MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143 determines that an operation has been performed based on the rise of the signal. If it is determined that the operation has not been performed, a negative determination is made in step S6002, and the special operation determination process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the operation is being performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S6002 and the process proceeds to step S6003.

  In step S6003, a process of setting a prize waiting timer counter CW is performed. In this setting process, when a game ball passes through the ball detection sensor 850 after the operation button 35 is operated (special operation), it is assumed that a ball corresponding to the operation has occurred (hereinafter, a prize waiting time TW) Is set in the awaiting timer counter CW. When a winning occurs during the winning waiting time, the hold icon MP displayed based on the current winning is compatible with the second type notice effect as in the eighth embodiment. As a condition, a process for forcibly changing the color of the hold icon MP is executed.

  Returning to the description of step S6001, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6001, that is, if it is determined that the winning awaiting timer counter CW is operating, the process proceeds to step S6004.

  In step S6004, based on the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the lower working port 62a. If it is determined that a ball has entered the lower working port 62a, an affirmative determination is made in step S6004, and the flow proceeds to step S6006. In step S6006, it is determined whether or not the current entry is an entry exceeding the storage upper limit related to the lower operation port 62a. If a negative determination is made in step S6006, the process proceeds to step S6007. In step S6007, the first special operation flag is set in various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6006, the process advances to step S6008 to set the second special operation flag in various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654. The change of the hold icon MP based on the first special operation flag and the second special flag is the same as in the eighth embodiment.

  After the processing of steps S6007 and S6008 is executed, the process proceeds to step S6009, and the prize waiting timer counter CW is cleared (reset) to “0”, and then the special operation determination processing is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S6004, if a negative determination is made in step S6004, that is, if it is determined that no ball has entered the lower working port 62a, the process proceeds to step S6005. After the winning awaiting timer counter CW is updated ("1" subtraction) in step S6005, the special operation determination process is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 100, a supplementary description will be given of the relationship between operation detection and ball entry determination. FIG. 100A is a schematic diagram showing the ball passage 801, and FIG. 100B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the operation detection timing and the winning wait time.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (a), a certain amount of time (required time TY) until the game ball flowing into the lower working port 62a passes through the upstream passage portion 802 and reaches the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP). ). The above-described winning waiting time TW is shorter than the required time TY. Specifically, the time until the ball reaches the ball detection sensor 850 after the flow direction of the game ball that has passed through the upstream passage portion 802 changes so as to face the rear of the gaming machine is defined as a prize waiting time TW. .

  As shown in FIG. 100 (b), it is determined that the operation button 35 has been operated at the timing tg1 when the operation detection sensor attached to the operation button 35 has been turned on, and is waiting for a prize to be received in the lower operation port 62a It becomes. The state of waiting for winning is canceled at the timing of tg2 when the above-described winning waiting time TW has elapsed from the timing of tg1. When it is determined that a prize for the lower operating port 62a has occurred at the timing of tg1 or the timing of tg2, the special operation flag is set, and the forced change process of the hold icon MP is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that a winning has occurred before the timing of tg1 or after the timing of tg2, the special operation flag is not set since the winning waiting state is not set.

  According to the eleventh embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

  When the ball detection sensor 850 is not visible from the front of the gaming machine as shown in the present embodiment, the operation is performed while visually confirming the movement of the game ball passing through the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP). It becomes difficult to operate the button 35. Therefore, it is possible to prompt the player who expects a special change of the hold icon MP based on the special operation to estimate the timing at which the game ball passes the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP). In making such an estimation, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the estimation by following the movement of the game ball until the timing at which the game ball flows into the lower operation port 62a. Therefore, the player's attention can be encouraged to be directed to the game ball, which can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  In the configuration in which the hold icon MP is additionally displayed in accordance with the acquisition of the hold information, it is possible to perform an operation such as performing an operation at the timing when the hold icon MP is additionally displayed instead of estimating the passing timing of the game ball. There is sex. If such an operation functions effectively, there is a concern that the player's attention will be directed to the hold display area NE instead of the game ball, which will hinder the effect of improving the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball. . Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, after the hold icon MP is additionally displayed, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suppressed by excluding the corresponding game ball from the target of the special operation.

  Assuming a configuration in which a sphere detection sensor is arranged in the lower working port 62a or in the vicinity thereof, it is assumed that the above-described function for prompting the estimation is not performed well. This is because it may be possible to follow the movement of the game ball after flowing in by looking into the lower working port 62a from obliquely above. On the other hand, if the distance from the lower operating port 62a to the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP) is greatly separated, there is a concern that the responsiveness to the incoming ball is lowered. In view of these circumstances, as shown in the present embodiment, disposing the ball detection sensor 850 in the upstream portion of the communication passage portion 803 extending in the thickness direction of the game board 60 simplifies those problems. There is technical significance that it can be overcome by simple construction.

<Modification 1>
When the operation button 35 is operated again while the winning awaiting timer counter is operating, the winning waiting time TW may be reset at the timing of the operation.

<Modification 2>
In the eleventh embodiment, the special operation reception time is set so as to include the time before the timing at which the game ball passes the detection position DP of the ball detection sensor 850 (the timing at which it is determined that the ball has entered). Although secured, it is not necessarily limited to this. This does not deny a configuration that secures the reception time for special operations so as to include a time later than the timing at which the game ball passes the detection position DP of the ball detection sensor 850. However, as described above, when the operation button 35 is operated after confirming that the hold icon MP is additionally displayed in the hold display area NE, in order to avoid determining this as a special operation, It is difficult to lengthen the subsequent time. Therefore, even if it is a case where reception time is ensured so as to include the later time, it is preferable to include the previous time.

<Modification 3>
In the eleventh embodiment, the time until the game ball passing through the upstream-side passage portion 802 changes from the position where the flow direction changes toward the rear of the gaming machine to the detection position DP of the detection sensor 850 is waited for a prize. Although defined as the time TW, it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set at least the time required for the game ball flowing into the lower operation port 62a (for example, the game ball disappeared into the ball passage 801) to pass through the detection position DP in the detection sensor 850 as the prize waiting time TW. . That is, it is only necessary that 0 <winning waiting time TW <required time TY.

<Twelfth embodiment>
First, a supplementary explanation of the push-down type operation button 35 shown in the first embodiment will be given. As already described, the operation button 35 includes a button member disposed so that the pressing operation surface faces upward, a holder that holds the button member displaceable up and down (standby position to maximum pressing position), and a button. The button member is displaced from the standby position to the maximum pressing position against the urging force of the urging member when a pressing operation is performed by the player. . The button member returns to the standby position by the urging force of the urging member when the player's hand is released with the end of the operation.

  The holder includes a stopper portion that prevents further movement in the pressing direction when the button member reaches the maximum pressing position, and further when the button member reaches the standby position (specifically, the maximum protruding position). The stopper part which prevents the movement to a protrusion direction is provided, and the operation stroke of a button member is prescribed | regulated by these stopper parts.

  The operation detection sensor attached to the operation button 35 outputs an ON signal (HI level signal) when the button member is located in the detection range set to include the maximum pressing position, and is out of the detection range (that is, When it is located at the (standby position), an OFF signal (LOW level signal) is output. The operation detection sensor is connected to the notification / production control device 143, and the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143 determines whether or not the operation button 35 is operated based on a detection signal (detection information) from the operation detection sensor. judge. More specifically, it is determined that an operation has been performed when the detection signal from the operation detection sensor is switched to an ON-state signal (when the signal rises).

  In such a configuration, the movement from the maximum pressing position to the standby position depends on the urging force of the urging member. Therefore, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. An interval can occur. More specifically, the time required for the button member pushed to the maximum pressing position to move out of the detection range of the operation detection sensor and move to the standby position (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) is the minimum value of the operation interval. Become.

  Here, the minimum value of the winning interval when the winning to the lower operation port 62a continues is about 0.05 sec. Since the minimum value of the operation interval depends on the urging force, it is substantially difficult to make the operation interval shorter than the winning interval when the winning to the lower operation port 62a continues. Under such circumstances, it becomes impossible to perform the operation in accordance with the winning timing (that is, the timing at which the game ball passes through the ball detection sensor 850) in the lower operation port 62a in order to promote the operation of the operation button 35. It is not preferable. Therefore, one of the features of the present embodiment is that the device is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, the device in the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the eleventh embodiment.

  First, the special operation determination process executed as part of the regular process in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Special operation judgment process)
In the special operation determination process, first, in step S6101, it is determined whether or not a prize waiting timer counter CW provided in various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654 is operating. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning awaiting timer counter CW is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S6101, the process proceeds to step S6102.

  In step S6102, it is determined based on the detection signal from the operation detection sensor whether or not the operation button 35 has been operated. If the operation button 35 has not been operated, a negative determination is made in step S6102, and the special operation determination process is terminated. If the operation button 35 is operated, an affirmative determination is made in step S6102, and the flow advances to step S6103.

  In step S6103, the two previous winning interval times (winning interval time TI) relating to the lower operation port 62a are calculated. The notification / production control device 143 shown in the present embodiment is provided with a real-time clock (RTC), and the time information when the winning to the lower working port 62a occurs is stored as a history. In step S6103, the winning interval time TI of the two previous winnings is calculated with reference to the stored history. Note that a monitoring timer counter may be provided instead of the real-time clock, and the winning interval time TI may be specified from the value of the monitoring timer counter.

  In the following step S6104, it is determined whether or not the winning interval time TI calculated in step S6103 is shorter than the first reference time TS1 defined in advance. The first reference time TS1 corresponds to a substantial minimum value (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) of the operation interval time described above.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6104, that is, if the winning interval time TI calculated as shown in FIG. 103 (a) is longer than the first reference time TS1, the process proceeds to step S6105. In step S6105, a process of setting a winning awaiting timer counter CW provided in various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654 is executed.

  In this setting process, when a game ball passes through the ball detection sensor 850 after the operation button 35 is operated (special operation), it is assumed that a ball corresponding to the operation has occurred (hereinafter referred to as a prize waiting time). ) Is set in a prize waiting timer counter CW. When a winning occurs during the winning waiting time, the hold icon MP displayed based on the current winning corresponds to the second type notice effect as in the eleventh embodiment. The process for generating the special change is executed under the condition.

  Returning to the description of step S6101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6101, that is, if it is determined that the prize waiting timer counter CW is operating, the process proceeds to step S6106.

  In step S6106, based on the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850, it is determined whether or not a ball has entered the lower working port 62a. If it is determined that a ball has entered the lower working port 62a, an affirmative determination is made in step S6106, and the flow proceeds to step S6108. In step S6108, it is determined whether or not the current entry is an entry exceeding the upper limit of storage associated with the lower operation port 62a. If a negative determination is made in step S6108, the process proceeds to step S6109. In step S6109, the first special operation flag is set in various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6108, the process advances to step S6110 to set the second special operation flag in various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654. The special change of the hold icon MP executed based on the first special operation flag and the second special flag is the same as in the eleventh embodiment.

  After executing the processes of steps S6109 and S6110, the process proceeds to step S6111, where the winning wait timer counter CW is cleared (reset) to “0”, and then the special operation determination process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S6106, if a negative determination is made in step S6106, that is, if it is determined that no ball has entered the lower working port 62a, the process proceeds to step S6107. In step S6107, the winning awaiting timer counter CW is updated ("1" subtraction), and then the special operation determination process is terminated.

  Here, a case where an affirmative determination is made in step S6014 will be described. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6104, that is, if the winning interval time TI is shorter than the first reference time TS1 as shown in FIG. 103 (b), the process proceeds to step S6112.

  In step S6112, the elapsed time TP from the subsequent winning to the operation of the operation button 35 is calculated. As described above, the notification / production control device 143 is provided with a real-time clock (RTC), and time information when a winning occurs is stored as a history. In step S6112, the elapsed time TP is calculated with reference to the stored history. Note that a monitoring timer counter may be provided instead of the real-time clock, and the elapsed time TP may be specified from the value of the monitoring timer counter.

  After calculating the elapsed time TP in step S6112, the process proceeds to step S6113. In step S6113, it is determined whether the elapsed time TP is shorter than the second reference time TS2. The second reference time TS2 is obtained by subtracting the minimum value of the winning interval time when the winning to the lower operation port 62a continues from the substantial minimum value (0.1 sec in the present embodiment) of the operation interval time described above. The second reference time TS2 defines a time allowing a part of the delay when the operation button 35 is continuously operated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S 6113, that is, if the time from the second entry to the current operation has reached the second reference time TS 2, an entry in which the current operation can occur thereafter is It can be estimated that it was aimed at. Therefore, after performing the setting process of the awaiting prize timer counter CW in step S6105, the special operation determination process is terminated.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S6113, that is, if the time from the second entry to the current operation is shorter than the second reference time TS2 as shown in FIG. It can be estimated that the game was aimed at the second entry. Therefore, the special operation flag is set in each of the processes in steps S6108 to S6111, and the special operation determination process is terminated. In this case, the waiting for winning (setting of the timer counter CW) shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 103 (b) is not performed, and it is avoided that the responses to one operation button 35 are duplicated.

  As described above in detail, when the operation of the operation button 35 is repeated in accordance with the continuous winning to the lower operation port 62a, the operation is wasted by relaxing the association with the winning for the subsequent operation. That is restrained. However, in the configuration in which the special change described above occurs when the winning of the game ball is matched with the operation timing, there is a possibility that a deviation occurs between the operation timing and the additional display timing of the hold icon MP due to the relaxation. There is a concern that such a timing shift may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. One of the features of the present embodiment is that a contrivance is made to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. Hereinafter, the device will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 and 105. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the hold display addition process executed as part of the regular process in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143, and FIG. 105 is a timing chart showing the flow of the additional display of the hold icon MP.

(Pending display addition processing)
The hold display addition process is a process for performing the additional display control of the hold icon MP based on the hold command received from the main control device 162.

  As shown in FIG. 104, in the hold display addition process, it is first determined in step S6201 whether or not the addition display of the hold icon MP is being delayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an additional delay flag (to be described later) is stored in various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654. If a negative determination is made in step S6201, the process proceeds to step S6202. In step S6202, it is determined whether or not the winning interval time TI between the winning associated with the currently received hold command and the previous winning is shorter than the first reference time TS1. That is, it is determined whether or not winnings to the lower working port 62a are continued.

  If a negative determination is made in step S6202, a hold icon addition process is executed in step S6203, and then the hold display addition process ends. In the process of adding the hold icon, the sound effect indicating the winning of the lower operation port 62 a is output from the speaker unit 29 and the hold command is transferred to the display control device 710. The display control device 710 displays the hold icon MP on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 based on the receipt of the hold command. Thus, when the winning to the lower operation port 62a is not continuous, the additional display timing of the hold icon MP on the display screen 75a and the display on the hold number display portions S1 and S2 which are directly controlled by the main controller 162. The update timing matches.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S6202, the hold icon addition delay process is executed in step S6204, and then the hold display addition process ends. In the hold icon addition delay process, an add delay flag is set in various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654. As a result, the additional display of the hold icon MP is slightly delayed.

  Returning to the description of step S6201, if an affirmative determination is made in step S6201, that is, if an additional delay flag is stored in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654, the process proceeds to step S6205.

  In step S6205, it is determined whether any delay termination condition is satisfied when the operation button 35 is operated or the second reference time has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S6205, the on-hold display addition process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S6205, the process advances to step S6206.

  In step S6206, a delay cancellation process is executed. Specifically, the additional delay flag stored in the various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654 is deleted. Thereafter, after the hold icon addition process is executed in step S6207, the hold display addition process is terminated.

  In the hold icon addition process, a sound effect indicating the addition of the hold icon MP is output from the speaker unit 29, and a hold command whose transfer is reserved is transmitted to the display control device 710. Based on the reception of the hold command, the display control device 710 additionally displays the hold icon MP in the hold display area NE of the display screen 75a. In addition, about the holding | maintenance number display part S1, S2 of the main display part D which becomes the direct control of the main control apparatus 162, although a display will be updated at the timing when winning to the lower operation opening 62a generate | occur | produced, a display screen For the hold display area NE of 75a, the hold icon MP is additionally displayed later than that. That is, when a continuous winning is generated in the lower operation port 62a, there is a difference between the display of the hold number display portions S1 and S2 and the display of the hold display area NE.

  Here, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 105, the flow of additional display of the hold icon MP will be supplementarily described. 105 exemplifies a case where the operation button 35 is repeatedly operated in accordance with each winning, assuming that consecutive winnings occur and each winning corresponds to the second type notice effect. In the following description, the first winning is distinguished as “first winning”, and the second winning is distinguished as “following winning”.

  At the timing when the previous winning to the lower working port 62a occurs, the number of holdings increases from “1” to “2”. At this timing, a hold icon MP is additionally displayed in the hold number display area Da (specifically, the second unit hold display area Da2) of the display screen 75a, and is lit in the hold number display section S1 for the lower operation port of the main display section D. The number of LEDs inside is changed from “1” to “2”. Regarding the previous winning, it is determined that the final hold icon MP is red as a target of the second type notice effect.

  Since the operation button 35 is operated at a timing before the previous winning of the lower operating port 62a occurs, and the previous winning is generated during the winning waiting time based on the operation, the special operation is performed. Is determined to have been performed. For this reason, the color of the hold icon MP becomes red from the beginning when the hold icon MP is additionally displayed in the second unit hold display area Da2.

  Later winnings occur immediately after the previous winning. At the timing when this prize is generated, the number of holds increases from “2” to “3”. At this timing, the number of LEDs that are lit in the lower operation port reserved number display portion S1 of the main display portion D is changed from “2” to “3”. However, since the winning interval time TI from the previous winning is less than the first reference time TS1 for the subsequent winning, the additional display of the holding icon MP in the holding number display area Da of the display screen 75a is reserved. The winnings after that are also subject to the type 2 notice effect, and it has been determined that the color of the final hold icon MP will be yellow.

  The operation button 35 is operated by another private instrument immediately after the subsequent winning of the lower operating port 62a occurs, and the elapsed time TP from the subsequent winning to the operation becomes shorter than the second reference time TS2. Yes. In this case, the hold icon MP is additionally displayed in the hold number display area Da (specifically, the third unit hold display area Da3) of the display screen 75a at the timing when the operation button 35 is operated. MP is yellow from the beginning.

  As described in detail above, by delaying the timing of the additional display of the hold icon MP in accordance with the timing of the special operation, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort when the special operation is performed in accordance with the passing of the game ball. .

<Modification 1>
The second reference time TS2 need only be a time that takes into account the responsiveness of the operation of the operation button 35, and does not necessarily coincide with the time required for the button member to return from the maximum pressed position to the standby position. For example, it may be longer than the time required to return from the maximum pressing position to the standby position.

<Modification 2>
In the twelfth embodiment, the timing for causing the hold icon MP to be additionally displayed in the hold number display area Da of the display screen 75a is delayed so that the lower operation port hold number display part S1 for the main display part D is displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Similarly to the hold number display area Da, the display update in the hold number display area S1 for the lower operation port is delayed, and the display update timing of the hold number display area Da and the display update of the hold number display area S1 for the lower operation port are updated. The timing may be synchronized.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
In the eighth embodiment and the like, the hold icon MP corresponding to the second type notice effect is obtained by operating the operation button 35 (special operation) in accordance with the timing when the game ball passes the ball detection sensor 850. In the present embodiment, the operation button 35 is operated at the timing when the game ball passes through the lower operation opening 62a that is the entrance portion of the lower operation entry portion 62 ( The configuration is different from that of the eighth embodiment in that a special change of the hold icon MP corresponding to the second type notice effect is executed by performing a special operation. Hereinafter, a characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the eighth embodiment.

  As for the lower operation entrance ball portion 62 shown in the present embodiment, the housing structure 801Y is colored and opaque, and as shown in the partial cross-sectional view of FIG. 106, the ball passage 801 formed therein, the ball The configuration is different from that of the eighth embodiment in that the game ball passing through the passage 801, the ball detection sensor 850, and the like are not visible from the front of the game machine. That is, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the game ball that has flowed into the lower operation port 62a passes through the ball detection sensor 850 cannot be visually confirmed. In such a configuration, the player can recognize that the inflow timing to the lower operation port 62a is the winning timing.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 107, a configuration related to winning determination in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 107 (a) is a flowchart showing a winning determination process (corresponding to step S4101) for the lower operating port 62a, which is executed as part of the timer interrupt process in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162, and FIG. 107 (b) is a winning determination. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of.

(Winning determination process)
As shown in FIG. 107 (a), in the winning determination process, first, in step S7001, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the lower working port ball detection sensor 850 is at the HI level. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7001, the process proceeds to step S7002, and after adding “1” to the detection counter for the lower working port provided in the various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654, the main winning determination process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7001, that is, if the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850 for the lower working port is at the LOW level, the process proceeds to step S7003. In step S7003, it is determined whether or not the detection counter for the lower working port is “3” or more. If a negative determination is made in step S7003, the main winning determination process is terminated as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S7003, the process proceeds to step S7004.

  In step S7004, a winning flag for the lower operation port is set in various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654. Thereafter, in the timer interrupt process and the normal process executed by the MPU 602 of the main control device 162, it is grasped that a winning to the lower operation port 62a has occurred based on this winning flag. In the subsequent step S7005, the value of the detection counter is stored in the RAM 604. In subsequent step S7006, the value of the detection counter for the lower working port is cleared to 0 (reset), and the main winning determination process is ended.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 107 (b), a specific flow of winning determination will be described. In FIG. 107 (b), the timing at which the timer interrupt process is executed is indicated by th1 to th5.

  The detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850 rises from the LOW level to the HI level between the first timer interrupt process (th1) and the second timer interrupt process (th2). Although the value of the detection counter for the lower operating port changes from “0” to “1” at the timing of th2, it is determined that a winning has occurred because it has not yet reached “3” and has not fallen to the LOW level. Not.

  At the timing of th3, the third timer interrupt process is executed. At the timing of th3, since the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850 is at the HI level, the value of the detection counter for the lower working port increases from “1” to “2”. At the timing of th3, since the value of the detection counter for the lower operating port has not yet reached “3” and has not fallen to the LOW level, it is not determined that a winning has occurred.

  At the timing of th4, the fourth timer interrupt process is executed. Since the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850 is at the HI level at the timing of th4, the value of the detection counter for the lower working port increases from “2” to “3”. Although the value of the detection counter for the lower operating port reaches “3” at the timing of th4, it is not determined that a winning has occurred because the value has not fallen to the LOW level.

  Thereafter, the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850 falls from the HI level to the LOW level between the fourth timer interrupt process (th4) and the fifth timer interrupt process (th5). When the fifth timer interrupt process is executed at the timing of th5, the value of the detection counter for the lower working port is “3” or more and the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850 is at the LOW level. Is determined, and a winning flag for the lower working port is set.

  Next, the special operation determination processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Special operation judgment process)
In the special operation determination process, first, in step S7101, it is determined whether or not a prize waiting timer counter CW provided in various counter areas 675 of the RAM 604 is operating. Specifically, it is determined whether an update permission flag (to be described later) is stored in various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654. If a negative determination is made in step S7101, the process proceeds to step S7102.

  In step S7102, it is determined whether the operation button 85 has been operated. If a negative determination is made in step S7102, the special operation determination process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7102, the process advances to step S7103.

  In step S7103, the updating of the winning awaiting timer counter CW provided in the various counter areas 675 of the RAM 654 is permitted. Specifically, an update permission flag is set in various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654. As a result, when the special operation determination process is executed thereafter, the winning awaiting timer counter CW is incremented by “1”. Thereafter, the special operation determination process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S7101, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7101, that is, if an update permission flag is stored in the various flag storage area 676 of the RAM 654, the process proceeds to step S7104. In step S7104, it is determined whether or not a prize has been generated for the lower working port 62a. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the winning flag for the lower operation port shown in step S7004 is stored in the various flag storage areas 676 of the RAM 654. If a negative determination is made in step S 7104, the special waiting determination process is terminated after executing a process of updating the winning awaiting timer counter CW in step S 7105. In this update process, “1” is added to the value of the prize waiting timer counter CW.

  If a negative determination is made in step S7104, the process proceeds to step S7106. In step S7106, determination criterion setting processing is executed. In the subsequent step S7107, the operation is performed at the timing when the game ball passes through the lower working port 62a which is the entrance portion of the lower working ball entering unit 62 based on the determination criterion set in step S7106 and the winning waiting timer counter CW. It is determined whether or not the button 35 has been operated.

  Here, the determination criteria will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 109 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the determination criterion and the passing speed of the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 106, the game ball that has flowed into the lower working port 62 a travels toward the ball detection sensor 850 through the ball passage 801. At this time, there is a slight difference in the time required for the game ball to reach the ball detection sensor 850 depending on the moving speed when the game ball passes through the lower operation port 62a. In the game board 60 shown in the present embodiment, the manner of inflow into the lower working port 62a is roughly divided into the following three. That is, (1) a mode in which a game nail 69 (so-called life nail) disposed immediately above the lower working port 62a falls to the lower working port 62a, and (2) an exit portion 78b of the guide passage 78 to the lower working port 62a. A mode of dropping, and (3) a mode of dropping from the upper surface of the stage portion 77 to the lower working port 62a. In these three modes, the falling distance increases in the order of the height position H1 of the life nail <the height position H2 of the outlet portion 78b <the height position H3 of the stage portion 77, so that the flow into the lower working port 62a in the same order. The speed and the passing speed of the ball detection sensor 850 are also increased.

  The passing speed of the sphere detection sensor 850 affects the time during which the detection signal output from the sphere detection sensor 850 is maintained at the HI level. Specifically, as the passing speed decreases, the time for which the HI level is maintained increases, and the number of times the HI level is detected before the detection signal falls to the LOW level is slightly increased.

  It is determined whether or not the operation button 35 has been operated at a timing when the game ball passes through the lower operation port 62a by calculating backward the timing at which the operation button 35 is operated after the winning is detected by the ball detection sensor 850. In the configuration, the determination may be shifted due to the slight speed difference described above. In the present embodiment, in order to suppress such a shift, the passing speed of the game ball is added to the setting of the determination criterion.

  As shown in FIG. 109, when the game ball falls from the height position H1, the assumed passing speed is lower than when the game ball falls from the other height positions H2, H3. As described in step S7005 of the winning determination process, since the number of times that the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850 is determined to be the HI level is stored in the present embodiment, the stored number is referred to. Thus, the passing speed of the game ball can be estimated. The ROM 653 stores a determination criterion table that defines the correspondence between the number of times determined to be the HI level and the determination criterion. When the number of times determined to be the HI level is 9 times or more, the first reference range is set as a determination reference with reference to this table.

  When the game ball falls from the height position H2, the assumed passing speed is higher than when the game ball falls from the height position H1, and is assumed compared with the case where the game ball falls from the height position H3. The passing speed is low. When the number of times determined to be the HI level is 6 to 8, the second reference range is set as a determination reference with reference to this table.

  When the game ball falls from the height position H3, the assumed passing speed is higher than when the game ball falls from the other height positions H1 and H2. When the number of times determined to be the HI level is 3 to 5, the third reference range is set as a determination reference with reference to this table.

  The first reference range to the third reference range all define the lower limit and the upper limit of the awaiting prize timer counter CW, and the lower limit increases in the order of the third reference range <the second reference range <the first reference range, The upper limit also increases in the order of the third reference range <the second reference range <the first reference range. Thus, it is considered that the lower the estimated passing speed, the longer the time required from flowing into the lower working port 62a until passing through the ball detection sensor 850. In particular, the upper limit is set in accordance with the timing when the game ball passes through the lower operation port 62a, and the lower limit is set in accordance with the timing before the game ball that has passed through the lower operation port 62a reaches the ball detection sensor 350. Is set. That is, in determining whether or not the operation button 35 has been operated in accordance with the ball entering the lower operation port 62a, not only the timing at which the game ball flows into the lower operation port 62a but also some time after the timing. There is a grace period. In addition, the length of the first reference range is slightly longer in the order of the third reference range <second reference range <first reference range.

  Returning to the description of step S7107 in FIG. 108, it is determined whether or not the value of the awaiting timer counter CW is within the reference range (first reference range to third reference range) set in step S7106. When a negative determination is made in step S7107, the special operation determination process is terminated after clearing (resetting) the awaiting timer counter CW to 0 in step S7111. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7107, the processing for step S7108 to step S7111 is executed, and then the special operation determination processing is terminated. Steps S7108 to S7110 are the same as steps S6006 to S6008 and S6108 to S6110, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 110, a supplementary explanation will be given on the relationship between the timing of success or failure of operation of the operation button 35 (the timing satisfying the conditions for special change) and the winning timing for each of the first to third reference ranges. To do.

  When the first reference range is set as the determination reference, the first specific time L1 from the timing that is a predetermined time X1 backward from the timing at which it is determined that a winning to the lower working port 62a has occurred to the first specific time L1. It is determined that the special operation has been successful when the operation button 35 has been operated before the elapse of time, and it has been determined that the special operation has failed if the operation button 35 is out of this range.

  When the second reference range is set as the determination reference, the timing of the second predetermined time X2 that is longer than the first predetermined time X1 from the timing at which it is determined that the winning to the lower working port 62a has occurred ~ the retroactive If the operation button 35 is operated from the timing until the timing at which the second specific time L2 shorter than the first specific time L1 elapses, it is determined that the special operation is successful, and if it is out of this range Judged as special operation failure.

  When the third reference range is set as the determination criterion, the timing that is determined to be a third predetermined time X3 that is longer than the second predetermined time X2 from the timing at which it is determined that a winning to the lower working port 62a has occurred to the retroactive time. If the operation button 35 is operated during the period from the start timing to the timing when the third specific time L3 shorter than the second specific time L2 elapses, it is determined that the special operation is successful. Judged as special operation failure.

  According to the thirteenth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects can be expected.

  In the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP), the operation button is operated within a predetermined time (corresponding to “predetermined period”) before that. It is determined whether or not 35 is operated, and if it is operated within the predetermined time, a special change of the hold icon MP can occur. For this reason, it is possible to prompt the player who expects the occurrence of the special change to perform an operation aiming at a predetermined time. When aiming at a predetermined time, it is possible to improve the accuracy by following the movement of the game ball until the timing when the game ball flows into the lower operation port 62a. Therefore, the player's attention can be encouraged to be directed to the game ball, which can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  The predetermined time described above is defined to be a time including a timing at which the game ball detected by the ball detection sensor 850 passes through the lower operation port 62a.

  In a configuration in which the ball passage 801 and the ball detection sensor 850 are not visible from the front of the gaming machine, the passage to the lower operation port 62a is actually performed despite the passage of the detection sensor 850 (detection position DP) = winning. Inflow = occurrence of winning and the possibility of being recognized by the player is increased. In the configuration in which a ball is detected by the ball detection sensor 850 attached to the lower operation ball entry portion 62, the ball detection sensor 850 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower operation port 62a, thereby realizing a configuration in accordance with the player's recognition. Although the sphere detection sensor 850 is disposed in the vicinity of the lower working port 62a, the effect of suppressing unauthorized access to the sphere detection sensor 850 is reduced. In addition, for example, a ball detection sensor that detects a game ball may be separately provided in the lower operation port 62a, and a configuration that separately detects a ball entry at the lower operation port 62a is possible. This is a factor that hinders downsizing / simplification of the lower working ball entry portion 62. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by using the existing ball detection sensor 850 as a configuration that reversely calculates whether or not the operation has been performed at the timing of passing through the lower working port 62a, from the timing of game ball detection, It can suppress suitably that new subjects, such as arrangement space, arise in raising the attention degree to a game.

  In the configuration in which the hold icon MP is additionally displayed in accordance with the acquisition of the hold information, it is possible to perform an operation such as performing an operation at the timing when the hold icon MP is additionally displayed instead of estimating the passing timing of the game ball. There is sex. If such an operation functions effectively, the player's attention will be directed to the holding display area NE, not the game ball, and this may hinder the effect of improving the degree of attention to the behavior of the game ball as described above. It is a concern. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by making the predetermined time shorter than the time required for the game ball that has passed through the lower operation port 62a to reach the detection sensor 850 (detection position DP), After the hold icon MP is additionally displayed, the corresponding game ball is excluded from the special operation target. Thereby, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed.

  As described above, when the lower operation port 62a and the ball detection sensor 850 (detection position DP) are separated from each other, until the ball detection sensor 850 is reached from the lower operation port 62a by the passing speed (movement speed) of the game ball. There is a difference in the required time. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by changing the time used as the determination reference according to the passing speed of the game ball, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the determination accuracy.

  In order to realize such a technical idea, for example, a speed sensor may be separately provided to monitor the passing speed of the game ball. However, if a separate configuration is required, there is a concern that the size of the lower working ball entering portion 62 will be increased, and restrictions on the arrangement or the like of the lower working ball entering portion 62 will become strong. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the time used as the determination reference is changed based on the length of the detection signal (HI level signal) output from the ball detection sensor 850, the existing configuration is changed. By using it, it is possible to easily improve the determination accuracy.

<Modification 1>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the passing speed of the game ball passing through the ball passage 801 (specifically, the ball detection sensor 850) is estimated based on the detection signal from the ball detection sensor 850. A specific configuration for estimating or measuring the passing speed is arbitrary. For example, a sensor similar to the ball detection sensor 850 may be arranged side by side upstream / downstream with the ball detection sensor 850, and the passing speed of the game ball may be estimated based on the detection results of the detection sensors. A speed sensor may be provided separately.

<Modification 2>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the reference range is divided into three stages of the first reference range to the third reference range, but is not limited to this. In order to further improve the determination accuracy, the reference range may be set more finely (for example, five levels from the first reference range to the fifth reference range). However, in consideration of the fact that the manner of entering the game ball is roughly divided into three types: fall from the stage portion 77, fall from the exit portion 78b of the guide passage 78, and fall from the game nail 69 (life nail). The structure divided into the above three stages has a technical significance in that it can suitably contribute to accuracy improvement while suppressing an increase in the amount of data (program).

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration that is a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) In each of the above embodiments, in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the number of possessed balls is reduced (slightly decreased) as the game progresses. It is also possible to change this so that the number of possessed balls increases as the game progresses even in the second normal gaming state. However, in providing a difference in the degree of advantage that the latter is more advantageous between the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state, for example, the increasing speed of the ball in the second normal gaming state is the third It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the speed is kept lower than the rate of increase of the ball in the normal gaming state.

  (2) In each of the above embodiments, when the time reduction is completed without a jackpot result in spite of the shift to the high probability mode, the third normal that is more advantageous to the player including the meaning of the remedy is included. It was set as the structure which transfers to a gaming state. In view of such a relief function, it is sufficient that the third normal gaming state is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the first normal gaming state. For example, the ball has a ball compared to the second normal gaming state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the decrease rate of is slow. As shown in (1) above, when the configuration in which the ball is increased even in the second normal game state is used together, the increase speed of the ball in the third normal game state is higher than that in the second normal game state. You may comprise so that it may become low.

  (3) In each of the above embodiments, by configuring the third normal gaming state to be shorter than the second normal gaming state, the pattern variation display time in the second working port display unit D2 is shortened. Although the game progress in the third normal gaming state is facilitated, the present invention is not limited to this. Compared to the second normal gaming state, the third normal gaming state is configured to have a longer pattern display time in the second operation port display unit D2, or the second normal gaming state and the third normal gaming state. It is also possible to configure so that the variation display time of the pattern in the second working port display section D2 has the same length.

  (4) In each of the above embodiments, the fixed display time of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1 is shorter than the fixed display time of the pattern in the second working port display unit D2. However, the present invention is limited to this. It is not a thing. It is also possible to make the pattern fixed display time in the first working port display section D1 longer than the fixed pattern display time in the second working port display section D2. In addition, the fixed display time of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1 can be set to the same length as the fixed display time of the pattern in the second working port display unit D2.

  (5) In each of the embodiments described above, when the game times that are mainly executed are the first ball entering portion (for example, the first normal gaming state in the first embodiment), the display of the symbol display device 75 is performed. In the screen 75a, when the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the first entering part is executed, and the game times that are mainly executed are the second entering part (for example, the third normal game in the first embodiment) In the normal state to the fourth normal gaming state), the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the first ball entering portion is executed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. It is good also as a structure which performs the fluctuation | variation display of the symbol corresponding to each of a ball | bowl part and a 2nd entrance part in parallel. In the case of such a configuration, for example, a first variation display area in which the variation display of the symbol corresponding to the first incoming ball portion can be executed on the display screen 75a, and the fluctuation display of the symbol corresponding to the second incoming ball portion. And a third variation display region that is different from the first variation display region and the second variation display region, and the symbol variation display and the third variation in the first variation display region are provided. A display state in which the symbol variation display region in the display region is linked and a display state in which the symbol variation display in the second variation display region and the symbol variation display in the third variation display region are linked in accordance with the gaming state. It is good to set it as the structure switched.

  (6) In each of the above embodiments, when the main controller 162 performs lottery based on the hold information, the operation port display units D1, D2 in the main display unit D simultaneously with the lottery (specifically immediately after the lottery). However, the present invention is not limited to this. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Prior to the lottery, it is also possible to start the pattern variation display on the operation port display portions D1 and D2 and the symbol variation display on the variation display areas ME1 to ME3 on the display screen 75a.

  (7) In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, the color of the hold icon MP is changed in advance by performing a special operation in accordance with the timing when the game ball passes the ball detection sensor 850. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient if some action can be generated in accordance with the player's operation. For example, the BGM may be changed or a predetermined message may be output. In addition, in the configuration in which the set value can be changed as shown in the sixth embodiment or the like, it is possible to have a configuration in which information on the set value is notified (a set value is suggested).

  (8) The ball detection sensor 850 shown in the eighth to thirteenth embodiments outputs a LOW level signal when a game ball is not detected, and an HI level signal when a game ball is detected. However, this may be changed as follows. In other words, the HI level signal may be output when a game ball is not detected, and the LOW level signal may be output when a game ball is detected.

  (9) In the eighth to thirteenth embodiments, the hold icon MP is specially changed when the operation button 35 is operated in accordance with the winning of the lower action ball entry portion 62. The target to be aimed at is not limited to the lower operation entrance portion 62. It is sufficient if the hold icon MP is specially changed when the operation button 35 is operated in accordance with the arrival timing of the game ball at a specific location where the game ball can be reached. Alternatively, an upper variable winning device 64, a through gate 66, or the like may be used.

  (10) The ball detection sensor 850 is configured to detect the passage of the game ball by changing the magnetism when the game ball passes through the through-hole formed in the ball detection sensor 850. If it is possible, its specific configuration is arbitrary. For example, an optical sensor having a light emitting element and a light receiving element may be employed as the sphere detection sensor.

  Further, whether or not a part of the ball passage 801 is configured by the ball detection sensor 850 is also arbitrary. However, an increase in the distance between the detection position and the ball detection sensor can be a factor that makes it difficult to identify the detection position. Therefore, in order to make the ball detection sensor visible and facilitate the visual identification of the positional relationship between the ball detection sensor and the game ball, the ball detection sensor is provided in the ball passage 801 to detect the detection position DP and the ball detection. It is preferable to suppress separation from the sensor.

  (11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the lottery based on the entrance to the right operation entrance portion 63 (second entrance portion 63, 63e) is the lower operation entrance portion 62 (first entrance portion 62, 63d). ), A difference was made so that it would be more advantageous to the player than the lottery based on the entry to the ball), but this was changed to enter the ball to the right action ball entry portion 63 (second ball entry portion 63, 63e). A difference may be provided so that the lottery based is more disadvantageous to the player than the lottery based on the ball entering the lower working ball entering portion 62 (first ball entering portion 62, 63d). In addition, about the specific structure for providing the difference of an advantage, it is not limited to the difference of the ratio used as a probability variation big hit result. For example, the difference in the advantage may be provided by providing a difference in the number of rounds (or the ratio of the number of rounds) when the jackpot result is obtained.

  (12) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  Furthermore, a pachinko machine and a slot machine that have a take-in device and start rotation of the reel by operating a start lever after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device The present invention can also be applied to game machines in which and are fused.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a characteristic configuration extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
The following group A of features is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1) "In the gaming machine of the type described above, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature A1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
The first special information (for example, the hold information related to the first operating port 62a) is acquired when a ball enters the first starting ball entering part (for example, the first operating port 62a) provided in the game area. 1 special information acquisition means (function to execute information acquisition processing based on entering the first working port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
First acquisition information storage means (first working port holding area Ra of RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
First lottery means (first operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that sequentially performs a first lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means. A function to execute a lottery process based on entering the ball)
Second special information for acquiring second special information (holding information related to the second working port 63a) when a ball enters a second starting ball entering part (for example, the right working port 63a) provided in the game area. Information acquisition means (function of executing an information acquisition process based on entering the second operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second acquisition information storage means (second working port holding area Rb of RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
Second lottery means (second operating port 63a in MPU 602 of main controller 162) that sequentially performs second lottery processing (lottery such as jackpot) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means. A function to execute a lottery process based on entering the ball)
Each of the first display unit and the second display unit has a first display unit (for example, a first working port display unit D1) and a second display unit (for example, a second working port display unit D2). A pattern display means (for example, main display unit 81) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
Prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the fact that the first lottery process has been performed by the first lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the first display unit. The first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means that the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time. First game time control means for controlling the picture display means such that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information (for example, game time control related to the first operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Processing function), and
Prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, or based on the fact that the second lottery process has been performed by the second lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the second display unit. And displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process and ending the variable display of the pattern as one game time, the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means Second game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information (for example, game time control related to the second operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Processing function), and
The lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the first game times control means stops displaying a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result, or the lottery result by the second lottery means is predetermined. A special game state (for example, an open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the second game time control means stops and displays a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result. Special game state transition means (function to execute the transition processing to the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The game times by the first game time control means and the game times by the second game time control means can be simultaneously advanced,
As the normal game state, a first game state (for example, a first normal game state) in which the variable display period of the picture on the first display unit is shorter than the variable display period of the picture on the second display unit, and the first display A second game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) in which the variable display period of the pattern in the unit is longer than the variable display period of the pattern in the second display unit,
A reference number setting means (a function for setting the number of times in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number of times (number of time reductions) when shifting to the second gaming state;
When the number of games related to the first display unit executed in the second game state becomes the reference number, normal game state transition means (for example, a transition to a normal game state different from the second game state) A function of executing a transition process to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162,
A plurality of variable display periods (for example, 60 sec, 120 sec, 180 sec) having different lengths are provided as variable display periods of the pattern of the first display section in the second gaming state,
First display unit period determining means (main control device) that determines a variable display period of the picture on the first display unit so that it is one of the plurality of variable display periods when the second gaming state is set. 162. A gaming machine provided with a function of determining a variation display time of a pattern in the display unit D1 for the first working port in the MPU 602 of 162.

  According to the feature A1, the transition from the first game state to the second game state causes the main entrance part and the display part of the game progress to change from the first start entrance part and the first display part to the second start entrance. And the second display unit. Then, after the transition to the second gaming state, the second gaming state is continued until the gaming number related to the first display unit reaches the reference number. Here, in the second gaming state, a plurality of variable display periods of the pattern in the first starting entrance part are prepared, and the substantial length of the second gaming state depends on which variable display period is set, In other words, the number of game times to be executed related to the second starting entrance part changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to achieve monotonization of the game and contribute to improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
The first special information (for example, the hold information related to the first operating port 62a) is acquired when a ball enters the first starting ball entering part (for example, the first operating port 62a) provided in the game area. 1 special information acquisition means (function to execute information acquisition processing based on entering the first working port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
First acquisition information storage means (first working port holding area Ra of RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
First lottery means (first operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that sequentially performs a first lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means. A function to execute a lottery process based on entering the ball)
The second special information (holding information related to the second operation port 63a) is acquired when a ball enters a second start ball entering part (for example, the second operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Special information acquisition means (function of executing an information acquisition process based on entering the second operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second acquisition information storage means (second working port holding area Rb of RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
Second lottery means (second operating port 63a in MPU 602 of main controller 162) that sequentially performs second lottery processing (lottery such as jackpot) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means. A function to execute a lottery process based on entering the ball)
Each of the first display unit and the second display unit has a first display unit (for example, a first working port display unit D1) and a second display unit (for example, a second working port display unit D2). A pattern display means (for example, main display unit 81) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
Prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the fact that the first lottery process has been performed by the first lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the first display unit. The first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means that the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time. First game time control means for controlling the picture display means such that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information (for example, game time control related to the first operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Processing function), and
Prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, or based on the fact that the second lottery process has been performed by the second lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the second display unit. And displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process and ending the variable display of the pattern as one game time, the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means Second game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information (for example, game time control related to the second operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Processing function), and
The lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the first game times control means stops displaying a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result, or the lottery result by the second lottery means is predetermined. A special game state (for example, an open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the second game time control means stops and displays a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result. Special game state transition means (function to execute the transition processing to the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The game times by the first game time control means and the game times by the second game time control means can be simultaneously advanced,
As the normal game state, a first game state (for example, a first normal game state) in which the variable display period of the picture on the first display unit is shorter than the variable display period of the picture on the second display unit, and the first display A second game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) in which the variable display period of the pattern in the unit is longer than the variable display period of the pattern in the second display unit,
A reference number setting means (a function for setting the number of times in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number of times (number of time reductions) when shifting to the second gaming state;
When the number of games related to the first display unit executed in the second game state becomes the reference number, normal game state transition means (for example, a transition to a normal game state different from the second game state) (for example, A function of executing a transition process to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162),
When shifting to the second gaming state, the first period information (for example, the variable display time table B1) and the variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit are likely to be longer or longer than the first period information. Period information setting means for setting any period information including second period information (for example, the variable display time table B2);
A period for a first display unit that determines a variable display period of a picture executed in the first display unit based on the period information set by the period information setting unit when in the second gaming state And a determining means (a function for determining a display time for changing the pattern in the display unit D1 for the first operating port in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162).

  According to the feature A2, the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state causes the main entrance part and display part of the game progress from the first starting entrance part and the first display part to the second starting entrance part. And the second display unit. Then, after the transition to the second gaming state, the second gaming state is continued until the gaming number related to the first display unit reaches the reference number. Here, in the second gaming state, a plurality of variable display periods of the pattern in the first starting entrance part are prepared, and the substantial length of the second gaming state depends on which variable display period is set, In other words, the number of game times to be executed related to the second starting entrance part changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to achieve monotonization of the game and contribute to improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

Feature A3. A first variable display period (for example, 60 sec) and a second variable longer than the first variable display period as a variable display period of the picture executed in the first display unit in the second gaming state. Display period (for example, 180 sec),
The difference between the first variable display period and the second variable display period is set to be longer than the shortest period of the variable display period of the picture on the second display unit in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2, wherein

  With the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to make a clear difference in the number of games that can be executed in the second gaming state (the number of games related to the second starting ball entering portion).

Feature A4. A first variable display period (for example, 60 sec) and a second variable longer than the first variable display period as a variable display period of the picture executed in the first display unit in the second gaming state. Display period (for example, 180 sec),
The difference between the first variable display period and the second variable display period is set to be longer than the longest period of the variable display period of the picture on the second display unit in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2, wherein

  With the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to make a clear difference in the number of games that can be executed in the second gaming state (the number of games related to the second starting ball entering portion).

Feature A5. A first variable display period (for example, 60 sec) and a second variable longer than the first variable display period as a variable display period of the picture executed in the first display unit in the second gaming state. Display period (for example, 180 sec),
Compared to entering the second gaming state based on the entry to the first starting entry part, compared to entering the second gaming state based on entering the second starting entry part The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the second variable display period is more easily set.

  As shown in the feature A1 and the like, in the second game state, the game progresses with the game times related to the second starting entrance part as the main. Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, a relatively long second variable display period is likely to be set when the player enters the second gaming state again based on the entry into the second starting entry portion. , Can enhance the sharpness of the game.

Feature A6. The first acquisition information storage means can store a plurality (for example, four) of the first special information,
In the first gaming state, the variable display period of the picture on the first display unit is shortened based on the number of first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, and in the second gaming state, The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the shortening based on the number of first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means is not performed. .

  As shown in feature A6, when the variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit is determined in the second gaming state, variable display is performed according to the number of special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means. By disabling the function that shortens the period, it is possible to prevent an excessive bias in the advantage in the second gaming state.

Feature A7. The first acquisition information storage means can store a plurality (for example, four) of the first special information,
In the first gaming state, the variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit is shortened based on the number of first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, while in the second gaming state Is configured not to perform the shortening based on the number of first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means,
The second acquisition information storage means can store a plurality (for example, four) of the second special information,
Second display unit period determining means for determining the variable display period of the pattern on the second display unit (function of determining the variable display time of the pattern on the second entrance display unit D2 in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) ), And the second display period determination means is based on the number of second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means in the second gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the variable display period is shortened.

  As shown in feature A6, when the variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit is determined in the second gaming state, variable display is performed according to the number of special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means. By disabling the function that shortens the period, it is possible to prevent an excessive bias in the advantage in the second gaming state.

  Here, in the second gaming state, the variation display time of the pattern on the second display unit is shorter than the first display unit as described above, but the variation display of the pattern on the second display unit is relatively short. The time is shortened based on the number of second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means. Thereby, the function which suppresses monotonization of a game can be exhibited suitably, suppressing the excessive bias of the advantage mentioned above.

Feature A8. The first acquisition information storage means can store a plurality (for example, four) of the first special information,
In the first gaming state, the larger the number of first special information stored in the first acquired information storage means, the shorter the variable display period of the picture on the first display unit. In the second gaming state, Characteristic A1 thru | or the characteristics characterized by being comprised so that the variable display period of the pattern in the said 1st display part may become long, so that there are many 1st special information memorize | stored in the said 1st acquisition information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of A5.

  As shown in feature A1, in the first game state, the game progresses mainly with the game turn related to the first starting ball entering part, and in the second game state, the game time related to the second start ball entering part is main. As the game progresses. Here, in a 1st game state, it is set as the structure in which the variable display period of the pattern in a 1st display part becomes short, so that the number of the 1st special information memorize | stored in the 1st acquisition information memory | storage means becomes large. Can be speeded up. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the larger the number of first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, the longer the variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit. With such a configuration, when the first special information is carried over from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the larger the number of the first special information, the more advantageous to the player. This is a preferable configuration for urging the launch of the game ball toward the first start entrance part in the first game state.

Feature A9. The reference number is a first reference number, and the reference number setting unit is a first reference number setting unit,
A second reference number setting means (a function for setting the number in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for setting a second reference number (number of time reductions) when shifting to the second gaming state;
The normal game state transition means determines that the number of games related to the second display unit is the first number before the number of games related to the first display unit executed in the second game state becomes the first reference number. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A8, wherein when the number of times reaches two reference times, the game machine is configured to shift to a normal gaming state different from the second gaming state.

  By setting the second reference number as the end condition of the second gaming state as shown in this feature, even if there is a variation in the frequency of entering the first starting entrance part, It can suppress that 2 game state continues excessively long.

  Feature A10. The gaming machine according to Feature A9, wherein the second reference number is greater than the first reference number.

  In the configuration in which the game in the second gaming state proceeds mainly with the game times related to the second starting ball entering portion as shown in the feature A1, etc., the second reference number is set to be larger than the first reference number. Thereby, the structure which repeats the game time which concerns on a 2nd start ball | bowl entrance part during 1 game play which concerns on a 1st ball start ball | bowl can be implement | achieved suitably.

Feature A11. As the variable display period of the picture executed in the second display unit when the second gaming state is set, a first variable display period and a second variable display period longer than the first variable display period Have
The predetermined winning results include a first winning result and a second winning result,
The period information setting means includes
The first period information is set when the lottery result is the first winning result, and the second period information is set when the lottery result is the second winning result. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein:

  As shown in this feature, by associating the result of the lottery based on the entry to the first / second start entry part and the period information, the control process related to the game is excessively complicated. Can be suppressed.

  Feature A12. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the second lottery means is configured to be more likely to be the second winning result than the first lottery means.

  As shown in the feature A1 and the like, in the second game state, the game progresses with the game times related to the second starting entrance part as the main. Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, a relatively long second variable display period is likely to be set when the player enters the second gaming state again based on the entry into the second starting entry portion. , Can enhance the sharpness of the game.

  Feature A13. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the lottery by the second lottery means is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery by the first lottery means. .

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game proceeds advantageously for the player by shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. By diversifying the game times related to the second starting ball entering portion that can be executed in such a state, monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed.

<Feature B group>
The following feature B group is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. As for the background art “see (for example, Patent Document 1)”, there is an invention that “the gaming machine of the type described above still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game”. It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature B1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
The first special information (for example, the hold information related to the first operating port 62a) is acquired when a ball enters the first starting ball entering part (for example, the first operating port 62a) provided in the game area. 1 special information acquisition means (function to execute information acquisition processing based on entering the first working port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
First acquisition information storage means (first working port holding area Ra of RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
First lottery means (first operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that sequentially performs a first lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means. A function to execute a lottery process based on entering the ball)
Second special information for acquiring second special information (holding information related to the second working port 63a) when a ball enters a second starting ball entering part (for example, the right working port 63a) provided in the game area. Information acquisition means (function of executing an information acquisition process based on entering the second operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second acquisition information storage means (second working port holding area Rb of RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
Second lottery means (second operating port 63a in MPU 602 of main controller 162) that sequentially performs second lottery processing (lottery such as jackpot) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means. A function to execute a lottery process based on entering the ball)
Each of the first display unit and the second display unit has a first display unit (for example, a first working port display unit D1) and a second display unit (for example, a second working port display unit D2). A pattern display means (for example, main display unit 81) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
Prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the fact that the first lottery process has been performed by the first lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the first display unit. The first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means that the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time. First game time control means for controlling the picture display means such that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information (for example, game time control related to the first operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Processing function), and
Prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, or based on the fact that the second lottery process has been performed by the second lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the second display unit. And displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process and ending the variable display of the pattern as one game time, the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means Second game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information (for example, game time control related to the second operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Processing function), and
The lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the first game times control means stops displaying a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result, or the lottery result by the second lottery means is predetermined. A special game state (for example, an open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the second game time control means stops and displays a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result. Special game state transition means (function to execute the transition processing to the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The game times by the first game time control means and the game times by the second game time control means can be simultaneously advanced,
As the normal game state, a first game state (for example, a first normal game state) in which the variable display period of the picture on the first display unit is shorter than the variable display period of the picture on the second display unit, and the first display A second game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) in which the variable display period of the pattern in the unit is longer than the variable display period of the pattern in the second display unit,
A reference number setting means (a function for setting the number of times in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number of times (number of time reductions) when shifting to the second gaming state;
When the number of games related to the first display unit executed in the second game state becomes the reference number, normal game state transition means (for example, a transition to a normal game state different from the second game state) A function of executing a transition process to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162,
A plurality of variable display periods (for example, 1 sec, 2 sec, 3 sec, 4 sec, 5 sec, 6 sec, 7 sec, 8 sec) having different lengths are provided as variable display periods of the picture on the second display section in the second gaming state. And
Second display unit period determining means (main control device) for determining the variable display period of the picture on the second display unit so that it becomes one of the plurality of variable display periods when the second gaming state is set. 162. A gaming machine having a function of determining a display time of a pattern change in the second working port display unit D2 in the MPU 602 of 162.

  According to the feature B1, the main entrance and display part of the game progress by shifting from the first game state to the second game state is changed from the first start entrance and the first display part to the second start entrance. And the second display unit. Then, after the transition to the second gaming state, the second gaming state is continued until the gaming number related to the first display unit reaches the reference number. Here, in the second gaming state, a plurality of variable display periods of the pattern in the second starting entrance part are prepared, and the substantial length of the second gaming state depends on which variable display period is set, In other words, the number of game times to be executed related to the second starting entrance part changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to achieve monotonization of the game and contribute to improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
The first special information (for example, the hold information related to the first operating port 62a) is acquired when a ball enters the first starting ball entering part (for example, the first operating port 62a) provided in the game area. 1 special information acquisition means (function to execute information acquisition processing based on entering the first working port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
First acquisition information storage means (first working port holding area Ra of RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
First lottery means (first operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that sequentially performs a first lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means. A function to execute a lottery process based on entering the ball)
The second special information (holding information related to the second operation port 63a) is acquired when a ball enters a second start ball entering part (for example, the second operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Special information acquisition means (function of executing an information acquisition process based on entering the second operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second acquisition information storage means (second working port holding area Rb of RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
Second lottery means (second operating port 63a in MPU 602 of main controller 162) that sequentially performs second lottery processing (lottery such as jackpot) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means. A function to execute a lottery process based on entering the ball)
Each of the first display unit and the second display unit has a first display unit (for example, a first working port display unit D1) and a second display unit (for example, a second working port display unit D2). A pattern display means (for example, main display unit 81) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
Prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the fact that the first lottery process has been performed by the first lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the first display unit. The first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means that the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time. First game time control means for controlling the picture display means such that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information (for example, game time control related to the first operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Processing function), and
Prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, or based on the fact that the second lottery process has been performed by the second lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the second display unit. And displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process and ending the variable display of the pattern as one game time, the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means Second game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information (for example, game time control related to the second operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Processing function), and
The lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the first game times control means stops displaying a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result, or the lottery result by the second lottery means is predetermined. A special game state (for example, an open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the second game time control means stops and displays a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result. Special game state transition means (function to execute the transition processing to the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The game times by the first game time control means and the game times by the second game time control means can be simultaneously advanced,
As the normal game state, a first game state (for example, a first normal game state) in which the variable display period of the picture on the first display unit is shorter than the variable display period of the picture on the second display unit, and the first display A second game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) in which the variable display period of the pattern in the unit is longer than the variable display period of the pattern in the second display unit,
A reference number setting means (a function for setting the number of times in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number of times (number of time reductions) when shifting to the second gaming state;
When the number of games related to the first display unit executed in the second game state becomes the reference number, normal game state transition means (for example, a transition to a normal game state different from the second game state) (for example, A function of executing a transition process to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162),
When shifting to the second gaming state, period information group setting means (in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) sets a period information group associated with the variable display period of the picture executed in the second display unit. Function to set the variable display time table for the second working port),
A second display unit that determines a variable display period of a picture to be executed in the second display unit based on the period information group set by the period information group setting unit when in the second gaming state Period determining means (function of determining the variable display time of the pattern in the display part D2 for the second working port in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162),
As the period information group, a first period information group (for example, a variable display time table A1) and a second period information group in which the variable display period of the pattern on the second display unit is likely to be shorter than the first period information group ( For example, a gaming machine having a variable display time table A2).

  According to the feature B2, the transition from the first game state to the second game state causes the main entrance part and display part of the game progress from the first start entrance part and the first display part to the second start entrance. And the second display unit. Then, after the transition to the second gaming state, the second gaming state is continued until the gaming number related to the first display unit reaches the reference number. Here, in the second gaming state, a plurality of period information groups (tables) for determining the variable display period of the pattern on the second display unit are prepared, and the second information is set depending on which period information group is set. The substantial length of the game state, that is, the number of times of game play relating to the second starting entrance portion will change. With such a configuration, it is possible to achieve monotonization of the game and contribute to improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

Feature B3. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
The first special information (for example, the hold information related to the first operating port 62a) is acquired when a ball enters the first starting ball entering part (for example, the first operating port 62a) provided in the game area. 1 special information acquisition means (function to execute information acquisition processing based on entering the first working port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162);
First acquisition information storage means (first working port holding area Ra of RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
First lottery means (first operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that sequentially performs a first lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means. A function to execute a lottery process based on entering the ball)
The second special information (holding information related to the second operation port 63a) is acquired when a ball enters a second start ball entering part (for example, the second operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Special information acquisition means (function of executing an information acquisition process based on entering the second operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second acquisition information storage means (second working port holding area Rb of RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
Second lottery means (second operating port 63a in MPU 602 of main controller 162) that sequentially performs second lottery processing (lottery such as jackpot) based on the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means. A function to execute a lottery process based on entering the ball)
Each of the first display unit and the second display unit has a first display unit (for example, a first working port display unit D1) and a second display unit (for example, a second working port display unit D2). A pattern display means (for example, main display unit 81) capable of variably displaying a pattern;
Prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the fact that the first lottery process has been performed by the first lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the first display unit. The first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means that the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time. First game time control means for controlling the picture display means such that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information (for example, game time control related to the first operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Processing function), and
Prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, or based on the fact that the second lottery process has been performed by the second lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the second display unit. And displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process and ending the variable display of the pattern as one game time, the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means Second game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information (for example, game time control related to the second operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Processing function), and
The lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the first game times control means stops displaying a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result, or the lottery result by the second lottery means is predetermined. A special game state (for example, an open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the second game time control means stops and displays a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result. Special game state transition means (function to execute the transition processing to the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162),
The game times by the first game time control means and the game times by the second game time control means can be simultaneously advanced,
As the normal game state, a first game state (for example, a first normal game state) in which the variable display period of the picture on the first display unit is shorter than the variable display period of the picture on the second display unit, and the first display A second game state (for example, a fourth normal game state) in which the variable display period of the pattern in the unit is longer than the variable display period of the pattern in the second display unit,
A reference number setting means (a function for setting the number of times in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for setting a reference number of times (number of time reductions) when shifting to the second gaming state;
When the number of games related to the first display unit executed in the second game state becomes the reference number, normal game state transition means (for example, a transition to a normal game state different from the second game state) (for example, A function of executing a transition process to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162),
When changing to the second gaming state, second display mode setting means (main control) for setting a variable display mode for controlling the variable display period of the picture of the second display unit in the second gaming state. The function of setting the variable display time table for the second working port in the MPU 602 of the device 162),
When the second game state is set, a variable display period of a picture executed in the second display unit is determined based on the variable display mode set by the second display mode setting unit. 2 display unit period determining means (function of determining the variable display time of the pattern in the second working port display unit D2 in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162),
A gaming machine, wherein the variable display mode includes a plurality of variable display modes configured such that the variable display periods of the pattern in the second display section are different in length.

  According to the feature B3, when the first gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the main entrance portion and the display portion of the game progress are changed from the first starting entrance portion and the first display portion to the second starting entrance ball. And the second display unit. Then, after the transition to the second gaming state, the second gaming state is continued until the gaming number related to the first display unit reaches the reference number. Here, in the second gaming state, a plurality of variable display modes (tables) for determining the variable display period of the picture in the second starting entrance part are prepared, depending on which variable display mode is set. The substantial length of the second gaming state, i.e., the number of times of playing the game times related to the second starting ball entering portion will change. With such a configuration, it is possible to achieve monotonization of the game and contribute to improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  For example, as the “variable display mode”, it is preferable to provide a first variable display mode and a second variable display mode in which the variable display period of the picture in the second display unit is shorter than the first variable display mode.

Feature B4. The second acquisition information storage means can store a plurality (for example, four) of the second special information,
As the variable display mode, a first variable display mode and a second variable display mode are provided,
In the second variable display mode, when the number of the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means is a predetermined number, the second acquisition is performed in the first variable display mode. Compared to the case where the number of the second special information stored in the information storage means is the predetermined number, the variable display period of the picture on the second display unit is configured to be shorter. The gaming machine according to Feature B3.

  According to the configuration shown in feature B4, when the second variable display mode is set, the variable display period of the pattern on the second display unit is shorter than when the first variable display mode is set. Therefore, the game times related to the second starting ball entering part can be executed more times until the second gaming state is finished. By setting it as such a structure, the effect shown to characteristic B3 can be exhibited suitably.

  Feature B5. The gaming machine according to Feature B4, wherein the predetermined number is the same as the number of the second special information that can be stored in the second acquired information storage means.

  When at least the number of stored second special information has reached the upper limit, a difference is provided so that the variable display period in the second variable display mode is shortened. The player can be encouraged to generate as much as possible. This can contribute to speeding up of game progress.

  Feature B6. The difference in the variable display period of the pattern in the second display unit when the first variable display mode and the second variable display mode are compared is the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means. The gaming machine according to Feature B4 or Feature B5, wherein the gaming machine is configured to increase as the number increases.

  According to the configuration shown in the feature B6, it is possible to prompt the player to generate as many balls as possible into the second starting ball entering portion. This can contribute to speeding up of game progress.

  Feature B7. The difference in the variable display period of the pattern in the second display unit when the first variable display mode and the second variable display mode are compared is determined in the second display unit determined in the first variable display mode. The gaming machine according to any one of features B4 to B6, wherein the gaming machine is shorter than the shortest period of the variable display period of the picture.

  According to the structure shown in this feature, while providing a difference in the number of executions of the game times related to the second starting ball entering part in the second game state, the game progress speed in the second game state greatly changes due to the difference. Can be suppressed.

Feature B8. The reference number is a first reference number, and the reference number setting unit is a first reference number setting unit,
A second reference number setting means (a function for setting the number in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for setting a second reference number (number of time reductions) when shifting to the second gaming state;
The normal game state transition means determines that the number of games related to the second display unit is the first number before the number of games related to the first display unit executed in the second game state becomes the first reference number. The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B7, wherein when the number of times reaches two reference times, the game machine is configured to shift to a normal gaming state different from the second gaming state.

  By setting the second reference number as the end condition of the second gaming state as shown in this feature, even if there is a variation in the frequency of entering the first starting entrance part, It can suppress that 2 game state continues excessively long.

  Feature B9. The gaming machine according to Feature B8, wherein the second reference number is greater than the first reference number.

  In the configuration in which the game in the second game state proceeds mainly with the game turn related to the second starting ball entering portion as shown in the feature B3 or the like, the second reference number is set to be larger than the first reference number. Thereby, the structure which repeats the game time which concerns on a 2nd start ball | bowl entrance part during 1 game play which concerns on a 1st ball start ball | bowl can be implement | achieved suitably.

Feature B10. As the variable display period of the picture executed in the second display unit when the second gaming state is set, a first variable display period and a second variable display period longer than the first variable display period Have
The predetermined winning results include a first winning result and a second winning result,
The period information setting means includes
The first period information is set when the lottery result is the first winning result, and the second period information is set when the lottery result is the second winning result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B9, wherein:

  As shown in this feature, by associating the result of the lottery based on the entry to the first / second start entry part and the period information, the control process related to the game is excessively complicated. Can be suppressed.

  Feature B11. The gaming machine according to Feature B10, wherein the second lottery means is configured to be more likely to be the second winning result than the first lottery means.

  As shown in the feature B3 and the like, in the second game state, the game progresses with the game times related to the second starting entrance part as the main. Here, according to the configuration shown in this feature, a relatively long second variable display period is likely to be set when the player enters the second gaming state again based on the entry into the second starting entry portion. , Can enhance the sharpness of the game.

  Feature B12. The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B11, wherein the lottery by the second lottery means is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery by the first lottery means. .

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game proceeds advantageously for the player by shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. By diversifying the game times related to the second starting ball entering portion that can be executed in such a state, monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed.

Feature B13. When changing to the second gaming state, first display unit mode setting means (main control) for setting a variable display mode for controlling the variable display period of the picture on the first display unit in the second gaming state. A function of setting a variable display time table for the first working port in the MPU 602 of the device 162),
As a variable display mode for controlling the variable display period of the picture of the first display unit, a plurality of variable display modes configured so that the variable display period of the picture in the first display part is different in length are provided. And
When the second game state is set, a variable display period of a picture executed in the first display unit is determined based on the variable display mode set by the first display mode setting unit. One of the display unit period determining means (the function of determining the variable display time of the pattern in the first working port display unit D1 in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  If the configuration shown in this feature is applied to the configuration shown in feature B3, etc., diversification of the second gaming state is realized by a combination of the variable display mode for the first display unit and the variable display mode for the second display unit. it can. This is preferable for suppressing an excessive increase in the types of variable display modes in the gaming machine.

  It is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the features B4 to B13 to the features B1 to B2.

  Further, the technical ideas shown in the features B1 to B13 may be applied to the feature A group.

<Feature C group>
The following group C is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1) "In the gaming machine of the type described above, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature C1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
First special information (for example, holding information related to the lower operation port 62a) is acquired when a ball enters a first start ball entering portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area. Information acquisition means (function of executing information acquisition processing based on entering the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
First acquisition information storage means (lower working port holding area Ra for the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
Based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, first lottery means (successful lottery etc.) is sequentially performed on the first lottery means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 to the lower operation port 62a). A function to execute a lottery process based on
Second special information for acquiring second special information (holding information related to the right operation port 63a) when a ball enters a second start entrance part (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition means (function of executing information acquisition processing based on entering the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second acquisition information storage means (reservation area Rb for the right working port of RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
Based on the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means, second lottery means (successful lottery etc.) is sequentially performed based on the second lottery means (to the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). A function to execute a lottery process based on
It has a 1st display part (for example, display part D1 for lower operation ports) and a 2nd display part (for example, display part D2 for right operation ports), and a picture is displayed in each of the 1st display part and the 2nd display part. Variable displayable picture display means (for example, main display unit 81),
Prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the fact that the first lottery process has been performed by the first lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the first display unit. The first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means that the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time. First game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture of each game time is performed according to the information (for example, game time control processing related to the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) Function to execute)
Prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, or based on the fact that the second lottery process has been performed by the second lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the second display unit. And displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process and ending the variable display of the pattern as one game time, the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means Second game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information (for example, the game time control process related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Function to execute)
The lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the first game times control means stops displaying a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result, or the lottery result by the second lottery means is predetermined. A special game state (for example, an open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player over the normal game state based on the result of winning and the fact that the picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game time control means. Special gaming state transition means (function to execute the gaming state transition processing related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162),
The game times by the first game time control means and the game times by the second game time control means can be simultaneously advanced,
The normal gaming state includes a first gaming state (first normal gaming state) and a second gaming state (second normal gaming state to fifth normal gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. Including
The second gaming state is a first advantageous gaming state (second normal gaming state or fourth normal gaming state) in which the variable display period of the picture on the first display unit is shorter than the variable display period of the picture on the second display unit. ) And a second advantageous gaming state (third normal gaming state or fifth normal gaming state) in which the variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit is longer than the variable display period of the pattern on the second display unit. ,
When a predetermined transition condition is established in the first advantageous gaming state, the advantageous gaming state transition means (the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 performs the first transition) from the first advantageous gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state. (3) a gaming machine having a function of executing a transition process to a normal gaming state or a first normal gaming state.

  According to the feature C1, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state in which the variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit is shorter than the variable display period of the pattern on the second display unit, the first display is performed. The display shifts to the second advantageous gaming state in which the variable display period of the pattern in the section is longer than the variable display period of the pattern in the second display section. That is, the main target of the game progress is shifted from the game times related to the first display part (first start ball entering part) to the game times related to the second display part (second start ball entering part). Thereby, the monotonization of the game in the advantageous game state (second game state) can be suppressed, and it can contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
First special information (for example, holding information related to the lower operation port 62a) is acquired when a ball enters a first start ball entering portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area. Information acquisition means (function of executing information acquisition processing based on entering the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
First acquisition information storage means (lower working port holding area Ra for the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
Based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, first lottery means (successful lottery etc.) is sequentially performed on the first lottery means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 to the lower operation port 62a). A function to execute a lottery process based on
Second special information for acquiring second special information (holding information related to the right operation port 63a) when a ball enters a second start entrance part (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition means (function of executing information acquisition processing based on entering the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second acquisition information storage means (reservation area Rb for the right working port of RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
Based on the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means, second lottery means (successful lottery etc.) is sequentially performed based on the second lottery means (to the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). A function to execute a lottery process based on
It has a 1st display part (for example, display part D1 for lower operation ports) and a 2nd display part (for example, display part D2 for right operation ports), and a picture is displayed in each of the 1st display part and the 2nd display part. Variable displayable picture display means (for example, main display unit 81),
Prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the fact that the first lottery process has been performed by the first lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the first display unit. The first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means that the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time. First game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture of each game time is performed according to the information (for example, game time control processing related to the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) Function to execute)
Prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, or based on the fact that the second lottery process has been performed by the second lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the second display unit. And displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process and ending the variable display of the pattern as one game time, the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means Second game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information (for example, the game time control process related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Function to execute)
The lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the first game times control means stops displaying a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result, or the lottery result by the second lottery means is predetermined. A special game state (for example, an open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player over the normal game state based on the result of winning and the fact that the picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game time control means. Special gaming state transition means (function to execute the gaming state transition processing related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162),
The game times by the first game time control means and the game times by the second game time control means can be simultaneously advanced,
As a lottery mode when performing the first lottery process by the first lottery means and when performing the second lottery process by the second lottery means, a high probability mode with a relatively high probability that the predetermined winning result will be obtained And a low probability mode with a relatively low probability of being the predetermined winning result,
The normal gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, a first high probability gaming state in which a variable display period of a picture on the first display unit is shorter than a variable display period of a picture on the second display unit. A variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit is longer than a variable display period of the pattern on the second display unit,
When a predetermined transition condition is established in the first high-probability gaming state, high-probability gaming state transition means (of the main control device 162) for transitioning from the first high-probability gaming state to the second high-probability gaming state. A gaming machine comprising a function of executing a transition process to the third normal gaming state in the MPU 602).

  According to the feature C2, when the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the first high-probability gaming state in which the variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit is shorter than the variable display period of the pattern on the second display unit, The display shifts to the second high-probability gaming state in which the variable display period of the pattern on the display unit is longer than the variable display period of the pattern on the second display unit. That is, the main target of the game progress is shifted from the game times related to the first display part (first start ball entering part) to the game times related to the second display part (second start ball entering part). Thereby, the monotonization of the game in the high-probability gaming state can be suppressed, and it can contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Feature C3. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
First special information (for example, holding information related to the lower operation port 62a) is acquired when a ball enters a first start ball entering portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area. Information acquisition means (function of executing information acquisition processing based on entering the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
First acquisition information storage means (lower working port holding area Ra for the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
Based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, first lottery means (successful lottery etc.) is sequentially performed on the first lottery means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 to the lower operation port 62a). A function to execute a lottery process based on
Second special information for acquiring second special information (holding information related to the right operation port 63a) when a ball enters a second start entrance part (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition means (function of executing information acquisition processing based on entering the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second acquisition information storage means (reservation area Rb for the right working port of RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
Based on the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means, second lottery means (successful lottery etc.) is sequentially performed based on the second lottery means (to the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). A function to execute a lottery process based on
It has a 1st display part (for example, display part D1 for lower operation ports) and a 2nd display part (for example, display part D2 for right operation ports), and a picture is displayed in each of the 1st display part and the 2nd display part. Variable displayable picture display means (for example, main display unit 81),
Prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the fact that the first lottery process has been performed by the first lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the first display unit. The first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means that the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time. First game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture of each game time is performed according to the information (for example, game time control processing related to the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) Function to execute)
Prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, or based on the fact that the second lottery process has been performed by the second lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the second display unit. And displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process and ending the variable display of the pattern as one game time, the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means Second game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information (for example, the game time control process related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Function to execute)
The lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the first game times control means stops displaying a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result, or the lottery result by the second lottery means is predetermined. A special game state (for example, an open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player over the normal game state based on the result of winning and the fact that the picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game time control means. Special gaming state transition means (function to execute the gaming state transition processing related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162),
The game times by the first game time control means and the game times by the second game time control means can be simultaneously advanced,
As a lottery mode when performing the first lottery process by the first lottery means and when performing the second lottery process by the second lottery means, a high probability mode with a relatively high probability that the predetermined winning result will be obtained And a low probability mode with a relatively low probability of being the predetermined winning result,
The normal gaming state is a gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, a first high probability gaming state in which a variable display period of a picture on the first display unit is shorter than a variable display period of a picture on the second display unit. A variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit is longer than a variable display period of the pattern on the second display unit,
Reference number setting means (a function for setting the number of times in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for setting a reference number (number of time reductions) when shifting to the first high probability gaming state, and the first high probability gaming state High-probability gaming state transition means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162, the first high-probability gaming state transitions from the first high-probability gaming state to the second high-probability gaming state when the number of games executed in this manner becomes the reference number. (3) a function of executing a transition process to a normal gaming state).

  According to the feature C3, when the number of games executed in the first high-probability gaming state in which the variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit is shorter than the variable display period of the pattern on the second display unit becomes the reference number In this case, the state shifts to the second high-probability gaming state in which the variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit is longer than the variable display period of the pattern on the second display unit. That is, the main target of the game progress is shifted from the game times related to the first display part (first start ball entering part) to the game times related to the second display part (second start ball entering part). Thereby, the monotonization of the game in the high-probability gaming state can be suppressed, and it can contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature C4. The gaming machine according to Feature C3, wherein the entry into the first start entry part is set to be more advantageous to the player than the entry into the second start entry part.

  According to the feature C4, the transition from the first high probability gaming state to the second high probability gaming state causes the game target to be related to the first starting ball entering part which is relatively unfavorable to the player → The game moves to the relatively advantageous second starting entrance part. In this way, if the player's advantage changes in the high probability gaming state, the game has progressed without a predetermined winning result in spite of the transition to the first high probability gaming state. Even in this case, the player's expectation can be directed to the transition to the second high-probability gaming state. By having such a relief function, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the player's gaming motivation in the high probability gaming state.

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is “the lottery by the second lottery means is different from the lottery by the first lottery means so that the probability of a predetermined winning result corresponding to the transition to the high probability gaming state is higher. It is also possible to use “a gaming machine according to the feature C3,”.

  Feature C5. The high-probability gaming state transition means starts from the first high-probability gaming state when the number of games related to the first starting ball entering portion executed in the first high-probability gaming state becomes the reference number. The gaming machine according to Feature C4, wherein the gaming machine is configured to shift to the second high-probability gaming state.

  Configuration for shifting to the second high-probability gaming state with reference to the game times related to the first display part (first starting ball-incoming part), which is on the side where the display variation time of the pattern is relatively short in the first high-probability gaming state According to this, it is possible to urge the player who expects to shift to the second high-probability gaming state to play a game related to the first starting ball-in part. Thus, by encouraging the player to enter the side where the game progresses smoothly, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game from being darkly delayed.

  Further, in the configuration in which the game state shifts to the second high-probability gaming state when the number of game times related to the first starting and entering part, which is relatively disadvantageous for the player, reaches the second high-probability gaming state, The advantage at the time of shifting to the stochastic gaming state can be greatly changed, and the sharpness of the game can be strengthened.

  Feature C6. The high-probability gaming state transition means starts from the first high-probability gaming state when the number of games related to the second starting pitching portion executed in the first high-probability gaming state becomes the reference number. The gaming machine according to Feature C4, wherein the gaming machine is configured to shift to the second high-probability gaming state.

  Configuration for shifting to the second high-probability gaming state with reference to the game times related to the second display section (second start-in ball entering section) which is on the side of the relatively long variation display time of the pattern in the first high-probability gaming state According to the above, the relief function shown in the feature C4 can be suitably exhibited by continuing to leak in the lottery at the entrance portion on the advantageous side.

  Feature C7. The high probability gaming state transition means includes the number of games related to the first starting ball entering portion executed in the first high probability gaming state and the second starting input executed in the first high probability gaming state. A feature C4 is characterized in that when the sum of the number of games related to the ball portion becomes the reference number of times, a transition is made from the first high probability game state to the second high probability game state. The gaming machine described.

  There is a possibility that a certain degree of deviation may occur in the frequency at which game balls flowing down the game area enter the entrance area. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that when the total number of games related to both pitches reaches the reference number, the transition to the second high-probability gaming state is made. It can suppress that a transfer function is not exhibited well.

Feature C8. In the first high-probability gaming state, the variable display of the pattern on the second display unit is performed while the variable display period of the pattern on the second display unit is executed once on the second display unit. Is configured to be executed multiple times,
In the second high-probability gaming state, the variable display of the pattern on the second display unit is performed while the variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit is executed once on the first display unit. The game machine according to any one of features C3 to C7, wherein the game machine is configured to be executed a plurality of times.

  According to the feature C8, if the other game round is executed a plurality of times during the game round relating to one of the entrance parts, the main target of the game progress can be clearly divided. Thereby, the function which suppresses monotonization of the game shown to the characteristic C3 can be exhibited suitably.

  Feature C9. In the first high-probability gaming state, the variable display period of each pattern on the second display unit is constant, and in the second high-probability gaming state, the variable display period of each pattern on the first display unit is constant. The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C8, characterized in that:

  In realizing diversification of the high-probability gaming state by switching the length of the variable display period of the pattern, there is a concern that an excessively complicated game will be a factor to confuse the player. Therefore, as shown in this feature, for the variable display on the side that is not the main game progress target, the variable display period is made steady, thereby realizing the diversification of the high probability gaming state and the occurrence of the above disadvantages. Can be suitably suppressed.

  Feature C10. Features C3 to C9, characterized by comprising distribution means for distributing game balls that have reached a predetermined location in the game area to the first start entrance ball portion and the second start entrance ball portion in a predetermined order. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature C10, it is preferable to reduce the chance that only the game times related to one of the entering parts progress independently, and to realize the diversification of the high probability gaming state by the cooperation of the first display unit and the second display unit. Can be demonstrated.

  Feature C11. The gaming machine according to Feature C10, wherein the predetermined distribution order is common to the first high probability gaming state and the second high probability gaming state.

  As shown in this feature, even if the order of distribution by the distribution means is shared between both high-probability gaming states and the structure is simplified, the high-probability gaming state is suitable due to the difference in the length of the variable display period of the pattern. Can be staged.

Feature C12. Guidance means (electrical accessory 71) that can be switched between a guidance state for guiding the entry to the predetermined location and a non-guidance state in which the guidance is not performed;
Switching means for switching the guidance means to the guidance state and the non-guidance state (function to execute support processing in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162),
As a switching mode of the guiding means by the switching means, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and a second switching mode that is more likely to be in the guiding state than the first switching mode are provided,
In the first high probability gaming state and the second high probability gaming state, the switching mode in the switching unit is configured to be the second switching mode. The feature C10 or the feature C11 Game machines.

  As shown in the feature C10 or the like, the configuration in which the game balls that have reached a predetermined location are distributed in a predetermined order to the first start ball entering part / the second start ball entering part is a game ball when viewed from one of the ball entering parts. It will be a hindrance in securing the number of balls entered. This is not preferable in realizing diversification of games by utilizing the simultaneous progress of game times. Therefore, as shown in this feature, in the first high-probability gaming state and the second high-probability gaming state, the guidance means switching mode is configured to be the second switching mode to compensate for the shortage of the number of balls entered By doing so, the above-mentioned problem can be solved preferably.

  Feature C13. In the case of transition from the first high probability gaming state to the second high probability gaming state, the variable display of the pattern on the second display unit straddles the first high probability gaming state and the second high probability gaming state. In any one of the features C3 to C12, the information is provided for notifying the transition to the second high-probability gaming state until the variable display is completed. The gaming machine described.

  In the configuration in which the game is diversified by switching the variable display period of the pattern as shown in the feature C3, the second start ball-in part that crosses the timing of transition from the first high probability game state to the second high probability game state The case where the variable display of the pattern which concerns on (2nd display part) is continued generate | occur | produces. In such a case, there is a concern that the shift between the transition timing and the variable display end timing of the picture may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, when such a shift occurs, the above-mentioned uncomfortable feeling may be alleviated by adopting a configuration in which the transition notification to the second high-probability gaming state is performed until the variable display of the pattern on the second display unit is completed. .

Feature C14. The high probability gaming state transition means is a first transition means,
The predetermined lottery result includes a special result (special winning result) configured to take over the lottery mode before the end of the special gaming state after the special gaming state ends,
When the special result is obtained in the first high probability gaming state, second transition means (in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) for transitioning from the first high probability gaming state to the second high probability gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C13, wherein the gaming machine has a function of executing a transition process to a third normal gaming state.

  According to the feature C14, an event occurs in which the game state is shifted to the second high probability game state before the number of games executed in the first high probability game state becomes the reference number. In this way, by diversifying the transition to the second high-probability gaming state, the degree of freedom for setting the reference number can be increased, and diversification of games can be suitably realized.

  The technical ideas shown in the features C4 to C14 may be applied to the features C1 to C2.

  Further, the technical ideas shown in the features C1 to C14 may be applied to the features A to B.

<Feature D group>
The following feature group D is “a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1) "In the gaming machine of the type described above, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature D1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
First special information (for example, holding information related to the lower operation port 62a) is acquired when a ball enters a first start ball entering portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area. Information acquisition means (function of executing information acquisition processing based on entering the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
First acquisition information storage means (lower working port holding area Ra for the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
Based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, first lottery means (successful lottery etc.) is sequentially performed on the first lottery means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 to the lower operation port 62a). A function to execute a lottery process based on
Second special information for acquiring second special information (holding information related to the right operation port 63a) when a ball enters a second start entrance part (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition means (function of executing information acquisition processing based on entering the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second acquisition information storage means (reservation area Rb for the right working port of RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
Based on the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means, second lottery means (successful lottery etc.) is sequentially performed based on the second lottery means (to the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). A function to execute a lottery process based on
It has a 1st display part (for example, display part D1 for lower operation ports) and a 2nd display part (for example, display part D2 for right operation ports), and a picture is displayed in each of the 1st display part and the 2nd display part. Variable displayable picture display means (for example, main display unit 81),
Prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the fact that the first lottery process has been performed by the first lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the first display unit. The first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means that the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time. First game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture of each game time is performed according to the information (for example, game time control processing related to the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) Function to execute)
Prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, or based on the fact that the second lottery process has been performed by the second lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the second display unit. And displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process and ending the variable display of the pattern as one game time, the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means Second game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information (for example, the game time control process related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Function to execute)
The lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the first game times control means stops displaying a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result, or the lottery result by the second lottery means is predetermined. A special game state (for example, an open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player over the normal game state based on the result of winning and the fact that the picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game time control means. Special gaming state transition means (function to execute the gaming state transition processing related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162),
The game times by the first game time control means and the game times by the second game time control means can be simultaneously advanced,
The normal gaming state includes a first gaming state in which a variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit is shorter than a variable display period of the pattern on the second display unit, and a variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit. A second gaming state that is longer than the variable display period of the pattern in the second display unit,
When a predetermined transition condition is established in the first gaming state, the normal gaming state transition means (third in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) shifts the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. A function of executing a transition process to the normal gaming state or the first normal gaming state), and
In the case of transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, when the variable display of the pattern on the second display unit is continued across the first gaming state and the second gaming state, A gaming machine comprising: notifying means for notifying transition to the second gaming state until the variable display ends.

  In the configuration in which the game state is diversified by simultaneously changing the variable display periods of the simultaneously moving patterns on the first display unit and the second display unit, the first starting ball When transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state triggered by the end of the game times related to the part, the variable display of the pattern relating to the second starting ball entering part (second display part) across the transition timing An event such as continuing may occur. In such a case, there is a concern that the shift between the transition timing and the variable display end timing of the picture may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. There is a concern that such a shift will be a factor to confuse the player. Therefore, when such a shift occurs, the above-mentioned uncomfortable feeling can be alleviated by adopting a configuration in which the transition notification to the second gaming state is performed until the variable display of the pattern on the second display unit is completed. .

Feature D2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
First special information (for example, holding information related to the lower operation port 62a) is acquired when a ball enters a first start ball entering portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area. Information acquisition means (function of executing information acquisition processing based on entering the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
First acquisition information storage means (lower working port holding area Ra for the RAM 604) capable of storing the first special information acquired by the first special information acquisition means;
Based on the first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means, first lottery means (successful lottery etc.) is sequentially performed on the first lottery means (the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 to the lower operation port 62a). A function to execute a lottery process based on
Second special information for acquiring second special information (holding information related to the right operation port 63a) when a ball enters a second start entrance part (for example, the right operation port 63a) provided in the game area. Acquisition means (function of executing information acquisition processing based on entering the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
Second acquisition information storage means (reservation area Rb for the right working port of RAM 604) capable of storing the second special information acquired by the second special information acquisition means;
Based on the second special information stored in the second acquired information storage means, second lottery means (successful lottery etc.) is sequentially performed based on the second lottery means (to the right operating port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). A function to execute a lottery process based on
It has a 1st display part (for example, display part D1 for lower operation ports) and a 2nd display part (for example, display part D2 for right operation ports), and a picture is displayed in each of the 1st display part and the 2nd display part. Variable displayable picture display means (for example, main display unit 81),
Prior to the first lottery process being performed by the first lottery means or based on the fact that the first lottery process has been performed by the first lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the first display unit. The first special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means that the stop result corresponding to the result of the first lottery process is displayed and the variable display of the pattern is terminated as one game time. First game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the variable display of the picture of each game time is performed according to the information (for example, game time control processing related to the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) Function to execute)
Prior to the second lottery process being performed by the second lottery means, or based on the fact that the second lottery process has been performed by the second lottery means, the variable display of the pattern is started on the second display unit. And displaying the stop result corresponding to the result of the second lottery process and ending the variable display of the pattern as one game time, the second special information stored in the second acquisition information storage means Second game time control means for controlling the picture display means so that the picture of each game time is variably displayed according to the information (for example, the game time control process related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162). Function to execute)
The lottery result by the first lottery means becomes a predetermined winning result, and the first game times control means stops displaying a picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result, or the lottery result by the second lottery means is predetermined. A special game state (for example, an open / close execution mode) that is advantageous to the player over the normal game state based on the result of winning and the fact that the picture corresponding to the predetermined winning result is stopped and displayed by the second game time control means. Special gaming state transition means (function to execute the gaming state transition processing related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162),
The game times by the first game time control means and the game times by the second game time control means can be simultaneously advanced,
The normal gaming state includes a first gaming state in which a variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit is shorter than a variable display period of the pattern on the second display unit, and a variable display period of the pattern on the first display unit. A second gaming state that is longer than the variable display period of the pattern in the second display unit,
When a predetermined transition condition is established in the first gaming state, the normal gaming state transition means (third in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) shifts the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state. A function of executing a transition process to the normal gaming state or the first normal gaming state), and
When in the first gaming state, information indicating the number of remaining games or the remaining period until the transition to the second gaming state is completed until the gaming time that becomes a trigger for the transition to the second gaming state is completed. First informing means for performing,
When transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, where the variable display of the picture on the second display unit is continued across the first gaming state and the second gaming state, A gaming machine comprising: at least a second notifying unit for notifying information indicating a transition to the second gaming state until the variable display ends after the transition to the two gaming state.

  In the configuration in which the game state is diversified by simultaneously changing the variable display periods of the simultaneously moving patterns on the first display unit and the second display unit, the first starting ball When transitioning from the first gaming state to the second gaming state triggered by the end of the game times related to the part, the variable display of the pattern relating to the second starting ball entering part (second display part) across the transition timing An event such as continuing may occur. In such a case, there is a concern that the shift between the transition timing and the variable display end timing of the picture may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. There is a concern that such a shift will be a factor to confuse the player. Therefore, when such a shift occurs, the above-mentioned uncomfortable feeling can be alleviated by adopting a configuration in which the transition notification to the second gaming state is performed until the variable display of the pattern on the second display unit is completed. .

  The technical ideas shown in the features D1 to D2 may be applied to the features A to C.

<Feature E group>
The following group E is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1) "In the gaming machine of the type described above, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature E1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed is provided, and a first pitching section (upper variable prize winning device 64) and a second are placed in a predetermined flow path (right route) of the game area. A gaming machine provided with a pitching part (right general winning opening 61R),
The first pitching unit switches between an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can be accepted and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to accept a game ball than the accepting state. Is possible,
Switching means (a function of executing an opening / closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) that switches the first incoming ball portion alternately between the receiving state and the non-receiving state when the special game state (opening / closing execution mode) is entered. )When,
Predetermined game processing (for setting suggestion) on the condition that a ball has entered the second ball entry unit in a state where the first ball entry unit is in the non-acceptance state in the special game state. Game processing execution means (function for executing setting suggestion lottery counter update processing in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143). Machine.

  In the configuration shown in the feature E1, since the first and second incoming balls are disposed in the same flow path (predetermined flow path), the game balls launched aiming at the first incoming ball are A part enters the second entrance. Here, in the case where the first incoming ball portion is variable, the period in which the game ball is launched and is in the non-accepted state aiming at the period in which the first incoming ball portion is in the accepting state. It is assumed that acts such as avoiding the launch of game balls will be made. In such a configuration, the player's attention is mainly directed to a period in which the player is in the acceptance state, and there is a concern that the degree of attention will be reduced in the non-acceptance state. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, even if a ball enters the second ball entry part in a situation where the first ball entry part is in an accepting state in the special game state, a predetermined game is performed. Although the process is not executed, a predetermined game process is executed when a ball enters the second ball player in a situation where the first ball player is in a non-acceptance state in the special game state. Become. That is, it is possible to prompt the player who is expected to execute the predetermined game process to continue the release of the game ball, and it is possible to suitably suppress a reduction in the degree of attention during the non-accepting state. Such a configuration is also preferable from the viewpoint of improving the degree of freedom in setting the period of non-receiving state.

Feature E2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (main control) for acquiring special information (for example, holding information related to the lower operation port 62a) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area A function of executing an information acquisition process based on a ball entering the lower working port 62a in the MPU 602 of the apparatus 162);
Acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 lower working port holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
The lottery means (the lottery process based on the entrance to the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that sequentially performs the lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Function to execute)
A special game in which the game state is shifted to a special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means has become a predetermined winning result (for example, a jackpot result) State transition means (function of executing transition processing to the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
A first incoming ball portion that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be accepted and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to accept a game ball than the acceptance state ( Upper variable winning device 64),
A switching means (a function for executing an opening / closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the first pitching portion between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A second pitching portion (right general winning opening 61R) disposed in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the gaming area together with the first pitching portion;
Predetermined game processing (for setting suggestion) on the condition that a ball has entered the second ball entry unit in a state where the first ball entry unit is in the non-acceptance state in the special game state. Game processing execution means (function for executing setting suggestion lottery counter update processing in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143). Machine.

  In the configuration shown in the feature E2, since the first and second balls are disposed in the same flow path (predetermined flow path), the game ball launched aiming at the first ball portion A part enters the second entrance. Here, in the case where the first incoming ball portion is variable, the period in which the game ball is launched and is in the non-accepted state aiming at the period in which the first incoming ball portion is in the accepting state. It is assumed that acts such as avoiding the launch of game balls will be made. In such a configuration, the player's attention is mainly directed to a period in which the player is in the receiving state, and there is a concern that the degree of attention will be reduced in the non-receiving state. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, even if a ball enters the second ball entry part in a situation where the first ball entry part is in an accepting state in the special game state, a predetermined game is performed. Although the process is not executed, a predetermined game process is executed when a ball enters the second ball player in a situation where the first ball player is in a non-acceptance state in the special game state. Become. That is, it is possible to prompt the player who is expected to execute the predetermined game process to continue the release of the game ball, and it is possible to suitably suppress a reduction in the degree of attention during the non-accepting state. Such a configuration is also preferable from the viewpoint of improving the degree of freedom in setting the period of non-receiving state.

Feature E3. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (main control) for acquiring special information (for example, holding information related to the lower operation port 62a) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area A function of executing an information acquisition process based on a ball entering the lower working port 62a in the MPU 602 of the apparatus 162);
Acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 lower working port holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
The lottery means (the lottery process based on the entrance to the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that sequentially performs the lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Function to execute)
A special game in which the game state is shifted to a special game state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means has become a predetermined winning result (for example, a jackpot result) State transition means (function of executing transition processing to the opening / closing execution mode in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162);
A first incoming ball portion that can be switched between an acceptance state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can be accepted and a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is more difficult to accept a game ball than the acceptance state ( Upper variable winning device 64),
A switching means (a function for executing an opening / closing process in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for switching the first pitching portion between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the special game state is entered;
A second pitching portion (right general winning opening 61R) disposed in a predetermined flow path (right route) in the gaming area together with the first pitching portion;
A predetermined game process (setting suggestion lottery) when a ball enters the second ball entry unit in a state where the first ball entry unit is in the non-acceptance state in the special game state. The counter update process is executed, and when the second entry part enters the second entry part in the special gaming state and the second entry part is in the acceptance state, the predetermined entry occurs. Game processing execution means (function to execute setting suggestion lottery counter update processing in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143) that does not execute the game processing (setting suggestion lottery counter update processing) A gaming machine characterized by

  In the configuration shown in the feature E3, since the first and second balls are disposed in the same flow path (predetermined flow path), the game balls launched aiming at the first ball section are A part enters the second entrance. Here, in the case where the first incoming ball portion is variable, the period in which the game ball is launched and is in the non-accepted state aiming at the period in which the first incoming ball portion is in the accepting state. It is assumed that acts such as avoiding the launch of game balls will be made. In such a configuration, the player's attention is mainly directed to a period in which the player is in the acceptance state, and there is a concern that the degree of attention will be reduced in the non-acceptance state. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, even if a ball enters the second ball entry part in a situation where the first ball entry part is in an accepting state in the special game state, a predetermined game is performed. Although the process is not executed, a predetermined game process is executed when a ball enters the second ball player in a situation where the first ball player is in a non-acceptance state in the special game state. Become. That is, it is possible to prompt the player who is expected to execute the predetermined game process to continue the release of the game ball, and it is possible to suitably suppress a reduction in the degree of attention during the non-accepting state. Such a configuration is also preferable from the viewpoint of improving the degree of freedom in setting the period of non-receiving state.

Feature E4. A payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a game ball to a player when a ball enters the first ball throwing part and when a ball enters the second ball throwing part;
The game machine according to Feature E2 or Feature E3, wherein the game process execution means executes a process different from the game ball payout by the payout means as the predetermined game process.

  In the special game state, when the first entrance part is in the accepting state and the entrance to the second entrance part occurs, both the payout of the game balls and the predetermined game process are executed. In the special gaming state, when a first ball entering the second ball receiving unit occurs in a state where the first ball receiving unit is in a non-accepting state, only paying out the game ball is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the player who is expected to execute a predetermined game process to continue the firing of the game ball in the non-accepting state.

Feature E5. A payout means (payout device 222) for paying out a game ball to a player when a ball enters the first ball throwing part and when a ball enters the second ball throwing part;
The switching means is configured to alternately switch the first pitching portion between the accepting state and the non-accepting state in the special gaming state,
In the special gaming state, the period during which the first pitching unit is in the non-accepting state (for example, 3 sec) is shorter than the period during which the receiving state is in the receiving state (for example, 6 sec),
The game process execution means includes
Stores information corresponding to the number of balls entered when a ball enters the second ball player during a period in which the first ball player is in the non-accepting state in the special game state. Correspondence information storage means capable of holding stored information over a plurality of non-acceptance states;
Features E2 to E4, characterized by comprising grant determining means for determining a bonus grant different from the game ball payout to the player based on information stored in the correspondence information storage means The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  When the period of non-acceptance is shorter than the period of acceptance, it is difficult to earn the number of entrances to the second entrance in the non-acceptance state. In particular, if the period of non-acceptance is short, there may be a bias that no entry occurs due to variations in the behavior of game balls, etc. It will be cruel to the person. Therefore, if it is possible to carry over the information corresponding to the entry to the second entry part and determine whether or not the privilege can be given together, the influence of the bias described above can be alleviated.

Feature E6. The correspondence information storage means is a first storage means;
In the special gaming state, when a first ball entry occurs during the period in which the first ball entry unit is in the receiving state, information corresponding to the number of balls entered is stored. 2 storage means,
The grant determination means performs a bonus grant determination different from the payout of the game ball to the player based on the information stored in the first storage means and the information stored in the second storage means. The gaming machine according to Feature E5, wherein

  Information corresponding to the number of balls entering the first pitching part is stored when the first pitching part is in an accepting state, and the first number when the first pitching part is in a non-accepting state. The information corresponding to the number of entering the 2 entering parts is stored. And the determination of privilege provision is performed based on these information. In such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who is expected to grant a privilege to launch a game ball over both the accepting state and the non-accepting state, and the degree of attention to the game by shifting to the non-accepting state Can be suitably suppressed.

  Feature E7. In the case where the grant determination unit performs the bonus grant determination, the information stored in the first storage unit is more than the information stored in the second storage unit in terms of the contribution rate to the grant determination. The gaming machine according to Feature E6, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be high.

  As shown in the feature E6, in the configuration in which the entrance determination is performed by integrating the entrances to the respective entrance parts, it is expected that the entrance determination is also performed by entering the 1st entrance part. There is a possibility that an action such as not continuing to fire the game ball in the state. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the degree of contribution to the giving determination is greater when the ball enters the second ball portion in the non-acceptance state than the ball that enters the first ball portion in the accept state. By providing the difference, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

  Feature E8. As the special gaming state, there are provided a first special gaming state and a second special gaming state in which the period during which the first ball-entering portion is in the non-accepting state is longer than the first special gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E7.

  As shown in this feature, by applying the technical idea shown in the feature E2 etc. to a gaming machine provided with a plurality of special gaming states with different periods of acceptance, the non-accepting state depending on the special gaming state It is possible to change the difficulty of entering the second inward club and contribute to the diversification of games.

  Feature E9. Switching from the accepting state to the non-accepting state is performed a plurality of times during the special gaming state, and at least one of the non-accepting states is more relevant than when the other non-accepting state is entered. The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E8, wherein the periods of non-acceptance are different.

  When a plurality of non-acceptance states with different periods are mixed in one special game state, it is determined how difficult it is to enter the second entry part until a game ball is actually launched toward the second entry part. It is unclear whether it is a degree. Thereby, it can contribute to the monotonous suppression of the game in a special game state.

  Feature E10. The second incoming ball portion is disposed on the flow path of the game ball toward the first incoming ball portion, and the first incoming ball portion is in the non-accepting state when the first incoming ball portion is in the non-accepting state. The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E9, wherein the ball entering portion is configured to prevent entry into the second ball entering portion.

  According to the feature E10, when the first incoming ball portion is in the receiving state, the incoming ball to the second incoming ball portion is blocked by the first incoming ball portion, and the second incoming ball portion is In order to aim, the 1st entrance part needs to be in a non-receiving state. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who expects a predetermined game process to be executed based on the entry to the second entry unit to continue the release of the game ball.

Feature E11. Game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball to the game area based on a player's operation;
When the special gaming state is alternately switched between the accepting state and the non-accepting state, the period until the first initiating portion is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state is the gaming ball launching means. The gaming machine according to Feature E10, wherein the gaming ball launched from is shorter than a required period of time required to reach the second entrance part.

  As shown in this feature, when the first ball entering part is in a non-accepting state, even if the game balls are restarted from that timing, before the game balls that have been launched reach the second ball entering part, In addition, the first entrance part is switched to the receiving state. That is, when a so-called stop hit is made, even if the game ball is fired after visually confirming that it has become a non-acceptance state, it becomes difficult to enter the second ball entry portion in a timely manner. Thereby, it is possible to urge the player who expects the predetermined game process to be executed based on the entry to the second entry part in the non-acceptance state, to continue the release of the game ball.

  The technical ideas shown in the features E4 to E11 may be applied to the feature E1.

  Further, the technical ideas shown in the features E1 to E11 may be applied to the features A to D.

<Feature F group>
The following feature F group is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. As for the background art “see (for example, Patent Document 1)”, there is an invention that “the gaming machine of the type described above still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game”. It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature F1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (main control) for acquiring special information (for example, holding information related to the lower operation port 62a) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area A function of executing an information acquisition process based on a ball entering the lower working port 62a in the MPU 602 of the apparatus 162);
Acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 lower working port holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
The lottery means (the lottery process based on the entrance to the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that sequentially performs the lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Function to execute)
Special gaming state transition means (mainly for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined winning result. A function of executing a game state transition process related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the control device 162);
Special entry that is provided in the gaming area and can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which entering is more difficult than the accepting state. A ball portion (upper variable winning device 64);
Switching means for alternately switching the special pitching portion between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when a transition is made to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode) When,
Display means (symbol display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a);
In the special game state, the first on the display screen over the acceptance period (round) in which the special pitching unit is in the acceptance state and the non-acceptance period (interval) in which the special entry is in the non-acceptance state. Display control means (notification / production control device 143) for executing special display (first stock icon display area ST1 and first stock icon SI1) and second special display (second stock icon display area ST2 and second stock icon SI2) And display control device 710),
The display control means switches means for switching a display mode (emphasis / darkening) of the first special display between the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period when the special gaming state is set, and the second special display. And a means for switching the display mode (enhancement / darkening) between the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period.

  During the special game state, the first special display and the second special display are executed over both the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period. The first special display and the second special display are continued over both the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period while the display mode is switched between the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period, and the monotonous special display is suppressed. Is done. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree to the game in a special game state. Further, while the display mode is switched, the special display continues from the acceptance period to the non-acceptance period. Such a configuration is preferable in promoting the continuation of the game in the non-acceptance period, as compared with a configuration in which no special display is performed during the non-acceptance period.

  Feature F2. The display control means switches the display mode of the first special display and the display mode of the second special display based on the transition from the acceptance period to the non-acceptance period, and switches from the non-acceptance period to the acceptance period. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to switch a display mode of the first special display and a display mode of the second special display based on transition.

  According to the feature F2, it is possible to strengthen cooperation between the switching of the display mode of the first special display and the switching of the display mode of the second special display. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the chance that the change between the appearance in the acceptance period and the appearance in the non-acceptance period is overlooked while performing the special display over the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period. With such a configuration, the effect shown in the feature F1 can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F3. As a display mode of the first special display, there are provided a first display mode (darkening) and a second display mode (light emission) in which the first special display is emphasized more than the first display mode.
As a display mode of the second special display, a third display mode (darkening) and a fourth display mode (light emission) in which the second special display is emphasized over the third display mode are provided.
The display control means is configured such that the display mode of the first special display is the second display mode and the display mode of the second special display is the third display mode during the acceptance period, and the display mode of the second special display is the third display mode during the non-acceptance period. Feature F1 or Feature F2, wherein the display mode of each special display is changed so that the display mode of one special display is the first display mode and the display mode of the second special display is the fourth display mode The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature F3, the first special display is easily noticeable during the acceptance period, and the second special display is easily noticeable during the non-acceptance period. In this way, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotonous display in the special gaming state by switching the target that is likely to attract the player's attention between the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period.

  Feature F4. When the first special display is the second display mode and the second special display is the third display mode, the first special display is more emphasized than the second special display, When the first special display is the first display mode and the second special display is the fourth display mode, the second special display is emphasized rather than the first special display. The gaming machine according to Feature F3, wherein

  According to the feature F4, the first special display is more noticeable than the second special display in the acceptance period, and the second special display is more noticeable than the first special display in the non-acceptance period. By providing a clear difference in the visibility level by switching the display mode, the effect shown in the feature F3 can be preferably exhibited.

Feature F5. The display control means includes
The display contents of the first special display (first stock icon SI1) based on the fact that the first entry condition (entrance occurrence) is satisfied under the situation where the first special display is the second display mode. To change the number of
The display contents of the second special display (second stock icon SI2) based on the fact that the second entry condition (entrance occurrence) is satisfied under the situation where the second special display is the fourth display mode. The game machine according to Feature F3 or Feature F4, characterized in that the game machine has a means for changing the number.

  When the first entry condition is satisfied under the situation where the first special display is conspicuous, the display content of the first special display is changed and the second entry condition is established under the situation where the second special display is conspicuous. Then, the display content of the second special display is changed. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance that the change of the display content is overlooked, and to suitably exhibit the effect shown in the feature F1 and the like. In addition, a game related to the acceptance period can be executed during the acceptance period, and a game relating to the non-acceptance period can be performed even during the non-acceptance period, so that continuation of the game during the non-acceptance period can be favorably promoted.

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is “the display control means is based on the fact that a predetermined condition (occurrence of entering a ball) is established under a situation where the first special display is in the second display mode. The means for changing the display content of one special display, and the second special display based on the fact that a predetermined condition (occurrence of entering a ball) is established under a situation where the second special display is in the fourth display mode. It is also possible to use a gaming machine according to the feature F3 or the feature F4.

Feature F6. The display control means includes
When the first entry condition is satisfied under the situation where the first special display is the first display mode, the display content of the first special display is maintained, and the first special display is the first display mode. Means for changing the display content of the first special display when the first entry condition is satisfied under the situation of two display modes;
When the second entry condition is satisfied under the situation where the second special display is the third display mode, the display content of the second special display is maintained, and the second special display is the first display. A feature F3 or a feature F4, characterized in that it has means for changing the display content of the second special display when the second entry condition is satisfied under the situation of four display modes. The gaming machine described in 1.

  When the first entry condition is satisfied under the situation where the first special display is the first display mode, the display content is not changed, and the first special display is the second display mode. When the first entry condition is satisfied, the display content of the first special display is changed. When the second entry condition is satisfied under the situation where the second special display is in the second display mode, the display content of the second special display is not changed, and the second special display is the fourth display. The display content of the second special display is changed when the second entry condition is satisfied under the situation. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the display contents are changed according to the display mode of the first / second special display when the entry condition is satisfied, it is preferable to monotonize the display during the special game state. Can be suppressed. This is preferable in order to exhibit the attention degree improving effect shown in the feature F1 and the like.

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is “the display control means displays the first special display when the first condition is satisfied under the situation where the first special display is in the first display mode. Means for changing the display content of the first special display when the first condition is satisfied under the condition that the content is maintained and the first special display is in the second display mode; When the second condition is satisfied under the situation where the special display is the third display mode, the display content of the second special display is maintained, and the second special display is the fourth display mode. The game machine according to Feature F3 or Feature F4, further comprising means for changing the display content of the second special display when the second condition is satisfied under the situation of It is also possible.

Feature F7. In the predetermined flow path (right route) in the gaming area, a predetermined ball portion (right general winning opening 61R) is disposed together with the special ball portion.
The display control means is configured such that when the first special display is in the second display mode and the second special display is in the third display mode, a ball enters the special ball entry section. In the situation where the display content of the first special display is changed and the first special display is the first display mode and the second special display is the fourth display mode, The game machine according to Feature F3 or Feature F4, wherein the display content of the second special display is changed when a ball enters the ball.

  According to the feature F7, the entry to the special entry portion occurs in a situation where the first special display is the second display mode (emphasized) and the second special display is the third display mode (non-emphasized). In such a case, the display content of the first special display is changed based on the incoming ball. If a ball enters the predetermined ball-throwing part in a situation where the first special display is the first display mode (non-emphasized) and the second special display is the fourth display mode (emphasized), the second is displayed. The display content of the special display is changed. In this way, if the display content of the highlighted item is changed according to the destination, the change in display in the special game state is diversified, and the effect of improving the degree of attention shown in the feature F1 and the like is suitably obtained. It can be demonstrated.

  Feature F8. The display control means, when the entrance to the predetermined entrance portion occurs in a situation where the first special display is the second display mode and the second special display is the third display mode In the situation where the display contents of the first special display and the second special display are not changed, the first special display is the first display mode and the second special display is the fourth display mode. In the feature F7, it is configured to change the display contents of the first special display and the second special display when a ball enters the special ball portion. Gaming machine.

  As shown in this feature, the first special indication and the second special indication are displayed when the entry to a destination other than the limited destination is during a period different from the prescribed period. In either case, the display contents are not changed. By providing such a restriction, it is possible to enhance the impact when the display content of the first special display unit or the display content of the second special display unit is changed.

  Feature F9. The display control means delays the switching of the display modes of the first special display and the second special display when the special ball portion changes from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state, and the special ball portion is The feature F7 or feature F8 according to the feature F7 or F8, further comprising means for delaying the switching of the display mode of the first special display and the second special display when the acceptance state is changed to the non-acceptance state. Gaming machine.

  When the entrance detection is performed for the special entrance portion or the predetermined entrance portion, a certain time lag may occur until the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion is detected. For this reason, if the display mode is switched immediately after the special pitching portion is switched between the accepting state and the non-accepting state, there is a possibility that the entry-to-display change may not be performed well due to the time lag. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by delaying the switching of the display mode.

Feature F10. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (main control) for acquiring special information (for example, holding information related to the lower operation port 62a) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area A function of executing an information acquisition process based on a ball entering the lower working port 62a in the MPU 602 of the apparatus 162);
Acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 lower working port holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
The lottery means (the lottery process based on the entrance to the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that sequentially performs the lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Function to execute)
Special gaming state transition means (mainly for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined winning result. A function of executing a game state transition process related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the control device 162);
Special entry that is provided in the gaming area and can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which entering is more difficult than the accepting state. A ball portion (upper variable winning device 64);
Switching means for alternately switching the special pitching portion between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when a transition is made to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode) When,
Display means (symbol display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a);
In the special game state, the first on the display screen over the acceptance period (round) in which the special pitching unit is in the acceptance state and the non-acceptance period (interval) in which the special entry is in the non-acceptance state. Display control means (notification / production control device 143) for executing special display (first stock icon display area ST1 and first stock icon SI1) and second special display (second stock icon display area ST2 and second stock icon SI2) And display control device 710),
The display control means displays the display contents of the first special display (the first stock icon SI1 of the first stock icon SI1 based on the fact that a predetermined change condition is satisfied during the acceptance period under the special gaming state. And a means for changing the display content of the second special display (the number of second stock icons SI2) based on the fact that a predetermined change condition is satisfied during the non-acceptance period. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  During the special game state, the first special display and the second special display are executed over both the acceptance period and the non-acceptance period. About these 1st special display and 2nd special display, the object for which display content is changed between an acceptance period and a non-acceptance period switches. With such a configuration, the monotonous display of the special display is suppressed, which can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game in the special game state.

  Feature F11. When in the special gaming state, a notification is made that the display content change target is the first special display in the acceptance period, and the display content change target is in the non-acceptance period. The gaming machine according to feature F10, further comprising notification means for notifying that the second special display is displayed.

  As shown in feature F10, if the special display in the special game state becomes diverse, monotonization of the game can be suppressed, but it is confusing to the player that the special display to be changed is unknown. Concerns that it will be a factor. As shown in this feature, if a special display that is a display content change target is informed, occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed, and an effect of improving the degree of attention to the game can be suitably exhibited.

Feature F12. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Special information acquisition means (main control) for acquiring special information (for example, holding information related to the lower operation port 62a) when a ball enters a starting ball entering portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a) provided in the game area A function of executing an information acquisition process based on a ball entering the lower working port 62a in the MPU 602 of the apparatus 162);
Acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 lower working port holding area Ra) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
The lottery means (the lottery process based on the entrance to the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that sequentially performs the lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Function to execute)
Special gaming state transition means (mainly for shifting the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, opening / closing execution mode) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined winning result. A function of executing a game state transition process related to the right operation port 63a in the MPU 602 of the control device 162);
Special entry that is provided in the gaming area and can be switched between an accepting state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the gaming area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which entering is more difficult than the accepting state. A ball portion (upper variable winning device 64);
Switching means for alternately switching the special pitching portion between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when a transition is made to a special game state (opening / closing execution mode) When,
Display means (symbol display device 75) having a display screen (display screen 75a);
Special effects on the display screen over the acceptance period (round) when the special pitching unit is in the acceptance state and the non-acceptance period (interval) when the non-acceptance state is in the special gaming state. Display control means (notification / production control device 143 and display control device 710),
The display control means executes the first special effect as the special effect based on the fact that the first entry condition is established in the acceptance period in the special gaming state, and the second entry in the non-acceptance period. A gaming machine configured to execute a second special effect as the special effect on the basis that a condition is established.

  According to the feature F12, the special effects executed differ depending on the acceptance period / non-acceptance period in the special gaming state and the timing at which each entry condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, monotonization of the game in the special game state can be suitably suppressed.

  Feature F13. When the second entry condition is established during the acceptance period in the special game state, the display control means is configured to trigger the second entry condition to trigger the first special effect and the second special effect. If the first entry condition is satisfied during the non-acceptance period in the special gaming state without executing the first entry condition and the second effect, the establishment of the first entry condition is triggered. The gaming machine according to Feature F12, wherein the special performance is not executed.

  As shown in feature F13, when the second entry condition is satisfied during the acceptance period and when the first entry condition is established during the non-acceptance period, each special effect is avoided. By limiting the conditions for the performance and the second special performance to be executed, it is possible to execute an effect unique to the acceptance period / non-acceptance period, which can contribute to the suppression of monotonous gaming in the special gaming state.

  In addition, you may apply each technical idea shown to the feature F1-feature F13 to the said feature A group-E group.

<Feature G group>
The following group G is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1) "In the gaming machine of the type described above, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature G1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed is provided, and a ball entry part (for example, a lower action ball entry part 62) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter is provided. A gaming machine that is
The ball entry section is provided alongside the ball passage (ball passage 801) through which the game ball that has flowed into the entrance portion (the lower operation port 62a) of the ball entry section passes, and a predetermined position ( A ball detection means (ball detection sensor 850) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the detection position DP) so that the game ball passing through the ball passage and the ball detection means can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Is composed of
An operation means (operation button 35) operated by the player;
Based on the detection of the game ball by the ball detection means, a period setting means for setting a reception period for accepting the operation of the operation means (a special operation timer counter is set in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143) Function)
Based on the operation of the operation means during the reception period, an operation response process execution means for executing a predetermined operation response process corresponding to the operation (execution change process is executed in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143) A gaming machine characterized by having

  According to the configuration shown in the characteristic G1, the predetermined operation corresponding processing is executed by operating the operation unit in accordance with the timing at which the game ball passes the predetermined position (ball detection unit). With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who is expected to perform the operation handling process to pay attention to the movement of the game ball. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree to a game.

  In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is “a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball flowing down the game area can enter the game area. A game machine provided with a portion (for example, a lower operation ball entry portion 62), wherein the ball entry portion guides a game ball that has flowed into the entrance portion of the ball entry portion (ball passage 801). And a ball detection means (ball detection sensor 850) provided in the ball passage and capable of detecting a game ball passing through the ball passage, and the game ball passing through the ball passage and the ball detection means. Is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine, and the operation means is operated by the operation means (operation button 35) operated by the player and the timing at which the game ball passes through the ball detection means. Control processing corresponding to the operation based on It is also possible to the gaming machine. ", Characterized in that it comprises a control unit for executing the (notification-effect control unit 143).

Feature G2. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed is provided, and a ball entry part (for example, a lower action ball entry part 62) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter is provided. A gaming machine that is
The ball entry section is provided alongside the ball passage (ball passage 801) through which the game ball that has flowed into the entrance portion (the lower operation port 62a) of the ball entry section passes, and a predetermined position ( A ball detection means (ball detection sensor 850) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the detection position DP) so that the game ball passing through the ball passage and the ball detection means can be viewed from the front of the gaming machine. Is composed of
An operation means (operation button 35) operated by the player;
Based on the detection of the game ball by the ball detection means, the operation of the operation means starts to be accepted, and the acceptance of the operation is continued until a predetermined acceptance period elapses after the acceptance is started. Period setting means for setting an operation reception period (a function of setting a timer counter for special operation in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143);
Based on the operation of the operation unit during the reception period set by the period setting unit, a predetermined operation response process (first forced change process or second forced change process) corresponding to the operation is executed. A gaming machine comprising: an operation handling process execution unit (a function of executing a forced change process by the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143).

  According to the configuration shown in the characteristic G2, the predetermined operation corresponding process is executed by operating the operation unit in accordance with the timing at which the game ball passes the predetermined position (ball detection unit). With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who is expected to perform the operation handling process to pay attention to the movement of the game ball. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the attention degree to a game.

Feature G3. The spherical passage includes a first passage portion (upstream passage portion 802) extending in the vertical direction from the inlet portion, and a second passage portion (communication passage) positioned downstream of the first passage portion and extending in a substantially horizontal direction. Part 803), and
The gaming machine according to Feature G1 or Feature G2, wherein the predetermined position is located in the second passage portion.

  The game ball that has flowed into the entrance portion is detected by the ball detecting means after moving from the first passage portion extending in the vertical direction to the second passage portion extending in the substantially horizontal direction. By quickly guiding the game ball that has flowed into the entrance portion to the second passage portion by the first passage portion extending in the vertical direction, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a congestion of game balls in the vicinity of the entrance. Since the second passage portion extends substantially in the horizontal direction, the acceleration of the game ball is reduced as compared with the first passage portion. With such a configuration, the game ball passes through the predetermined position in a state where acceleration is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress an operation that is aimed at the passage timing of the predetermined position from becoming excessively difficult. Therefore, it is possible to suitably exhibit the attention degree improving effect shown in the feature G1 and the like.

Feature G4. The second passage portion extends in the front-rear direction,
The reception period set by the period setting means is a period required for the game ball to pass through a predetermined section including the predetermined position and the downstream side of the predetermined position in a part of the second passage portion. The gaming machine according to Feature G3, wherein the gaming machine is defined to have a length equivalent to that of the game machine.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, the predetermined operation corresponding process is executed by operating the operation means while the game ball passes through the predetermined section including the predetermined position and the downstream side in the second passage portion. Is done. Thereby, it can suppress that the timing of operation becomes too severe. Here, when a configuration in which the reception period is simply extended is assumed, there is a concern that the distance between the predetermined position and the game ball when the operation is received becomes large, and the appearance is likely to be uncomfortable. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the reception period is made longer with the second passage portion extending in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to accurately determine where the game ball exists in the depth direction. As a result, the above-mentioned uncomfortable feeling can be preferably alleviated.

Feature G5. The spherical passage is located downstream of the second passage portion, and has a third passage portion (downstream passage portion 804) following the second passage portion.
The second passage portion extends in the front-rear direction, and the game ball that has passed through the second passage portion changes its direction by hitting the back wall portion (back wall portion 821) and moves to the third passage portion,
The period set by the period setting means is defined to be the same length as the period required for the game ball to pass through the section from the predetermined position to the back wall section in the second passage section. The gaming machine according to Feature G3, wherein:

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, the predetermined operation corresponding processing is executed by operating the operation means while the game ball is passing through the section from the predetermined position to the back wall portion in the second passage portion. Thereby, it can suppress that the timing of operation becomes too severe. Here, if a configuration in which the reception period is simply extended is assumed, there is a concern that the distance between the predetermined position and the game ball when the operation is received becomes large, and it is likely that the appearance is uncomfortable. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the reception period is made longer with the second passage portion extending in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to accurately determine where the game ball exists in the depth direction. As a result, the above-mentioned uncomfortable feeling can be preferably alleviated.

Feature G6. The third passage portion extends in a longitudinal direction;
The gaming machine according to Feature G5, wherein the first passage part, the second passage part, and the third passage part are arranged so as to be vertically aligned in a front view of the gaming machine.

  In the configuration shown in this feature, the ball path can be seen as if it were one vertically long path when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. For this reason, when viewed from the front of the gaming machine, the moving speed of the game ball decreases when passing through the second passage portion, and the moving speed increases again by moving to the third passage portion. In this way, by reducing the apparent moving speed of the game ball at the second passage portion, it is possible to prevent the operation means from being excessively difficult to operate while aiming at the passing timing of the ball detection means. The smooth flow of the game ball that has flowed into the ball portion can be secured.

  Feature G7. The gaming machine according to any one of features G4 to G6, wherein the predetermined position is set at a position that is closer to a boundary portion with the first passage portion in the second passage portion. .

  As shown in the feature G1, etc., in the configuration in which the acceptance of the operation is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed the ball detection means (detection position), the operation means is operated immediately before passing the ball detection means. The operation cannot be accepted. In the configuration in which the operation timing is relaxed by devising the passage structure shown in the feature G4 and the like, there is a high possibility that the operation is performed immediately before the passage timing. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the predetermined position closer to the boundary portion with the first passage portion (closer to the upstream end portion of the second passage portion), the operation is performed outside the reception period and the operation is performed. It is good to suppress the waste.

Feature G8. Special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring hold information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on detection of a game ball by the ball detection means;
Acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 lower working port holding area Ra) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
The lottery means (the lottery process based on the entrance to the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that sequentially performs the lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Function to be executed)
In any one of the features G1 to G7, the operation response processing execution unit is configured to suggest information regarding the special information to the player by executing the operation response processing. The gaming machine described.

  As shown in the characteristic G1, if the configuration is such that information related to the target entry is suggested by performing an operation in accordance with the passing timing (detection timing) of the game ball, there is a correspondence relationship between the suggested content and the entry. Can be given.

Feature G9. Special information acquisition means (a function for acquiring hold information in the MPU 602 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) based on detection of a game ball by the ball detection means;
Acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 lower working port holding area Ra) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
The lottery means (the lottery process based on the entrance to the lower operation port 62a in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that sequentially performs the lottery process (lottery such as jackpot) based on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Function to be executed)
When the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means has not reached a predetermined number, the operation response processing execution unit executes a first response process (notification / effect control device 143) as the predetermined operation response process. First forcible change processing by the MPU 652), and when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means has not reached the predetermined number, the second corresponding processing ( The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G8, characterized in that the second forced change processing by the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143 is executed.

  As shown in the feature G9, by adopting a configuration in which processing is different depending on the number of stored special information, it is possible to suitably suppress the reaction corresponding to the operation from becoming monotonous. For example, different processing (display processing or the like) may be executed depending on whether the number of stored special information has reached the upper limit or not.

  In particular, in the combination with the feature G8, when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means does not reach a predetermined number, information regarding the special information acquired this time as a predetermined operation corresponding process is displayed to the player. If the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means has reached a predetermined number, at least of the special information acquired in advance as the predetermined operation corresponding process It is good to set it as the structure which performs the 2nd corresponding | compatible process which suggests the information regarding either to a player.

Feature G10. Prompting means for prompting the player to operate the operating means (function for executing operation suggestion processing in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143);
Effect execution means for executing an operation corresponding effect when the operation means is operated in a situation where the prompt is performed by the prompting means (execution reach display is executed by the MPU 652 of the notification / effect control device 143) Function)
When the operation means is operated during the reception period during the prompting by the prompting means, the operation corresponding effect is executed by the effect executing means, while the operation corresponding process executing means is It is provided with the delay means (function which delays a forced change in MPU652 of alerting | reporting / production control apparatus 143) which delays the said operation response process, It is characterized by any one of the characteristics G1 thru | or the characteristics G9 characterized by the above-mentioned. Gaming machine.

  If the operation shown in the feature G1 or the like is performed using the operation means for operation corresponding effects, it is possible to suppress the subsequent complexity of the gaming machine from becoming excessively complicated in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. . However, when the operation means is also used as described above, the following inconvenience may occur. In other words, the timing of entering the entrance is irregular, and there is a possibility that the prompting related to the operation corresponding effect and the entrance timing coincide. There is a concern that the simultaneous execution of the operation corresponding effect and the display based on the operation corresponding process by the operation of 1 will cause any one to be overlooked. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience by preferentially executing an operation response effect that is difficult to be flexible in the progress of the game and delaying the operation response processing.

  The technical ideas shown in the features G1 to G10 may be applied to the features A to F.

<Feature H group>
The following group H is characterized in that a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters the entrance part provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1) "In the gaming machine of the type described above, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature H1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed is provided, and a ball entry part (for example, a lower action ball entry part 62) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter is provided. A gaming machine that is
The ball entry section is provided alongside the ball passage (ball passage 801) through which a game ball that has flowed into the entrance portion (the lower operation port 62a) of the ball entry section passes, and a predetermined position ( A ball detecting means (ball detecting sensor 850) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the detection position DP), and at least the ball detecting means is configured to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine,
An operation means (operation button 35) operated by the player;
When a game ball passes through the detected position, an operation corresponding process execution unit (in MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143) executes a predetermined operation corresponding process corresponding to the operation based on the operation of the operation unit. And a compulsory change processing function).

  In the configuration in which the ball detection unit is not visible as shown by the feature H1, it is difficult to operate the operation unit while visually confirming the movement of the game ball passing through the predetermined position. For this reason, it is possible to prompt the player who is expected to perform the operation handling process to estimate the timing at which the game ball passes the predetermined position (ball detection means). In making such an estimation, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the estimation by following the movement of the game ball until the timing when the game ball flows into the entrance portion of the entrance portion. Therefore, the player's attention can be encouraged to be directed to the game ball, which can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  The configuration shown in this feature is “a game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a ball entering portion (for example, a lower part) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter. Side actuated ball entering portion 62), wherein the ball entering portion is a ball passage (ball passage) through which a game ball that has flowed into the entrance portion (the lower operation port 62a) of the ball entering portion passes. 801) and a ball detection means (ball detection sensor 850) that is attached to the ball passage and can detect a game ball passing through a predetermined position (detection position DP) in the ball passage, and at least the ball detection means And the predetermined position is configured to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine, the operation means (operation button 35) operated by the player, and the operation means when the game ball passes through the detection position The operation based on the operation A gaming machine characterized by comprising an operation corresponding process executing means (a function for executing a forced change process in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143) for executing a corresponding predetermined operation corresponding process. It is also possible.

Feature H2. Special information acquisition means (for example, MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (for example, hold information related to the lower operation port 62a) when a ball enters the entry ball portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a). A function of executing an information acquisition process based on entering the operation port 62a),
Acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 lower working port holding area Ra) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
The number of hold images (hold icon MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the hold display area (hold number display area Da), and the hold image is displayed in the hold display. Hold display control means (function to execute hold display processing in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143) that sequentially moves from the area to the determination display area (execution target display area Db);
After the hold image is additionally displayed in the hold display area, the operation corresponding process for passing the game ball that is the trigger for the additional display is not performed. The gaming machine according to Feature H1.

  As shown in this feature, in the configuration in which the hold image is additionally displayed in accordance with the acquisition of the special information, the operation is performed at the timing at which the hold image is additionally displayed instead of estimating the passing timing of the game ball. Action may be taken. If such an operation becomes effective, the player's attention is directed to the hold display area instead of the game ball, and there is a concern that this may hinder the effect shown in the feature H1. Therefore, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed by adopting a configuration in which the operation corresponding process is not performed for the corresponding game ball after the reserved image is additionally displayed as shown in this feature.

Feature H3. The ball passage is located on the downstream side of the first passage portion (upstream passage portion 802) extending in the longitudinal direction along the front surface of the game board, and extends in the thickness direction of the game board. A second passage portion (communication passage portion 803),
The gaming machine according to Feature H1 or Feature H2, wherein the predetermined position is a position close to a boundary with the first passage portion in the second passage portion.

  When the ball detecting means (predetermined position) is set at or near the entrance portion of the entrance portion, it is assumed that the function for prompting the estimation shown in the feature H1 or the like cannot be performed well. This is because it is possible to follow the movement of the game ball after inflow by looking into the entrance portion (opening). On the other hand, if the distance from the entrance portion to the predetermined position is greatly separated, there is a concern that the responsiveness to the incoming ball is lowered. In view of these circumstances, as shown in this feature, applying a configuration in which a predetermined position is set in the upstream portion of the second passage portion extending in the thickness direction of the game board has a simple configuration. Can be overcome.

Feature H4. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed is provided, and a ball entry part (for example, a lower action ball entry part 62) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter is provided. A gaming machine that is
The ball entry section is provided alongside the ball passage (ball passage 801) through which the game ball that has flowed into the entrance portion (the lower operation port 62a) of the ball entry section passes, and a predetermined position ( A ball detection means (ball detection sensor 850) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the detection position DP), and at least the ball detection means is configured to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine,
An operation means (operation button 35) operated by the player;
Period setting means (a function of setting a prize waiting counter in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143) for setting a waiting period (award waiting time) for the passage detection by the ball detecting means when the operation means is operated; ,
An operation corresponding process executing means (notification / effect) for executing a predetermined operation corresponding process corresponding to an operation of the operating means when a game ball passing through the predetermined position is detected by the ball detecting means during the waiting period. And a function of executing a forced change process in the MPU 652 of the control device 143.

  In the configuration shown in this feature, a waiting period is set based on the operation of the operating means, and when a game ball is detected during the waiting period, a predetermined operation handling process is executed. Here, in the configuration in which the ball detection unit is not visible from the front of the gaming machine, it is difficult to operate the operation unit while visually confirming the movement of the game ball passing through the predetermined position. For this reason, it is possible to prompt the player who is expected to perform the operation handling process to estimate the timing at which the game ball passes the predetermined position (ball detection means). In making such an estimation, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the estimation by following the movement of the game ball until the timing when the game ball flows into the entrance portion of the entrance portion. Therefore, the player's attention can be encouraged to be directed to the game ball, which can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature H5. The gaming machine according to feature H4, wherein the waiting period set by the period setting unit is cleared when the predetermined operation handling process is executed by the operation handling process execution unit.

  When the operation means is operated in accordance with the passing timing of the game ball and a predetermined operation corresponding process is executed, the one waiting time set by the period setting means is reset so that one operation can be made to a plurality of balls. It can be suppressed that it becomes difficult to understand the relationship between the operation and the target by being accepted as a corresponding operation. Thereby, it can suppress that a player is confused when estimating timing.

  Feature H6. The waiting period is defined to be shorter than a required period until the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the entrance portion reaches the predetermined position. The feature H4 or the feature H5 is characterized in that Game machines.

  According to the feature H6, it is possible to suppress the operation means from being operated aiming immediately before passing through the entrance portion of the ball entry portion, that is, the above estimation is not performed.

Feature H7. Special information acquisition means (for example, MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (for example, hold information related to the lower operation port 62a) when a ball enters the entry ball portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a). A function of executing an information acquisition process based on entering the operation port 62a),
Acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 lower working port holding area Ra) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
The number of hold images (hold icon MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the hold display area (hold number display area Da), and the hold image is displayed in the hold display. Hold display control means (function to execute hold display processing in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143) that sequentially moves from the area to the determination display area (execution target display area Db);
When the predetermined operation corresponding process is executed by the operation corresponding process executing means, a reserved image corresponding to the game ball that has been triggered is indicated or indicated. The gaming machine according to any one of H4 to H6.

  As shown in this feature, when the operating means is operated at an appropriate timing, it is possible to contribute to improvement of the accuracy of the above estimation by suggesting or indicating the reserved image as the target.

  Note that the technical ideas shown in the features H4 to H7 can be applied to the features H1 to H3.

  Further, the technical ideas shown in the features H1 to H7 may be applied to the features A to G.

<Feature I group>
The following feature group I states that “a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. As for the background art “see (for example, Patent Document 1)”, there is an invention that “the gaming machine of the type described above still has room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game”. It was made with a problem to be solved.

Feature I1. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed is provided, and a ball entry part (for example, a lower action ball entry part 62) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter is provided. A gaming machine that is
The ball entry section is provided alongside the ball passage (ball passage 801) through which a game ball that has flowed into the entrance portion (the lower operation port 62a) of the ball entry section passes, and a predetermined position ( A ball detection means (ball detection sensor 850) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the detection position DP), and the ball passage and the ball detection means are configured to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine. ,
An operation means (operation button 35) operated by the player;
When a game ball passing through the predetermined position is detected by the ball detection means, the operation means during a predetermined period (a period including the passage timing of the lower operation port 62a) before the game ball is detected. Operation timing determination means (a function for determining a special operation in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143) for determining whether or not the user has been operated;
When the operation timing determination unit determines that the operation unit has been operated during the predetermined period, an operation response process execution unit (notification / effect control) executes a predetermined operation response process corresponding to the operation. A game machine having a function of executing a forced change process in the MPU 652 of the device 143.

  In the configuration shown in this feature, when the game ball passes the ball detection means (detection position), it is determined whether or not the operation means has been operated during a predetermined period before that, and the predetermined period When the operation is performed in the middle, a predetermined operation corresponding process is executed. For this reason, it is possible to prompt the player who is expected to perform the operation handling process to perform an operation aiming at a predetermined period. When aiming for a predetermined period, it is possible to improve the accuracy by following the movement of the game ball until the timing when the game ball flows into the entrance of the entrance portion. Therefore, the player's attention can be encouraged to be directed to the game ball, which can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature I2. The feature I1 is characterized in that the predetermined period is defined to be a period including a timing at which a game ball to be detected by the ball detection unit passes through an entrance portion of the entrance part. The gaming machine described.

  In the configuration in which the ball passage and the ball detecting means cannot be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine as shown in the feature I1, in actuality, although the passage of a predetermined position = the occurrence of a prize, the inflow to the entrance portion = There is a high possibility that a player will be recognized as having won a prize. In the configuration in which a ball is detected by the ball detection means attached to the ball entrance portion, a configuration in accordance with the player's recognition can be realized by arranging the ball detection means at the entrance portion. By being arranged in the vicinity of the part, the effect of suppressing unauthorized access to the sphere detection means is reduced. In addition, for example, a ball detecting means for detecting a game ball may be separately provided at the entrance portion, and the entrance detection at the entrance portion may be performed separately. It becomes a factor that hinders downsizing / simplification.

  Therefore, as shown in this feature, by using the existing ball detection means as a configuration that reversely calculates whether or not the operation was performed at the entrance passage timing from the timing of the game ball detection, the attention degree to the game can be increased. When improving, it can suppress suitably that new subjects, such as arrangement space, arise.

Feature I3. Special information acquisition means (for example, MPU 602 of the main controller 162) that acquires special information (for example, hold information related to the lower operation port 62a) when a ball enters the entry ball portion (for example, the lower operation port 62a). A function of executing an information acquisition process based on entering the operation port 62a),
Acquisition information storage means (RAM 604 lower working port holding area Ra) capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
The number of hold images (hold icon MP) corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means is displayed in the hold display area (hold number display area Da), and the hold image is displayed in the hold display. Hold display control means (function to execute hold display processing in the MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143) that sequentially moves from the area to the determination display area (execution target display area Db),
The feature I1 or feature I2 is characterized in that the predetermined period is defined to be shorter than a period required for the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the entrance part to reach the predetermined position. The gaming machine described.

  As shown in this feature, in the configuration in which the hold image is additionally displayed in accordance with the acquisition of the special information, the operation is performed at the timing at which the hold image is additionally displayed instead of estimating the passing timing of the game ball. Action may be taken. If such an operation becomes effective, the player's attention is directed not to the game ball but to the hold display area, and there is a concern that this may hinder the effect shown in the feature I1. Therefore, as shown in this feature, after the reserved image is additionally displayed, the predetermined period is made shorter than the period required for the game ball that has passed through the entrance portion of the entrance part to reach the predetermined position. For the corresponding game ball, it can be avoided that the operation corresponding process is performed. Thereby, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suppressed.

Feature I4. A period measuring unit that measures a period from when the operation unit is operated until a game ball is detected by the ball detecting unit;
The operation timing determination unit compares the period measured by the period measurement unit with a preset reference period, so that the operation unit during the predetermined period before the corresponding game ball is detected. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, wherein the game machine is configured to determine whether or not the item has been operated.

  According to the configuration shown in the feature I4, the technical idea shown in the feature I1 and the like can be realized with a simple configuration.

  Feature I5. The gaming machine according to claim I4, wherein the operation timing determination means includes means for changing the reference period in accordance with a passing speed of a game ball passing through the ball passage.

  As shown in the feature I1 and the like, when the entrance portion of the ball entry portion is separated from the predetermined position (ball detection means), the game ball reaches the predetermined position from the entrance portion by the passing speed (movement speed) of the game ball. There will be a difference in the required time. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by changing the reference period according to the passing speed of the game ball, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the determination accuracy.

Feature I6. The sphere detection means is configured to output a detection signal when passing through the predetermined position,
The operation timing determination means includes means for changing the reference period based on the length of a detection signal (HI level signal) output from the ball detection means. Gaming machine.

  As shown in the feature I1 or the like, when the entrance portion of the ball entry portion is separated from the predetermined position (ball detecting means), the game ball reaches the predetermined position from the entrance portion by the passing speed (movement speed) of the game ball. There will be a difference in the required time. Therefore, by changing the reference period according to the passing speed of the game ball, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the determination accuracy. In order to realize such a technical idea, for example, a speed sensor may be separately provided to monitor the passing speed of the game ball. However, there is a concern that if a separate configuration is required, the size of the pitching portion will be increased, and restrictions on the placement of the pitching portion will become strong. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the reference period is changed based on the length of the detection signal output from the sphere detection means, it is possible to easily improve the determination accuracy by using the existing configuration. it can.

Feature I7. A game board (game board 60) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed is provided, and a ball entry part (for example, a lower action ball entry part 62) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter is provided. A gaming machine that is
The ball entry section is provided alongside the ball passage (ball passage 801) through which a game ball that has flowed into the entrance portion (the lower operation port 62a) of the ball entry section passes, and a predetermined position ( A ball detection means (ball detection sensor 850) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the detection position DP), and the ball passage and the ball detection means are configured to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine. ,
An operation means (operation button 35) operated by the player;
An estimation means for estimating a timing at which a game ball flows into the entrance portion when a game ball passing through the predetermined position is detected by the ball detection means;
Determination means for determining whether or not the operation means has been operated in a predetermined period after the timing estimated by the estimation means and the estimated timing;
When the operation unit is operated during the estimated timing or the predetermined period, an operation corresponding process execution unit (MPU 652 of the notification / production control device 143) executes a predetermined operation response process corresponding to the operation. And a forcible change process).

  In the configuration shown in this feature, when the game ball passes through the ball detection means (detection position), the timing at which the game ball flows into the entrance part of the entrance portion is estimated, and the estimated timing and the predetermined time thereafter are estimated. It will be determined whether or not the operating means has been operated during the period. If it is operated during this period, a predetermined operation handling process is executed. For this reason, it is possible to prompt the player who is expected to perform the operation handling process to perform the operation aiming at the timing when the game ball flows into the entrance portion. Therefore, the player's attention can be encouraged to be directed to the game ball, which can contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  Here, in the configuration in which the ball passage and the ball detecting means are not visible from the front of the gaming machine, the inflow to the entrance portion = the occurrence of the winning and the game even though the passing of the predetermined position = the occurrence of winning The possibility of being recognized by a person increases. In the configuration in which a ball is detected by the ball detection means attached to the ball entrance portion, a configuration in accordance with the player's recognition can be realized by arranging the ball detection means at the entrance portion. By being arranged in the vicinity of the part, the effect of suppressing unauthorized access to the sphere detection means is reduced. In addition, for example, a detection means for detecting a game ball may be separately provided at the entrance portion, and the entrance detection at the entrance portion may be performed separately. It becomes a factor that hinders simplification / simplification. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the degree of attention to the game is obtained by using the existing ball detection means as a configuration that reversely calculates whether or not the operation was performed at the entrance passage timing from the timing of the game ball detection. It can suppress suitably that new subjects, such as arrangement space, arise in improving improvement.

  Feature I8. The gaming machine according to claim I7, wherein the estimating means performs the estimation based on a passing speed of a game ball passing through the predetermined position.

  As shown in the feature I7, when the entrance portion of the entrance portion is separated from the predetermined position (ball detecting means), the game portion passes from the entrance portion to the predetermined position by the passing speed (movement speed). There will be a difference in the required period. Therefore, as shown in this feature, estimation can be made in consideration of the passing speed of the game ball, thereby contributing to improvement in estimation accuracy.

  Note that the technical ideas shown in the features F1 to F6 can be applied to the features F7 to F8.

  Further, the technical ideas shown in the features I1 to I8 may be applied to the features A to H.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko machine: operation means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by a player, game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the fired A ball path (guide path 103 of the guide rail 100, etc.) for guiding a game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and game parts (nails, etc.) arranged in the game area, each of these game parts Among these, a gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing portion (general winning opening 61 or the like).

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 41 ... Game ball launching handle, 60 ... Game board, 62 ... Lower operation entrance or first entrance, 62a ... Lower operation entrance or first operation entrance, 63 ... Right side Operational entrance part or second entrance part, 63a ... right operation port or second operation port, 64 ... upper variable winning device, 65 ... lower variable winning device, 70 ... winning unit, 75 ... symbol display device, 75a ... display screen, 81 ... main display unit, 110 ... game ball launching mechanism, 143 ... notification / production control device, 162 ... main control device, 191 ... power source / launch control device, 222 ... payout device, 311 ... upper prize opening 602 ... MPU, 604 ... RAM, 632 ... Reserved ball storage area, 801 ... Sphere passage, 802 ... Upstream passage portion, 803 ... Communication passage portion, 804 ... Downstream passage portion, 821 ... Back wall portion, 850 ... Sphere Detection sensor, D ... main display, D ... Display unit for first working port, D2 ... Display unit for second working port, DP ... Detection position, DS ... Display unit for through gate, ME ... Change display area, MP ... Pending icon, PE ... Game area, ST ... Stock icon display area, SI ... stock icon, VDP ... 715.

Claims (5)

A gaming machine comprising a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed, and having a pitching portion into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter,
The entrance portion includes a ball passage through which a game ball that has flowed into an entrance portion of the entrance portion passes, and a ball detection unit that is attached to the ball passage and can detect a game ball that passes through a predetermined position in the ball passage. And the ball passage and the ball detection means are configured to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine,
Operation means operated by a player;
When a game ball that passes through the predetermined position is detected by the ball detecting means, the game ball that is the target of detection in the period before the game ball is detected is an entrance portion of the entrance portion. Operation timing determination means for determining whether or not the operation means was operated during a predetermined period including the timing of passing through
When the operation timing determination unit determines that the operation unit has been operated during the predetermined period, the operation timing determination unit includes an operation response process execution unit that executes a predetermined operation response process corresponding to the operation. A gaming machine characterized by that. Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters the ball entrance section;
Acquisition information storage means capable of storing a plurality of special information acquired by the special information acquisition means;
Hold display control for displaying the number of hold images corresponding to the number of the special information currently stored in the acquired information storage means in the hold display area, and sequentially moving the hold image from the hold display area to the determination display area With means,
The said predetermined period is prescribed | regulated so that it may become shorter than the period required until the game ball which passed the entrance part of the said entrance part reaches | attains the said predetermined position. Gaming machine. A period measuring unit that measures a period from when the operation unit is operated until a game ball is detected by the ball detecting unit;
The operation timing determination unit compares the period measured by the period measurement unit with a reference period set in advance, thereby the operation unit during the predetermined period before the corresponding game ball is detected. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is configured to determine whether or not the game machine has been operated.   The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the operation timing determination unit includes a unit that changes the reference period according to a passing speed of a game ball passing through the ball passage. The sphere detection means is configured to output a detection signal when passing through the predetermined position,
The gaming machine according to claim 4, wherein the operation timing determination unit includes a unit that changes the reference period based on a length of a detection signal output from the ball detection unit.

Images